JP2021069770A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably operating an operation part allowing one portion of a player's body to touch.SOLUTION: A sub-control board 940 is configured so as to execute at least: control for controlling operation of a pressing operation device 1261 such that an operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 can be operated in a direction opposite to the pressing operation at a predetermined traveling speed when a first predetermined performance is executed as a performance in specific variation display; and control for controlling operation of the pressing operation device 1261 such that the operation surface can be operated in the opposite direction at a speed differing from the predetermined traveling speed when a second performance having a different degree of expectation from the first performance is executed as a performance in the specific variation display. In this case, game properties for allowing a player to estimate a degree of expectation toward a performance executed in specific variation display according to a traveling speed of the operation surface can be provided.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 40

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball gaming machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (eg, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-31031

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of suitably operating a moving portion capable of contacting a part of the player's body. It is the purpose.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is used to solve the above problems.
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result, and
A moving unit that is accessible to a part of the player's body and can move in a predetermined direction that the player can press is provided, and the operating unit is designated in a state where the player's body is not in contact. An operating means that can be placed in a neutral position,
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation unit can be changed, and the position of the operation unit is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. Motion control means that controls displacement and
A display selection means for selecting a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied.
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means for controlling the display of the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means on the display unit is provided.
As an embodiment selected by the display selection means, a specific variation display including a period during which the moving unit can operate during the period of the variation display according to the embodiment is included.
The specific variation display is configured so that when the moving unit operates during the period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.
When a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variation display, the operation control means can operate the operation means so that the operation unit can operate in the opposite direction at a predetermined moving speed. When the first control to be controlled and the second effect having different expectations from the first effect are executed as the effect in the specific variation display, the moving unit moves at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed. It is characterized in that it is configured to at least be executable with a second control that controls the operation of the operating means so as to be able to operate in the opposite direction.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating a moving portion capable of contacting a part of the player's body.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a game machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view showing the state where the front block of the pachinko machine is removed Front view of the game board Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing (A) is a front view showing a part of the design sheet, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the design sheet in line AA of FIG. 13 (A). (A) to (C) are front views of the decorative symbol display device of the second embodiment, and (D) is a front view showing a part of the symbol sheet corresponding to each symbol row. Front view of the decorative symbol display device in the modified example of the second embodiment (A) is a schematic side view for explaining the configuration of the reel device, and (B) to (C) are front views of the decorative symbol display device of the third embodiment. Front view of the game board of the fourth embodiment (A) is a front view of the light emitting decoration, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the light emitting decoration in line BB of FIG. 18 (A). A screen view showing an example of an effect image displayed by the decorative symbol display device of the fifth embodiment. Schematic diagram for explaining the configuration and operation of the pressing operation device included in the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment. Schematic diagram showing an example of the appearance of the pressing operation device according to the operation position The explanatory view which shows the relationship between the operation position of a pressing operation device, and the reaction force with respect to the pushing operation when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device. Front side perspective view of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment Schematic diagram for explaining the pressing operation device included in the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment. (A) is a screen transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device when a special symbol start winning is generated, and (B) is a screen transition diagram for the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state. A screen transition diagram showing an example of screen transitions in a variable display displayed on a decorative symbol display device when a push operation is performed. A screen view showing an example of a variable display and a definite display displayed on a decorative symbol display device in the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment. In the pachinko machine of the eleventh embodiment, a screen view showing an example of display contents displayed on the decorative symbol display device during the operable period in the variable display configured to enable operation input. In the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment, a screen view showing an example of display contents displayed on the decorative symbol display device during the operable period in the variable display configured to enable operation input. Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining amount of the operable period and the state of the pressing operation device in the variable display configured to enable operation input. Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining time of the fluctuation display and the state of the pressing operation device A time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the fluctuation display when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the fluctuation display. A time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the fluctuation display when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the fluctuation display. The figure for demonstrating the control in which the height position of the operation surface of a pressing operation device is set to a plurality of types displaced from the initial position to different height positions as an opportunity of the effect executed in the variation display. The figure for demonstrating the control in which the height position of the operation surface of a pressing operation device is set to a plurality of types displaced from the initial position to different height positions as an opportunity of the effect executed in the variation display. The figure for demonstrating a plurality of types of control in the case where the operation surface of a pressing operation device is pushed in, and then the operation surface is once lowered and then returned as an effect executed in the variation display. Explanatory drawing for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of a pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for an operating mechanism. Explanatory drawing for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of a pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for an operating mechanism. Explanatory drawing for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of a pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for an operating mechanism. Explanatory drawing for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of a pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for an operating mechanism. Explanatory drawing for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of a pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for an operating mechanism. Explanatory drawing for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of a pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for an operating mechanism. Explanatory drawing for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of a pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for an operating mechanism.

Regarding the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pachinko machine 100 as an example of the ball game machine which is a kind of the gaming machine will be described, and then the modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, the structural configuration, the electrical configuration, and various control processes of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in order.

<Structural structure>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 integrated with the outer frame 101. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is open to the intermediate block 103. Shown. Further, FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and each of these parts is relatively operated by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is, for example, a substantially four-sided frame body to which the top plate portion 111, the bottom plate portion 112, the left side plate portion 113, and the right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into the game machine installation equipment (island equipment) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). The outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 100, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and has a main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101. A support mechanism for supporting the island and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body thereof may be provided in the island equipment.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (connected) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates on one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

As shown in FIG. 1, for example, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided apart from the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the outer frame 101. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. Is configured to be rotatable by being in a state of being inserted. The configuration in which the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 can be rotated is not limited to the above configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. On the other hand, it is detachably attached. For example, by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a certain amount, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released. To. As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the front side, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in the front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 rotatably forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove the front block 102 by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the rear side, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are connected by the rear block support mechanism 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side of the front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configurations as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so as to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. In addition, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined removal operation.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front. There is a lock operation mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block lock mechanism. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

When a clockwise rotation operation is performed using an operation key (not shown) as a predetermined operation for the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as part of the intermediate block locking mechanism and the movable portion 143 is released, and the intermediate block 103 is in an open / closed allowable state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates in response to the counterclockwise rotation operation of the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 and the movable portion 144 provided in the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is released, and the front block 102 is in an open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism that regulates the opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. After that, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing is prohibited (opening and closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing is permitted (opening and closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation by the rear block opening / closing regulation mechanism. It is said that.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism is composed of, for example, two opening / closing restricting units 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restricting unit 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C capable of rotating operations are provided in these three opening / closing restricting units 150A to 150C. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change the engagement state with the opening portions arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 by the rotation operation, whereby the opening / closing prohibition posture corresponding to the opening / closing prohibition state is changed. It is possible to switch between and the open / close allowable posture corresponding to the open / close allowable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the open / close allowable posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is in the open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. As for the open / close prohibition posture and the open / close allowable posture, the open / close prohibited state and the open / close allowable state may be switched by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and only the rotation is performed at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a certain direction, or it may be configured to operate by combining movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members in each device shift between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed in the rear block 104 in a state where the rear block 104 is prohibited from opening and closing, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103 as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the open / close allowable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, thereby providing crime prevention. Has been raised.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement regulation mechanism that regulates the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement regulation mechanism is composed of a combination of a flow-down regulation piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a regulation change unit 162 provided in the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 is urged by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In the state where the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow control piece 161 is set to a movement allowable state that allows the flow of the game ball. It is pushed toward the rear side of the intermediate block 103 by the changing portion 162. The flow control piece 161 is arranged so as to be displaced to the rear side with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. As a result, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the front block 102 is open), the pressure of the flow control piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102, and the movement is prohibited. The flow control piece 161 projects into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 100, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (left side when viewed from the rear). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the slingshot is set is provided, and as shown in FIG. 3, for example, an intermediate block is provided at the lower end portion on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (right side in front view). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided with respect to 103.

Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached as. In the state where the base frame 201 constituting the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210A is formed through in the front-rear direction over a wide range excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through the opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, and a main storage mechanism 230. It includes an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls, and a launch operation device 250 operated by a player to launch the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 has an opening peripheral edge portion 211 surrounding the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a protrusion forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A as a part of the front decorative body 210. The upper protruding portion 217, the lower protruding portion 218 located on the lower side with respect to the upper protruding portion 217 and projecting forward, and the upper protruding portion 217 and the lower protruding portion on the right side of the lower protruding portion 218. A flat portion 219, which is composed of a substantially flat region located behind 218 and in which the launch operating device 250 is arranged, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is arranged on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged on the lower protrusion 218.

The central panel 220 has a function as a cover body that makes it possible to visually recognize the rear side while closing the opening 210A that is formed through the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, for example, the central panel 220 has a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light transmissive fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. A front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a light-transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted to the rear side of the panel frame 221 substantially in parallel with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and game balls rented from the game hall. As shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, a storage unit 231, a ball pulling mechanism (not shown), and a ball pulling operation member 232 for operating the ball pulling mechanism. The storage section 231 includes an inflow port 231A for flowing the game ball from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 into the storage section 231 and an outlet (not shown) for flowing out the game ball from the storage section 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. An outlet (not shown) formed on the upstream side of the outlet is provided. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball pulling mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outlet and the discharge port.

The game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent out according to the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later flow into the storage unit 231 mainly through the inflow port 231A. Further, the storage unit 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, through which a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted or a game ball rented out at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being arranged in a row. When the ball pulling operation (for example, pressing operation) is not performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball pulling operation is performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage unit 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and the discharge port 241B. It is provided with a ball pulling mechanism 243 for causing the ball to be pulled out, and a ball pulling operation member 242 for operating the ball pulling mechanism 243. The game balls and the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage unit 231 is full, they flow into the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 to the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C even when the ball removal operation is performed on the ball removal operation member 232.

The bottom surface of the storage unit 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball pulling operation (for example, pressing operation) on the ball pulling operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball pulling operation on the ball pulling operation member 242, the discharge port 241B remains in the opened state until the returning operation (for example, the pressing operation again) is performed on the ball pulling operation member 242. Be maintained. At the back of the inflow port 241A, a ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the launch operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable launch handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the launch handle 252, and the launch handle 252. It includes a launch stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that invalidates the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, the game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the launch handle 252 and the player, or if the launch operation is invalidated by the operation of the launch stop switch 255, the launch handle 252 is rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launching device 330.

Further, a frame light emitting device 271-275 (see FIG. 10) is provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271-275 are arranged so as to overlap the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left side edge portion 211B and an upper right side edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides with respect to the upper central edge portion 211A, and an upper left side edge portion 211. The left edge portion 211D located on the lower side with respect to the 211B and the right edge portion 211E located on the lower side with respect to the upper right side edge portion 211C are provided as light emitting portions, and the frame emits light corresponding to the respective light emitting portions. Devices 271-275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271-275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge portion 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting device corresponding to the upper right side edge portion 211C. It is composed of a device 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 electrically connects one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and these electronic components in an integrated manner. It has a printed circuit board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G, for example, above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located behind (rearward) the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right side portion of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays numerical values according to the remaining amount of bills, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending device 291. It includes a lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving the payment, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit. When a banknote, a card, or the like is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in the valid state in which the numerical value corresponding to the amount of money is displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. A predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104 accordingly, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated as the game balls are rented out. On the other hand, when the return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the balance and the card recording the balance are returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 capable of performing an input operation different from the firing operation by the player. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a press operation device 261 capable of a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 capable of a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 capable of operating in the up, down, left, and right directions. These operating devices 261 to 263 are used for an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player. It is possible to execute production setting operations that enable the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game by inputting information, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game hall as needed. It is said that. The input operation unit (for example, the annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) that the player contacts in the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or moved by the input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that operations such as vibration can be performed by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), and either before or after the input operation or during the input operation, or By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects involving the input operation, such as actively encouraging the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and a function of integrating the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on commands from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) to eject, the main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress in an integrated manner, and the main control device 370. It is equipped with a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) that controls game production and status notification.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding the game ball released from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, to the front block 102 is formed therein. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are provided in various devices (for example, frame light emitting devices 271-) provided in the front block 102. 275, upper left acoustic device 281 and upper right acoustic device 282) for electrically connecting devices provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 (for example, main control device 370 and sub control device 390). The signal relay device 311 including wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat plate-shaped base 401 having a through hole through which a game ball such as a discharge port 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. The 402, the inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, the return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left tip of the inner rail 403, and the upper right tip of the outer rail 402. It is provided with a rebound prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides the game ball launched from the launching device 330, which will be described later, into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed in the portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 face each other in parallel to return to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property that prevents a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right side beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, it is made of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back surface side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the guiding member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 toward the launching passage 401B and the outer rail 402, and the ball is launched from the launching device 330 but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning from the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below the gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) while falling in the game area due to its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which most of the area has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The outer peripheral portion of the game area is generally divided by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is divided into a substantially flat shape by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially flat by the base 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into. Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feeding mechanism 331 that sequentially sends out the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the firing position, and a ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). (See), the launch mechanism 333 that ejects the game ball arranged at the launch position, the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and the game ball launched from the launch mechanism 333 on the game board 400. It is provided with a guide member 335 that guides the vehicle to the launch passage 401B. As described above, the launch device 330 operates in response to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250, and the drive control of the launch solenoid 334 changes according to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250 to adjust the launch force.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a halved structure for accommodating the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a translucent board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, the attachment portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the base 401 of the game board 400 on the back side, and the main control device 370 is attached to the attachment portion 372. As a result, not only the back side (front side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 is attached to the game board 400. It is said that it can be easily confirmed with it attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a halved structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. Like the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 is housed inside a translucent board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

Here, various structures arranged in the game area on the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates an example of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a flow change member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412 that change the flow direction and flow speed of the game ball, and a center arranged substantially in the center of the base 401. The structure 420, the starting device (specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B) arranged below the central structure 420 and the first special symbol, and the center. A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) arranged on the lower right side of the structure 420 and a large winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432. , 434 (specifically, the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right starting winning device 432, and the game board 400. The combination operating device 435 located on the upper right side and above (upstream side) with respect to the upper and lower large winning devices 433 and 434, and the general winning device 439A arranged on the left and right sides of the lower middle starting winning device 431B. , 439B and.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned upper middle start winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10), and corresponds to each switch. It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into a predetermined area. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A, and a middle starting winning switch (lower) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle starting winning device 431B. Side middle start winning switch 441B), right starting winning switch 442 that detects the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432, lower grand winning switch 443 that detects the game ball that has entered the lower grand winning device 433, upper grand winning device Top prize switch 444 that detects the game ball that has entered 434, the combination operation switch 445 that detects the game ball that has entered the combination operating device 435, the start switch 446 that detects the game ball that has entered the starting device 436, and below. Non-specific passage switch 447 that detects a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the grand prize device 433, and a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the lower prize device 433. The game board 400 is provided with a specific passage switch 448 for detecting the game balls that have entered the game board, general prize switches 449A and 449B for detecting the game balls that have entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B, and the like.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors for fraud prevention (see FIG. 10), and it is possible to detect an abnormality generated in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitutes an entry port, and the game ball that has entered each entry port is discharged to the game area. Games of each winning device, specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, the upper winning device 434 and the general winning device 439A, 439B. The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering each winning opening is guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401 through a through hole formed in the base 401. .. Further, the game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream side portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection / discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or a device in which two or more winning devices (for example, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) are integrated. The winning device may be configured by the above, and the starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls enter. It may be used as an entrance where the ball is released again into the game area without being paid out.

Each of the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B, and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B related to the first special symbol does not change the entry probability of the game ball and enters them. The game ball is guided to the back side of the base 401. Further, the right-starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof. It should be noted that the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball does not have to be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol, and instead of or in addition to the starting device related to the first special symbol, the general winning device. It may be provided in any one or more of 439A and 439B. Further, the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball may be configured by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or is represented by a mechanism that operates by the own weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanically operating mechanism.

The right-starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a right-entry regulation mechanism 452 and a right-entry regulation mechanism that change the entry probability of a game ball into the inside by shifting between an entry-allowed posture and an entry-prohibited posture. It is equipped with a right entry control solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives 452. The right entry control mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry control solenoid 462, and when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces enter the entrance (winning opening). ) Is narrowed (or closed) so that the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, two movable pieces are at their tips. The game ball can enter the right-starting winning device 432 by arranging the portions so that the distance between the portions is widened. The right entry regulation mechanism 452 enters right when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol is won by a lottery based on the detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol lottery"). According to the drive by the regulation solenoid 462, the posture shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower entry prize device 433 includes a lower entry regulation mechanism 453 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the lower entry regulation mechanism 453. By shifting between the lower entry control solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453 and the non-guided posture and the guided posture, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is placed in the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distribution mechanism (not shown) for distribution and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for switching the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the posture of the distribution mechanism are provided. When the lower entry control mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower prize winning device 433 because the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning opening). When the lower entry control mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry control mechanism 453 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture protruding forward, and when the distribution mechanism is in a guided posture immersed in the rear. Will be guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, the player is given an advantageous gaming state as a privilege. ..

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning device 434 includes an upper entry regulation mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454. An upper entry control solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry control mechanism 454 is in the no-entry posture, the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434 because the upper entry control mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening), but the upper entry control mechanism 454. When is in the admissible posture, the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the upper prize winning device 434.

In addition, as the approach permissible posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball into the inside of the right entry regulation mechanism 452 or the like, each mechanism is configured and the winning port (or ball entry port) of each device is formed. Corresponding to the change in posture of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the positions and orientations of the operating member differs depending on each posture. All you need is. Further, as a mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball such as the right entry regulation mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter into the normal state, and the game ball is allowed to enter even in the normal state, which is special. In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 when a big hit lottery is won. Specifically, the game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A or the lower middle starting winning switch 441B. When a lottery based on (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery") is won, or a game ball that has entered the right-starting winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right-starting winning switch 442. When the lottery based on (hereinafter, also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") is won, at least one of the lower entry regulation solenoid 463 and the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. Further, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guided posture according to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the shift to the approach allowed posture of the lower approach restricting mechanism 453, and further switches to the guided posture after a predetermined time from the shift to the guided posture. When the solenoid 465 is stopped, it returns to the non-guided posture.

The combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 to start operation. After winning the big hit lottery, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 passes. Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the player can start the special game state at the timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary that either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 start the operation on the condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes, and instead of or instead of that, it is not necessary. In addition, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 may start operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 that display variable display of symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 that display the number of times the game is held. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are divided in advance in a light emitting region corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed according to the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, the first special symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A second special symbol display device 471 related to a special symbol, a second special symbol that is variablely displayed in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, and a second special symbol that is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 related to a special symbol, a special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a first special symbol, and a special symbol hold that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a second special symbol. A display device 477 is provided. The right to the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol are reserved up to four times each. Here, the unit game is a game for one time executed based on one start winning, a winning / failing judgment of a lottery executed based on one starting winning, and a lottery based on the winning / failing judgment. It refers to a series of games including from the start to the end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the start winning device 431 is the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle starting winning switch. Even if it is detected by 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 is detected by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10). However, the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (lighting, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol determine the number of holds depending on the combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

Further, the game board 400 relates to a normal symbol display device 473 that displays the normal symbol in a variable manner or displays the normal symbol with a stop symbol according to the lottery result in accordance with the normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol. An ordinary symbol hold display device 478 that displays the number of times the right of the unit game is held is provided. The right to unit games related to ordinary symbols is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

The ordinary symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). An ordinary pattern is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts. Further, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of holds by a combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units.

Further, on the game board 400, the decorative symbols may be variablely displayed or the decorative symbols may be fixedly displayed in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided.

The decorative symbol display device 479 includes three symbol display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C arranged in the left-right direction. The symbol display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C are all areas for variable display and definite display of decorative symbols. Of the symbol display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C, the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 479A located on the leftmost side constitute the left symbol row, and the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 479B located on the rightmost side. Consists of the right symbol column. Further, the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 479C located between the symbol display area 479A and the symbol display area 479B form a middle symbol row.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 479 is configured as a reel device including three cylindrical reels (rotating bodies) arranged in the left-right direction. Each reel of the reel device is configured to be independently rotatable by a motor (not shown) controlled by a sub-control board 940.

Each of the cylindrical reels constituting the reel device includes a cylindrical main body (hereinafter, also referred to as a "reel main body") made of a light-transmitting resin (for example, a transparent resin) and an outer peripheral surface of the reel main body. It is provided with a strip-shaped pattern sheet 601 (see FIG. 13) attached along the circumferential direction of the above. The symbol sheet 601 is provided with a plurality of decorative symbols in a predetermined order in a row along the longitudinal direction.

The decorative symbol display device 479 moves a plurality of decorative symbols provided on the symbol sheet 601 from top to bottom or vice versa in each symbol display area 479A, 479B, 479C by rotating each reel ( Can be scrolled). As a result, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is realized. The decorative pattern display device 479 does not necessarily have to be composed of a plurality of reels, and may be configured by another device such as a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying an image.

The variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 479 are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and diverse effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and confirmation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and final display of the decorative symbol do not always start to change at the timing when they completely match, or stop display as a final display. It is not necessary, and the fluctuation may be started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the confirmation display may be performed at substantially the same timing.

Further, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub-control board 940. Executes various light emission effects and status notification by light emission.

Here, various gaming states and transitions between gaming states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "normal game state") is a state in which the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter, also referred to as "non-time reduction state"). Correspond.

If a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (internal passage of the lower prize winning device 433) during the special game state that shifts based on the winning. Depending on whether or not, the gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state is different. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the variation display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time reduction state (hereinafter, "time reduction state"). (Also referred to as "low probability state"), and the winning probability of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as "low probability state"). In the following, it will also be referred to as the "short-time game state"). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the time is shortened and the jackpot winning probability in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than in the normal game state. It shifts to a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a "probability changing gaming state") which is (hereinafter also referred to as a "high probability state").

The time-saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but then returns to the normal game state. Further, the probabilistic gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but then returns to the normal gaming state.

It should be noted that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state does not necessarily have to be the above-described configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit, or the above-mentioned gaming state may be configured depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a gaming state different from each of the above-mentioned gaming states may be further included, or the gaming states may be shifted under conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions.

Next, the operations of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described roughly in chronological order. In the main control board 920, winning random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, stop pattern random numbers, and various variable pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various gaming states are generated. When a game ball that has entered any of the start winning devices 431A and 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by any of the medium start winning switches 441A and 441B (see FIG. 10), the start winning of the first special symbol It becomes. If the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is neither in the special game state nor in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the unit game related to the first special symbol. If the rights to are not reserved, they are started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even when the player is not in the special game state, when the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved or the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. Is started after the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) held before the current prize is completed, the unit game based on the current start prize is started. If each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the current start prize after the special game state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

In addition, the unit game using random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the second special symbol after the current start prize, the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. It should be noted that the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not necessarily executed in the order of the start prize. The unit game superiority control according to the above may be executed, or the two special symbols may not be alternative and may be variable at the same time.

If a big hit is won in the 1st special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the 1st special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit winning of the 1st special symbol lottery based on the acquired big hit symbol random number ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol corresponds to the type of the jackpot. For example, the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times that the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture, A plurality of types of jackpots are set according to the type of gaming state such as the gaming state (whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state) that shifts after the special gaming state, and the jackpot symbol is set for each type. If the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, the first special is based on the current game state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various variable pattern random number values, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held. The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. The variation patterns of the decorative symbols are roughly classified into the variation patterns in which the reach is displayed before the decorative symbols corresponding to the stop symbols (big hit symbols or lost symbols) related to the first special symbol are confirmed and displayed (hereinafter, "reach"). (Also referred to as "variable pattern"), and a variable pattern in which the reach display is not performed before the decorative symbol corresponding to the case where the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a lost symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In addition, "reach display" means each symbol sequence (for example, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), except for one symbol sequence (for example). The decoration of the remaining symbol rows (for example, the middle symbol row) in which the combination of the decorative symbols confirmed and displayed in each of the left and right symbol rows) satisfies the condition for becoming a jackpot symbol and the variable display is continued thereafter. It is a display that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit symbol depending on the display result (that is, the stop symbol) when the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The reach display includes a normal reach, which is a reach display with a relatively short fluctuation display time (for example, about 25 seconds to about 30 seconds), and a reach display with a fluctuation display time longer than the normal reach (for example, about 60 seconds to about 180 seconds). Includes Super Reach. The types of reach display are not limited to two types, normal reach and super reach, and may be three or more types including special reach, which is a reach display with a variable display time longer than that of super reach.

After the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display time is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol The variable display (variable effect) of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued over the variable display time, and the decorative symbol is varied. The fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern is continued over the display time. After that, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the decorative symbol. The final display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the confirmation display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 of the upper prize winning device 434 are in the approach allowable posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the grand prize switch 443, 444 during each approach allowable posture in the lower entry control mechanism 453 and the upper entry control mechanism 454, or a predetermined maximum. When the permissible entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry control mechanism 453 or the upper entry control mechanism 454 shifts to the no-entry posture. Then, after the elapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 returns to the approach allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The lower approach regulation mechanism 453 and the upper approach regulation mechanism 454 are configured so that only one of them takes an entry allowable posture during the special gaming state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special gaming state (after the opening period). ), One shifts to the first entry allowed posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses from the return to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and after that, a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the starting prize of the second special symbol is obtained. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. Will be done. In addition, the stop symbol is determined according to the second special symbol lottery, the variation display time of the second special symbol is determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display time is selected, the variation display is executed, and the game state. The transition control and the like of the above are also executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol.

In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the start device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is completed.

In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the player has won based on the value of the winning random number, and if the unit game is won, a predetermined winning symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuation display by a constant pattern is continued for a predetermined variation display time, and the time reduction state is achieved. Continues the variation display according to a constant pattern for a predetermined variation display time shorter than the non-time reduction state. With the passage of a predetermined time according to the game state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the right approach restricting mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once after the confirmation display of the normal symbol. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 second). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving gaming state and probability variation gaming state) after shifting to the state, the predetermined maximum approach allowable time (for example, about 4.8 seconds) longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to enter the permissible posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum entry allowable time. Further, even if the number of transitions to the approach allowable posture has not reached a predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol this time is completed.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, the player must win in the ordinary symbol lottery, and further, the game ball enters the right-starting winning device 432 in the entry-allowed state of the right-starting winning device 432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry allowed state of the right-starting winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, omitted). Since (0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) in the time saving state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. Is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. On the contrary, in the time-saving state such as the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. ..

Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, the player plays with the aim of shifting to the probabilistic game state by allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the central portion of the game area where the game ball flows down, and a game method (left-handed game) in which the game ball flows down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420. The method) and the game method (right-handed game method) in which the game ball flows down from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. In the normal game state, the player plays the game by the left-handed game method, and in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state, the player plays the game by the right-handed game method. Further, since the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is performed by the right-handed gaming method even in the special gaming state.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the substrate 501. By connecting the substrate 501 and the intermediate block 103 by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game ball and the game ball on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 (for example, in one row) and arranges them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment part, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding part for guiding a game ball flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball payout on the downstream side of the case rail 530. Guidance as a ball guiding unit that guides the payout device 540 that executes the rental of the game ball and the game ball that has flowed out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed on the base 501. The member 550, the payout control device 560 that controls the payout of the game ball and the lending of the game ball by the payout device 540, and the power supply that converts the external power into the power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply / launch control device 570 and a payout control device 560 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the ejection of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. It also includes a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a relay device 950 that relays a signal between a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100.

The substrate 501 is integrally molded with a resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and other devices can be attached to the base portion 502. It has a function as a mounted part to be attached.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not have a shape that covers the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected and confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370, is the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is set to a size that forms a window for exposure to. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving heat dissipation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of an island facility are sequentially replenished to one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof. An opening (not shown) is formed in the game ball tank 510 on one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side on which the game ball is supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential in the game ball tank 510 and inside the game ball tank 510. The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows in through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 forming a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width through which the game balls pass in a row, and a passage forming member 521 gradually increasing in height as an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. It is provided with a rectifying member 522 having a top surface portion having a lower top surface and gradually rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage from a height that overlaps vertically to a height of one step. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is vertically elongated so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. The case rail 530 is continuous downward while being curved to the left and right so that the game ball does not flow vigorously. In addition, a ball breakage detection unit 539 for detecting ball breakage is provided in the middle of the ball passage in the case rail 530. The ball-out detection unit 539 has a built-in storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10), and the storage ball switch 591 causes ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or its upstream side, so that the game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects a ball out condition that is not normally replenished.

The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for delivering the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving means for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game ball stored in the ball passage is discharged to the downstream side. The passage of the released game ball through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / emission control device 570 are attached so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the base 501 so as to be located at the lower rear side of the rear block 104. Has been done. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave a trace of opening like the main control board 920. It is housed inside a board case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply / launch control device 570 includes a power supply / launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the power supply / launch control board 900, and the power supply / launch control board 900 is the same as the main control board 920. It is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a rear setting switch 905 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 100. The rear setting switch 905 is set to enable the setting operation for setting the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 100 to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages (for example, 6 stages or 9 stages). It is a pachinko machine.

A predetermined key (not shown) is inserted into the rear setting switch 905 and rotated to a predetermined position (in the present embodiment, a position rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial position) to change the ball ejection rate setting. Can be enabled (allowed). By performing a predetermined setting operation (in this embodiment, pressing the initialization switch 907) in a state where the setting change of the ball ejection rate is enabled, the setting change of the ball ejection rate is effectively performed.

When the setting change of the ball ejection rate is effectively performed, a predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. That is, it can be said that changing the setting of the ball ejection rate by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is a setting change of the game mode.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first hit probability (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery) is performed according to each stage set by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate (that is, changing the setting of the game mode). (Winning probability) and probability variation continuation rate (in this embodiment, the probability of transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the special gaming state when transitioning to the special gaming state via the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation gaming state) It is possible to select one of nine types of game modes in which the combination with and is different. Therefore, when the setting change of the ball output rate (setting change of the game mode) is effectively performed, the first special symbol lottery and the second special so that the first hit probability and the continuation probability according to the set stage are obtained. The ball output rate is adjusted by changing each winning probability of the symbol lottery (that is, using the probability lottery data according to each winning probability).

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top type having a significantly low initial hit probability but a significantly high probability variation continuation rate and the middle type having a medium initial hit probability and a medium probability variation continuation rate. You can select the type and the bottom type, which has a significantly low probability of first hit but a significantly high probability change continuation rate. Further, in each of these types, the initial hit probability of each type is subdivided into three stages of probability states (hereinafter, also referred to as probability setting states) that are smaller than the width of the initial hit probability between each type, that is, The first-stage probability with the lowest first-hit probability among the three stages, the second-stage probability with the second lowest first-hit probability, and the third-stage probability with the highest first-hit probability can be selected.

In the top type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the upper and lower middle start winning devices 431A and 431B and the right starting winning device 432 is smaller than that of other types, but the lower grand prize device 433 and the upper grand prize device 434 are won. The number of prize balls associated with this is larger than that of other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the middle start winning device 431A, 431B and the right starting winning device 432 is larger than that of other types, but the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are won. The number of prize balls associated with this is less than that of other types.

Here, the number of prize balls may be set to the same for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to judge from the number of prize balls whether the setting is the top type, the middle type, or the bottom type, and the playability of guessing the setting of which type is made over a long period of time. Can be added.

In addition, the profit margin for the player changes depending on the stage of the probability setting state for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same for all types. The profit margins for the players are set to be substantially the same. Therefore, even if the probability setting is changed by changing the type, the profit per fixed period (for example, one day) acquired by the game hall side can be easily predicted, and the game field can be easily managed.

It should be noted that the game mode to be changed by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate is not necessarily limited to the combination of the first hit probability and the probability variation inrush rate as described above, and for example, the first hit probability or the probability variation. It may be any of the inrush rates. In addition, lottery probabilities other than the first hit probability and the probability variation inrush rate, for example, the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. The probability that a small hit will be selected, the probability variation inrush rate (in this embodiment, the probability of entering the probability variation game state via winning in the second special symbol lottery), and the probability variation game state that has shifted after the special game state. May end (for example, the probability that the end of the probabilistic game state is selected in the fall lottery performed each time the variable display of the symbol is executed during the probabilistic game state), and each of these game modes It may be a combination of two or more of.

A setting display device 906 is provided above the rear setting switch 905. When the ball output rate setting change (game mode setting change) is effectively performed by operating the rear setting switch 905, the setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. .. The setting display information is composed of a combination of an alphabetic character indicating a type and a number indicating a probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type is represented by the letters "T", "M", and "B", respectively. Further, in each type of probability setting state, the first-stage probability is represented by "1", the second-stage probability is represented by "2", and the third-stage probability is represented by "3".

Therefore, for example, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the top type first stage probability game mode is "T1", and in the case of the middle type third stage probability game mode. The setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "M3", and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the bottom type second-stage probability game mode is "B2".

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be described in detail individually.

The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies electric power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device according to the operation of the launch operation device 250. It includes a launch control unit 902 that controls the drive of the 330, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside, converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various electric powers from the internal power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is the electric power of the driving voltage (for example, 12 volt DC) for driving various devices such as solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. It includes the power of the control voltage (for example, 5 volt DC) for the operation, the power of the backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various electric powers generated from the internal electric power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the power supply monitoring board 910. Powers of a drive voltage, a control voltage, and a backup voltage are supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the sub-control board 940. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the off state, the intake of external power is stopped. By turning off the power switch 909 or disconnecting the power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from the external power supply outlet (not shown), the pachinko machine can be used. A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a "power failure state".

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so that it can return to the current control state.

The launch control unit 902 controls the drive of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 are allowed to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected that the player is touching the launch handle 252 (see FIG. 1) based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the launch stop switch 255 for stopping the launch is On condition that it is not operated, the launch control unit 902 outputs a launch permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a launch solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the launch control unit 902 based on the launch permission signal and the launch abnormality signal. The launch control unit 902 operates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ball feed control signal in the on state, and operates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the launch solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let me. As a result, the game balls are sequentially launched from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (rotational operation amount of the launching handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The main control board 920 initializes the stored information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 is directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the board case 371, whereby it is possible to suppress an illegal signal input targeting a section in which a signal is transmitted.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. In the main control board 920, a low-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that receives the low-speed payout signal is the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. The payout speed of the game ball from the device 540) is reduced. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that receives the high-speed payout signal sets the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, a rear setting switch 905 and a setting display device 906 are connected to the signal relay unit 903. The signal relay unit 903 relays the on-state setting signal output to the main control board 920 when the rear setting switch 905 is rotated by approximately 90 ° clockwise by a predetermined key (not shown). The main control board 920 allows a change in the game mode in response to receiving a setting signal in the ON state from the rear setting switch 905. Further, the signal relay unit 903 relays the setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

The power supply monitoring board 910 transmits power supply and various signals between the power supply monitoring unit 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power supply / emission control board 900 and the power supply / emission control board 900 and the main control board 920. It includes a signal relay unit 912 to be relayed. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the power failure state is established, and the power failure signal in the ON state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. The main control board 920 is equipped with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU includes a CPU as an arithmetic processing unit (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. It includes a RAM (not shown) for storing etc. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. There is. The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by supplying power of the backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

The payout control board 930 controls a game ball payout operation by the payout device 540 in response to an instruction from the main control board 920 and a game ball lending operation by the payout device 540 in response to an operation of the game ball lending device 290. Similar to the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted.

The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information communication is possible. For example, bidirectional information input / output communication is possible between the main control board 920 and the relay device 950. The open / close detection switch 108, 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 are connected to each other so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is possible. The RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period of time in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike this, the internal data may not be maintained in a power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various sound devices, and the like based on the instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , It is connected to the input operation device 260 so as to be capable of information communication in both directions, and is connected to the decorative symbol display device 479 or the like so as to be capable of information output communication in only one direction.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing on the main control board 920 is roughly divided into the main processing that is started when the power is restored from a power failure state and the main processing that is periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)) interrupted and executed. It consists of timer interrupt processing.

First, the main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 that prohibits interrupts, the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the normal symbol related to the special symbol are used. The random number initial value update process S1021 that updates the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the first variation type counter for determining the variation display time (variation time), the variation pattern, and the like. The variation counter update process S1022 for updating the value of the fourth variation type counter (a part of the area of the RAM) and the interrupt enable process S1023 for permitting interrupts are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt enable process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt enable process S1023.

In a series of control start processes, a program start process S1001 that sets an initial value in a stack pointer (a part of RAM area) that controls program execution, an interrupt mode setting process S1002 that sets an interrupt mode, and a payout control board. The start-up standby process S1003, which waits for a predetermined time until the 930 and the sub-control board 940 and the like start up, is executed.

After the start-up standby process S1003, the determination process S2001 of the output state of the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 of the power supply / firing control board 900 is performed. When it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in the off state (S2001: N), the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply / emission control board 900. Judgment process S1004, power failure information (partial area of RAM) value determination process S1005, storage information storage state determination process S1007 are performed, and whether the RAM storage information is erased based on these determination results. Whether or not it is determined. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a part of the area of the RAM that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and is executed. Examples include the value of the counter related to the unit game in the game, the value of the counter stored by the start winning prize, and the like.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, the checksum value for the storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) are accompanied by the transition to the previous power failure state. ) Is determined whether or not the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value calculated in), is “0” (determination process S1007), whereby the current checksum value and the current checksum value are determined. It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is on (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the saved information has been saved and terminated at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or saved. When the information is not normally held (S1007: N), the RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the RAM storage information is executed. Hardware that initializes various devices connected to the main control board 920 after it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed. The hardware initialization process S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, the determination process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is the power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), the RAM recovery setting process S1011 that initially sets various information including the recovery of the retained information and the recovery command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the restoration of the holding information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized (RAM initial setting process S1013) without restoring the retained information, and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as an error detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state are performed. Even if is occurring, all those error states are cleared. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command are received. A predetermined initialization process is also executed in each of the above.

After the initial setting of the RAM according to the situation at the time of startup (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the condition device is operating at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special gaming state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation process S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating state of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is determined, and the process corresponding to the game situation at the time of the power failure is executed on the sub-control board 940. To.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state or the non-time saving state is set by determining whether or not the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and the time saving state is set. In the case (S1016: Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output process S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (a part of the area of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

On the other hand, in the determination process S2001, when the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is determined to be in the ON state indicating that the rear setting switch 905 is being operated by a predetermined key (S2001: Y), the RAM 922 The RAM clear process S2002 that erases information in substantially the entire area is executed. Specifically, in the RAM clear processing S2002, information in substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is erased.

The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a predetermined plurality of stages (nine types in this embodiment) of game modes, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM 922. ing. Therefore, the RAM clear processing S2002 erases information in substantially all areas other than the storage area of the setting correspondence information in the RAM 922 of the main control board 920, and the setting change is permitted.

When the setting change is permitted, the setting display signal for identifying the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is output to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920. That is, the setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922.

Next, the setting change process S2003 for changing the setting of the game mode is executed until the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off. The setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off when the rear setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

The setting change of the game mode is performed by pressing the initialization switch 907 in a state where the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, each time the main control board 920 receives an initialization signal based on the pressing of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, the order of cyclically selecting nine predetermined game modes (for example, ... → T1 → T2 → T3 → M1 → M2 → M3 → B1 → B2 → B3 → T1 → T2 → ...) Is predetermined, and the selected game mode is sequentially changed according to the order each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

Each time the change is made, the value corresponding to the selected game mode is stored in the RAM 922 as the setting correspondence information. Every time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is changed, the setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and the setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device. Displayed at 906.

Therefore, a setting changer such as a game hall administrator can use the initialization switch 907 until the game mode to be set for the pachinko machine 100 is selected while the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. After repeating the pressing, the selection of the game mode can be completed by making the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B win the game ball. Therefore, the setting change process S2003 ends when the game ball is won in the middle start winning devices 431A and 431B after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

When the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), various information other than the information related to the setting of the game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information) is newly initialized in the RAM 922. The setting process S2005 is executed. As a result, it is confirmed that the start-up of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and the game proceeds in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922.

After the RAM change setting process S2005, the set command output process S2006 for outputting the set command indicating the completion of the setting of the RAM 922 to the payout control board 930 is executed. The payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 shifts to the normal game processing by receiving the set command output by the main control board 920, and recognizes which game mode the main control board 920 operates in. it can. After the set command output process S2006, the processes after the special game state return preparation process S1015 are executed.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 920, first, the interrupt start processing S1201 for starting the timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, the power failure monitoring process S1202 to the external information output process S1221 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt enable process S1222 that permits the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. Hereinafter, various main processes will be described individually.

In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the on state is detected three times, the power failure state is determined. If it is not determined in this determination that there is a power failure, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that the power is in a power failure state, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM return setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Further, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the 2's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not substantially control the progress of the game, monitoring of various sensors, etc., and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is maintained based on the backup power. To. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. When the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circular initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. Is set to the value of, and the circulation initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and multiple counters are configured to be updated asynchronously, and the circulation initial value of each counter is set. Refers to the initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range. The range of values is the same for the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, which is special. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol, the winning random number initial value related to the special symbol is also provided except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as for the value counter.

In the fluctuation counter update process S1205, the values of the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation display time (variation time), the fluctuation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first fluctuation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the first fluctuation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the first fluctuation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique to those counters. Will be done.

The winning random number counters, jackpot symbol random number counters, stop pattern selection counters, and variable type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have the above-mentioned configurations, and at least a part of the above counters has other configurations. For example, it may be configured to update from a constant initial value without using the initial value counter, or it may be configured by a random number generation IC without using a program and the value may be referred to as needed. ..

In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, the fraud detection information is updated to the game stop value, and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or is already a game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when the occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection process S1211. Further, in the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol are related based on the control data stored in the output buffer. A signal for controlling various notification devices such as a normal symbol display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approach restricting solenoid 462, a lower approach restricting solenoid 463, an upper approach restricting solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are used. The control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower winning winning switch 443, the upper winning winning switch 444, the combined operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, and the specific The signal states from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B are read, and changes in the detection state of the game ball by various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch read process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the area of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. The signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as "first signal state") and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as "second signal state"). , Changes in the detection status of various switches are detected based on the detection status detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "previous detection status"). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, when the first signal state is the on state and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is in the on state transition. Then, the detection flag (a part of the area of RAM) corresponding to the type of the switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, fraud monitoring, and the like are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraudulent acts such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices are detected. Specifically, the right-starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 are moved to the forced entry allowable posture, and the game ball is guided to the specific passage of the lower winning device 433 by vibration. , Right-starting winning device 432 by radio waves, Inducing forced malfunction of lower-ranking winning device 433 and upper-ranking winning device 434, guiding game balls to various winning devices by magnetic adsorption, upper middle-starting winning device 431A, There is a high possibility that fraudulent acts such as guiding a game ball to the lower middle start winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower grand winning device 433, and the upper grand winning device 434 at an abnormal timing have been performed. Detect the occurrence.

In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). The middle start winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right starting winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower prize switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the upper prize switch 444 (see FIG. 10) detects the game ball. When the upper prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the above, the grand prize counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, an intermediate block is provided with respect to the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. Whether or not 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed is detected. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) with respect to the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is detected whether or not it is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, and are output to the payout control board 930, if necessary. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is added by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and is subtracted by 1 each time a prize ball command based on the winning is set. In the payout control board 930, the main control board 920 is awarded each time the control for paying out the number (for example, 3) of the game balls corresponding to the prize is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). In the situation where the ball command is requested and the prize balls are continuously paid out, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a prize (for example, 13 pieces) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is issued on the payout control board. When the 930 receives the game, the payout control board 930 executes a control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, the holding control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game related to the first special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, in the unit game related to the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the decoration symbol display device 479 is the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and various variation pattern random numbers. It is selected based on the value and the number of times the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is held.

Further, in the special symbol-related processing S1217, the holding control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game related to the second special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, in the unit game related to the second special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the decoration symbol display device 479 is the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and various variation pattern random numbers. It is selected based on the value and the number of times the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is held.

In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol, and the special symbol related process S1217. Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 and the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

Further, in the display control process S1219, various commands corresponding to each information for displaying the variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol selected in the special symbol related process S1217 on the decorative symbol display device 479 are set. For example, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol-related process S1217 is set. The set command is output to the sub-control board 940 in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub-control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the command received from the main control board 920.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Design sheet>
Next, the configuration of the symbol sheet 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (A) is a front view showing a part of the symbol sheet 601, and FIG. 13 (B) is a cross-sectional view of the symbol sheet 601 along the line AA of FIG. 13 (A). In FIG. 13B, for reference, the orientation of each surface of the symbol sheet 601 is indicated by an arrow.

As shown in FIGS. 13 (A) and 13 (B), the design sheet 601 has a strip-shaped base material 611 having light transmission (transparency) such as transparency and a back surface of the base material 611. The decorative symbol 621 formed on (the surface of the symbol sheet 601 attached to the reel body toward the reel body) and the surface of the base material 611 (the symbol sheet 601 is attached to the reel body). It is provided with a decorative portion 622 formed on a surface that faces outward in the state).

The decorative symbol 621 includes a main symbol 621A that can form a jackpot symbol and a sub symbol 621B that cannot form a jackpot symbol. The decorative symbol 621 is arranged so that the main symbol 621A and the sub symbol 621B alternate along the longitudinal direction of the symbol sheet 601.

The main symbol 621A is configured as a symbol including information that defines individual numerical values (hereinafter, this information is referred to as "numerical information") such as numbers and characters corresponding to the numbers. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 13 (A), the main symbol 621A has a number indicating a numerical value such as "2" or "3" and a character corresponding to each numerical value (for example, a puffer fish corresponding to "2" or "2". It is configured as a symbol that includes both the turtle) corresponding to "3" as numerical information.

In the main symbol 621A, the numerical information may be composed only of numbers indicating numerical values, or may be composed of only characters corresponding to each numerical value (number). In addition, all of the main symbols 621A are symbols that include only numbers indicating numerical values as numerical information, symbols that include only characters corresponding to each numerical value as numerical information, or numerical values indicating numerical values and characters corresponding to each numerical value. The configuration may be unified by any of the symbols including both of the above as numerical information, or the configuration may be a mixture of these symbols.

The main symbol 621A is configured as, for example, a symbol including numerical information corresponding to each numerical value from "1" to "9". The main symbol 621A may be a symbol including numerical information corresponding to each numerical value excluding some numerical values (for example, "4") among the numerical values from "1" to "9".

The jackpot symbol is composed of, for example, a predetermined combination of the main symbols 621A in each symbol row (left symbol row, right symbol row, middle symbol row) (for example, a combination of the same main symbol 621A). In the unit game related to the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), if the 1st special symbol lottery or the 2nd special symbol lottery is won, the jackpot symbol stops on the preset effective line. It is confirmed and displayed as a symbol.

The "effective line" is a line in which the gaming state transitions to the special gaming state when the jackpot symbol by the decorative symbol is displayed on the line as a stop symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, five effective lines are set. Specifically, three horizontal effective lines (specifically, the uppermost line, the lowermost line, and the middle line between the upper line and the lower line). Two effective lines in the diagonal direction (specifically, an effective line in the upward-sloping direction and an effective line in the downward-sloping direction) are set.

The number of effective lines to be set does not necessarily have to be 5, and one or a plurality of appropriate numbers may be set. For example, the upper line, the lower line, and the middle line may be set as three effective lines, or one effective line such as the middle line may be set.

The main symbols 621A are arranged on the symbol sheet 601 so that the numerical values of the numerical information are in ascending or descending order from top to bottom when the reel is viewed from the front. For example, in the symbol sheet 601 used for the reel corresponding to the left symbol row in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the main symbol 621A corresponds to numerical information when the reel is viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 13 (A). The numbers are arranged in ascending order from top to bottom. On the other hand, in the symbol sheet 601 used for each reel corresponding to the right symbol row and the middle symbol row, the main symbol 621A has the numerical values corresponding to the numerical information in descending order from top to bottom when the reels are viewed from the front. Be arranged.

The sub symbol 621B is configured as a symbol of a predetermined symbol that is smaller than the main symbol 621A and does not include numerical information. In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the sub-symbol 621B is configured as a star-shaped symbol. In the symbol sheet 601 the sub symbol 621B is arranged between the two main symbols 621A.

The decorative design 621 (main design 621A, sub design 621B) is formed with a coating film on the back surface side of the base material 611 by printing with an ink having light transmission. Therefore, when a backlight (not shown) provided on the inner peripheral side of the reel body is turned on, the light from the backlight passes through the decorative symbol 621 and the base material 611, so that the light is drawn on the symbol sheet 601. The decorative design 621 can be displayed by light emission.

The decorative portion 622 is provided outside the forming region of the decorative symbol 621 (main symbol 621A, sub symbol 621B) in the symbol sheet 601. The decorative portion 622 is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621. The "at least a part of the color for coloring the decorative symbol 621" is, for example, a main color for coloring each main symbol 621A included in the decorative symbol 621 (for example, a color for coloring the largest area in the main symbol 621A). ) May be the color that most easily reflects light (for example, the color that has the highest brightness), or may be the color that most easily reflects light among the colors that color all the decorative symbols 621.

Further, the "color configured to easily reflect light" may be defined by, for example, the presence or absence of brilliance, or may be defined by the brightness of the color. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for example, the decorative design 621 is colored with an ink that does not contain a bright material, and the decorative portion 622 reflects light as compared with at least a part of the colors that color the decorative design 621. As an easily configured color, it is colored with a brilliant color such as a metallic color (for example, gold or silver) or a pearl-like color (for example, pearl-like white).

Alternatively, as a color configured in which the decorative portion 622 is configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the colors that color the decorative symbol 621, the color that is most likely to reflect light among the colors that color the decorative symbol 621 is compared. The composition may be colored with a high-brightness color (for example, a high-brightness color such as white or pale yellow).

As shown in FIG. 13B, the decorative portion 622 is formed with a coating film on the surface side of the base material 611 by printing using an ink having a color that easily reflects light. As a result, the decorative portion 622 is in a state of protruding forward (front side) from the decorative symbol 621 formed on the back surface side of the base material 611, and the decorative portion 622 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative symbol 621. it can. The decorative portion 622 may have a smooth surface (a surface facing outward) or an uneven surface thereof, and the surface of the decorative portion 622 may have a smooth portion and an uneven portion. And may be mixed.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a decorative symbol 621 is formed on the back surface side of the sheet-shaped base material 611 having light transmission (transparency), and the decorative design is on the front surface side of the base material 611. A decorative portion 622 is formed on the peripheral side of the 621. As a result, the decorative portion 622 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative symbol 621, so that the decorative feeling of the decorative symbol 621 by the decorative portion 622 can be improved.

In particular, since the decorative portion 622 is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621, it is possible to add gorgeousness and glitter to the decorative portion 622. Thereby, the decorative feeling by the decorative portion 622 can be more preferably improved.

In this way, by improving the decorative feeling by the decorative portion 622, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the decorative pattern 621 provided on the peripheral side of the decorative portion 622, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game machine. Can be made to.

Further, the reels of the reel device constituting the decorative symbol display device 479 have a base material 611, a decorative design 621 having a coating film formed on the back surface side of the base material 611, and a coating film formed on the front surface side of the base material 611. Since the symbol sheet 601 provided with the decorative portion 622 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel body, the decorative feeling of the decorative portion 622 is improved, so that the decorative symbol 621 is displayed in a variable manner or stopped (confirmed). The degree of attention to the display) can be suitably improved.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, a pattern that can be visually recognized under a predetermined situation is drawn on the symbol sheet 601.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described embodiment (hereinafter, the embodiment is also referred to as “first embodiment”) are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. To do. Further, the configuration described below as the second embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment described above, or a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment described above. You may prepare instead of.

14 (A) to 14 (C) are front views of the decorative symbol display device 479 of the second embodiment. FIG. 14D is a front view showing a part of the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each symbol row. In addition, in FIG. 14B and FIG. 14C, for reference, the position of the middle line L2, which is one of the set effective lines, is illustrated by a alternate long and short dash line.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, a heater 650 that functions as a heat source is provided on the inner peripheral side of each reel body corresponding to the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2, respectively. , It is provided at a position where it can overlap with the patterns 721A and 721B described later in the front view.

The symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is normally difficult to see or cannot be seen, but when a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied, the light is retroreflected and visually recognized. The possible patterns 701, 702, and 703 are provided. The symbols 701, 702, and 703 are drawn straddling the symbol sheets 601 corresponding to the respective symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, and when the predetermined main symbol 621A is arranged on the middle line L2 in the final display, each of the symbols 701, 702, and 703 is drawn. It is constructed so that the pattern is completed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), in each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" is confirmed and displayed in a state of being arranged on the middle line L2. In the case of (that is, when the jackpot symbol by the main symbol 621A corresponding to the numerical value "7" is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol), the symbol 701A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1 is displayed. The symbol 701 is completed by the symbol 701B provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the right symbol row Z2 and the symbol 701C provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the middle symbol row Z3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14C, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 is arranged on the middle line L2, and in the middle symbol row Z3. When the confirmation display is performed with the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" arranged on the middle line L2, the symbol 702A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1. The design 702 is completed by the design 702B provided on the design sheet 601 corresponding to the right design row Z2 and the design 702C provided on the design sheet 601 corresponding to the middle design row Z3.

That is, in the configuration in which the stop order of the decorative symbols 621 that are displayed in a variable manner is the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z2, and the middle symbol row Z3, the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 are numbers corresponding to the numerical values "5". After the reach is displayed on the middle line L2 by the main symbol 621A containing the information, the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" is stopped in the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z3, so that the lost symbol (lost symbol) More specifically, the pattern 702 is completed when it becomes a lost pattern constituting the lost reach).

Further, in the symbol sheet 601 of the example shown in FIG. 14 (D), the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 is arranged on the middle line L2, and is also arranged. When the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" is arranged on the middle line L2 in the middle symbol row Z3 and the confirmation is displayed, it is provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1. The design 703A is completed by the design 703A, the design 703B provided on the design sheet 601 corresponding to the right design row Z2, and the design 703C provided on the design sheet 601 corresponding to the middle design row Z3.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the design sheet 601 is configured such that the decorative portion 622 (see FIG. 13) is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611 (see FIG. 13), and the design sheet 601 is similar to the design 701 or the like. When a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied, the pattern that can be visually recognized by the retroreflection of the light has retroreflective property on the surface side of the base material 611 and is irradiated with the flash light or the like. It is formed by an ink that emits light in a predetermined color (for example, black or green).

Therefore, in the final display, when the predetermined main symbol 621A is arranged on the middle line L2 and the predetermined symbol (for example, the symbol 701 or the symbol 702) is completed, the flash photography by the camera is performed. , It is possible to obtain an image of the predetermined pattern drawn in a predetermined color.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 is normally difficult to see or invisible, but can be seen when heated or heated. The patterns 721A and 721B are provided.

As shown in FIG. 14B, the symbols 721A and 721B are viewed from the front when the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 is located on the middle line L2. Is provided at a position overlapping the heater 650. The patterns 721A and 721B are formed on the surface side of the base material 611 with ink that changes from colorless to a predetermined color (for example, pink or orange) when heated or heated.

The heater 650 is displayed when the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" is arranged on the middle line L2 in each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3 (that is, the numerical value "7"). When the jackpot symbol by the main symbol 621A corresponding to the above is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol), it is configured to be heated or heated by the control by the sub control board 940.

Therefore, when the jackpot symbol by the main symbol 621A corresponding to the numerical value "7" is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol, the symbols 721A and 721B appear visibly in a predetermined color. When the heating or heating of the heater 650 is started by the confirmation display in the state where the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" is arranged on the middle line L2, the sub-control board The 940 ends heating or heating by the heater 650 when the variation display of the special symbol is subsequently started.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the design sheet 601 is normally difficult or invisible to be visually recognized, but can be visually recognized by being retroreflected when a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied. 701, 702, and 703, and 721A and 721B, which are normally difficult to see or invisible but can be seen when heated or heated, are provided, so that different patterns are provided in different situations. Can be displayed visually. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the gaming machine by different patterns that can be visually recognized depending on the situation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol is a predetermined lost symbol (for example, the lost symbol shown in FIG. 14C), a specific symbol such as the symbol 702 is flashed. It can be made visible by irradiation with light (for example, flash photography with a camera). When the decorative symbol 621 is confirmed and displayed as a lost symbol, if the number of holdings of the unit game right related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is zero, then the special symbol (first special symbol) is displayed. , The state of the lost symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is maintained for a period of time until the start winning of the second special symbol) occurs. That is, a specific pattern such as the pattern 702 can be maintained in a completed state over the period.

Therefore, when the number of times the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is held is zero, the number of times of holding the decorative symbol 621 is the period during which the completed specific symbol can be visually recognized as a predetermined lost symbol. It can be a longer period than when is 1 or more. The longer the period during which a specific pattern can be viewed, the more it is possible to prevent the player from missing the specific pattern (for example, the camera is not ready for flash photography and the specific pattern is missed). In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a playability that enjoys not increasing the number of times the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is held.

Further, when the decorative symbol 621 is confirmed and displayed with a predetermined jackpot symbol, a special gaming state occurs thereafter, so that the player causes the grand prize device 433,434 to win a game ball in the special gaming state. Because there is a tendency to give priority to the operation for (for example, the operation for the launch handle 252), the operation for making a specific pattern visible (for example, the operation of the camera for flash shooting) cannot be performed, and the specific pattern cannot be performed. You may miss it. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if the special symbol lottery is not won, the completed specific symbol (for example, the symbol 702) can be visually recognized by irradiation with flash light. Therefore, even if the special symbol lottery is not won, it is possible to provide a playability that allows the visual recognition of a specific symbol to be visually recognized.

As described in the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the patterns 701, 702, and 703 can be visually recognized when a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied, for example, a stage 670 is placed on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 479. By providing the above, it is possible to improve the playability in which the patterns 701, 702, and 703 can be visually recognized under a predetermined situation.

FIG. 15 is a front view of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the modified example of the present embodiment. In FIG. 15, the stage 670 provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479 is simply illustrated by the shape of its rolling surface. Further, in FIG. 15, for reference, the game balls P1 and P2 are shown as an example of the game balls that roll on the stage 670. Further, in FIG. 15, for reference, the position of the middle line L2, which is one of the set effective lines, is illustrated by a alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the modified example, a stage 670 is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479. The stage 670 has a rolling surface that is substantially W-shaped when viewed from the front. A warp passage (not shown) that can guide a game ball flowing down the left side of the central structure 420 to the stage 670 is provided on the left end side of the stage 670, and the game ball that has entered the warp passage is staged. Guide to the left end side of 670.

The game ball that has entered the left end side of the stage 670 reciprocates in the left-right direction on the stage 670 along the rolling surface of the stage 670. By locating the two recesses in the stage 670 formed in a substantially W shape at the portion corresponding to the eyes in the face-like pattern 702, the game balls passing near the recesses (for example, the game balls P1 and P2). ) Can be seen.

As a result, the time when the symbol 702 can be displayed (that is, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the left symbol column Z1 and the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the right symbol column Z2). When the main symbol 621A including the above and the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the middle symbol row Z3 are arranged on the middle line L2 and the symbol 702 is completed, the timing of flash photography by the camera is performed. This makes it possible to obtain an interesting image as if eyes were added to the pattern 702.

In addition, light transmission (transparency) that allows the game ball passing through the passage through the passage through which the game ball discharged (falling) from the two recesses of the stage 670 having a substantially W shape can be visually recognized by the player. By forming it with a resin having (light property), it is possible to make the game ball discharged from the recess look like tears. By forming the passage into a zigzag-shaped passage that goes downward while reciprocating from side to side, it is possible to secure a period during which the player can visually recognize the game ball.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, the currently set gaming mode can be suggested by using the configuration in which a pattern that can be visually recognized in a predetermined situation is drawn on the symbol sheet 601. Will be done.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of the first or second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the third embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, or the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above may be added. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form.

16 (A) is a schematic side view for explaining the configuration of the reel device, and FIGS. 16 (B) to 16 (C) are front views of the decorative symbol display device 479 of the third embodiment. Is. In FIG. 16A, in order to facilitate understanding of the drawings, the reel main body R and the symbol sheet 601 attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel main body R are shown separately. Further, in FIG. 16A, for reference, the direction of light irradiation by the illuminant 690 is illustrated by arrows, and the decorative symbols 621 located in the upper line, the middle line, and the lower line are displayed in the vertical direction. The range is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 16 (B), 16 (C), and 16 (D), the positions of the upper line L3, the middle line L2, and the lower line L1 are shown by alternate long and short dash lines, respectively, for reference. ing. Further, in FIGS. 16 (B), 16 (C), and 16 (D), in order to facilitate understanding of the drawings, the color density in the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C is represented by the hatching density. ing. Specifically, the darker the color, the denser the hatching.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16A, the inner peripheral side of each reel body R corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 is used as a heat source like the heater 650. Functional heaters 650A, 650B, 650C are provided. More specifically, the heater 650A is provided at a position where it overlaps the main symbol 621A located on the upper line L3 in front view, and the heater 650B overlaps the main symbol 621A located on the middle line L2 in front view. The heater 650C is provided at a position so as to overlap the main symbol 621A located on the lower line L1 in front view.

The heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C are configured as heaters having different temperatures due to heating (heating), respectively. Specifically, the heater 650A is a heater capable of heating to the highest temperature among the heaters 650A, 650B and 650C, and the heater 650A can be heated to the second highest temperature among the heaters 650A, 650B and 650C. It is a heater, and the heater 650C is a heater capable of heating to the lowest temperature among the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C. The heating (heating) by the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 is normally difficult to see or invisible, but is visible when heated or heated. 741A, 741B, 741C are provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16B, the symbol 741A includes the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value “7” among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1. It is a ring-shaped pattern that surrounds the pattern 621A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, the symbol 741B is the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value “9” among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the right symbol row Z2. It is a ring-shaped pattern that surrounds the surroundings. Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, the symbol 741C is the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value “8” among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the middle symbol row Z3. It is a ring-shaped pattern that surrounds the surroundings.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the design sheet 601 is configured such that the decorative portion 622 (see FIG. 13) is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611 (see FIG. 13). , Is formed on the surface side of the base material 611 by an ink that changes from colorless to a predetermined color (for example, pink or orange) when heated or heated. The ink forming the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C is configured to develop a darker color as the heating or heating temperature is higher.

Therefore, the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1, the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2, and the numerical value in the middle symbol string Z3. When the confirmation display is made with the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to "8" arranged on the upper line L3, and the heating (warming) by the heater 650A is performed, the symbol 741A , 741B, 741C are darker in color than when these main symbols 621A are heated by the heater 650B or the heater 650C in a state where they are arranged on the middle line L2 or the lower line L1, as shown in FIG. 16 (B). Is displayed.

Further, when the confirmation display is performed with these main symbols 621A arranged on the middle line L2 and the heater 650B heats (heats) the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C, the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C are shown in FIG. As shown in C), these main symbols 621A are thinner than the case where they are heated by the heater 650A in the state where they are arranged in the upper line L3, and the heaters in the state where these main symbols 621A are arranged in the lower line L1. It is displayed in a darker color than when heated by 650C.

Further, when the confirmation display is performed with these main symbols 621A arranged on the lower line L1 and heating (heating) is performed by the heater 650C, the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C are shown in the drawings. As shown in 16 (D), these main symbols 621A are displayed in a lighter color than when they are heated by the heater 650A or the heater 650B in a state where they are arranged on the upper line L3 or the middle line L2.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the ball ejection rate setting can be changed (game mode setting change) by operating the rear setting switch 905 (see FIG. 9) and the initialization switch 907 (see FIG. 9). It is configured to be possible, and the currently set game mode is configured to be suggested by the color intensity of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C.

Specifically, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the ball output rate that maximizes the profit margin for the player (that is, the top type). , Middle type, and bottom type each type has a first-stage probability game mode), the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C have the darkest color (that is, another game mode is set). It is configured to appear in a darker color than when it is present.

More specifically, when the game mode of the first stage probability in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type is set, the sub-control board 940 is subjected to a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second). In the unit game related to the special symbol when the special symbol lottery) is not won, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%). , The main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2 and the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" in the middle symbol column Z3 are arranged on the upper line L3. And confirm the display, and heat or heat the heater 650A. As a result, the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C can be made to appear in a darker color than when other game modes are set.

Further, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the ball output rate that has the lowest profit margin for the player (that is, top type, middle). When the type and the game mode of the third stage probability in each type of the bottom type are set, the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C are the lightest colors (that is, when another game mode is set). It is configured to appear in a lighter color).

More specifically, when the game mode of the third stage probability in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type is set, the sub-control board 940 is subjected to a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second). In the unit game related to the special symbol when the special symbol lottery) is not won, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%). , The main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2 and the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" in the middle symbol column Z3 are arranged on the lower line L1. And confirm the display, and heat or heat the heater 650C. As a result, the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C can be made to appear in a lighter color than when other game modes are set.

In addition, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the ball output rate at which the profit margin for the player is the second highest (that is, the top type). , Middle type, and bottom type each type has a second-stage probability game mode), the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C are set to the first-stage probability game mode in each type. It is configured to be lighter than the case and appear in a darker color than when the game mode of the third stage probability in each type is set.

More specifically, when the game mode of the second stage probability in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type is set, the sub-control board 940 is subjected to a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second). In the unit game related to the special symbol when the special symbol lottery) is not won, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%). , The main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2 and the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" in the middle symbol column Z3 are arranged on the middle line L2. And confirm the display, and heat or heat the heater 650B. As a result, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are lighter than when the first-stage probability game mode is set for each type, and darker than when the third-stage probability game mode is set for each type. Can be revealed.

The probability of appearance of the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C when the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is not won is a fixed value of 1 (for example, about 10%). It may be a variable value that changes depending on the situation. For example, the appearance probability of the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C may change according to the number of times the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is held. Specifically, for example, the higher the number of times the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is held, the higher the probability of appearance of the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C may be.

Alternatively, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C may change according to the length of the game time. For example, the longer the game time, the higher the probability of appearance of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C may be. The game time is, for example, a so-called "customer waiting effect" (that is, a game state such as a title display or a demo display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player. It may be the time measured from the timing at which the effect display irrelevant to the above is completed, or it may be the time during which the firing handle 252 is continuously operated.

Alternatively, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C may change depending on the game mode. For example, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C may be higher than in the case of the normal gaming state.

It should be noted that the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1, the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2, and the numerical value in the middle symbol string Z3. Heating or heating of the heaters 650A, 650B, 650C is started by the confirmation display in the state where the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to "8" is arranged on the lines L1, L2, L3 of each stage. If so, the sub-control board 940 then ends heating or heating by the heaters 650A, 650B, 650C when the variation display of the special symbol is started.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the symbols 701, 702, 703 (see FIG. 14) provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 are usually difficult to see or cannot be seen. However, it is configured as a pattern that becomes visible when irradiated with black light. That is, the patterns 701, 702, and 703 in the present embodiment are formed by ink that emits light in a predetermined color (for example, black or green) when the surface side of the base material 611 is irradiated with black light.

On the front side of each reel (reel body R and symbol sheet 601) corresponding to each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, a light emitting body as a light emitting means capable of irradiating a black light in a range to be a display area of a decorative symbol. A 690 (eg, black light LED) is provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, a black light LED as a light emitting body 690 directed to a display area of a decorative symbol on each reel is provided on the front upper side and the front lower side of each reel in the width direction of each reel. They are arranged side by side in a row (horizontal direction).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 is located on the middle line L2, the symbols 701, 702, 703, etc. In the situation where the pattern is completed, the sub-control board 940 is configured to emit light of the light emitter 690 (that is, to irradiate black light). As a result, when the predetermined main symbol 621A is arranged on the middle line L2 in the final display, the player can visually recognize each symbol such as the symbols 701, 702, and 703.

In addition, in a configuration in which a pattern such as a pattern 701, 702, 703 is formed on the pattern sheet 601 with ink that emits light in a predetermined color when irradiated with black light, it is not always necessary to provide a light emitting body 690 capable of irradiating black light. Instead, the player may display a pattern such as a pattern 701, 702, 703 by using a light emitting means that can irradiate a black light, which is owned or lent by the player.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) has not been won, there is a predetermined probability that the pattern becomes visible by heating or heating. The 741A, 741B, and 741C are heated or heated at a temperature according to the currently set gaming mode. Since the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C are configured to develop a darker color as the heating or heating temperature is higher, the player can determine the current color of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C in the pachinko machine 100. The type of game mode, that is, the ball ejection rate (machine discount, payout rate) of the game ball can be determined.

Therefore, it is possible for the player to add a game property in which the probability information about the game machine being played is estimated based on the difference in the color development intensity of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C. For example, considering whether the pachinko machine 100 is a game machine suitable for one's own taste or a different game machine, as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine. Since the estimated probability information can be used, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, the attention of the player is improved by providing the light emitting decorative body 780 with improved decorativeness on the peripheral side (edge side).

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to third embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the fourth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to third embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the third embodiments.

FIG. 17 is a front view of the game board 400 of the fourth embodiment. 18 (A) is a front view of the light emitting decoration body 780, and FIG. 18 (B) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the light emitting decoration body 780 in line BB of FIG. 18 (A).

In FIG. 18A, for reference, a schematic boundary line G between the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2 in the peripheral decorative portion 788 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. There is. Further, in FIG. 18B, for reference, examples of the path through which the light output from the light emitting body 782 as the light emitting means travels are shown by arrows J1 and J2.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a luminescent decorative body 780 formed in a star shape in a front view is provided at substantially the center of the upper portion of the central structure 420.

As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the light emitting decorative body 780 includes a light emitting body 781, 782, a substrate 783, an inner lens 784, a reflector 785, a decorative lens portion 786, and a protruding portion. It includes a 787, a peripheral side decorative portion 788, a decorative sheet 789, and a reflective component 790.

The light emitters 781 and 782 are configured to include a light source capable of expressing full color (for example, a full color LED). The light emitters 781 and 782 emit light in a predetermined color by the light emission control by the sub-control board 940. The light source constituting the light emitters 781 and 782 does not necessarily have to be a light source capable of displaying full color, and may be a light source that emits light in a single color (for example, a white LED).

The light emitting body 781 is a light emitting means arranged inside the inner lens 784. The light emitting body 782 is a light emitting means which is outside the inner lens 784 and is arranged on the rear side (lower side in FIG. 18B) with respect to the peripheral side decorative portion 788 so as to overlap the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view. Is. The light emitters 781 and 782 are arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 18B) of the substrate 783. The substrate 783 is a circuit board such as a printed circuit board provided with illuminants 781 and 782 and electronic components such as resistors for operating the illuminants 781 and 782.

The inner lens 784 is made of a light-transmitting (translucent) resin (for example, acrylic resin) such as a transparent resin, and transmits (light-guides) the light output (light-emitting) from the light-emitting body 781. The inner lens 784 includes a top surface portion 784A that overlaps the front side of the light emitting body 781 in front view and a side surface portion 784B that is continuously provided on the peripheral side of the top surface portion 784A, and is provided so as to surround the front side of the light emitting body 781. Be done.

As shown in FIG. 18B, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the inner lens 784 is configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross-sectional shape. More specifically, the top surface portion 784A is formed in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the side surface portion 784B is formed in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially vertical direction.

The outer shape of the inner lens 784 on the top surface portion 784A side (the outer shape on the front side of the inner lens 784) faces the inner surface of the decorative lens portion 786 described later (more specifically, the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A and the inner surface of the side surface portion 786B). It is configured in a shape that can be fitted to a surface (a surface composed of a surface).

The reflector 785 is a light-impermeable component having a color that can reflect light (for example, white), and is adjacent to the outside of the rear side (more specifically, the rear side of the side surface portion 784B) of the inner lens 784. Is provided. The reflector 785 reflects the light emitted outward from the rear side (the side close to the light emitting body 781) of the side surface portion 784B of the inner lens 784 toward the inner lens 784. As a result, the light output from the light emitting body 781 can be suitably guided to the front side (that is, the side of the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784).

Further, the reflector 785 is located between the light emitting body 782 and the side surface portion 784B of the inner lens 784, and the light output from the light emitting body 782 is preferably forward side (that is, the side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788). Can be guided to.

Therefore, by disposing the reflector 785 between the light emitting body 781 and the light emitting body 782, the light output from the light emitting body 781 can be incident on the decorative lens portion 786 via the inner lens 784. The light output from the light emitting body 782 can be incident on the peripheral side decorative portion 788. A reflector similar to the reflector 785 may be provided on the side of the reflecting component 790 with respect to the light emitting body 782 (the side opposite to the reflector 785).

The reflector 785 does not necessarily have to be a light-impermeable component having a color capable of reflecting light, and mirror-finished (for example, chrome plating) is applied to each surface of the inner lens 784 side and the light emitting body 782 side. Therefore, it may be configured to have a light-impermeable surface.

The decorative lens portion 786 is made of a resin having light transmission (translucency) such as a transparent resin (for example, acrylic resin), and when the light emitting body 781 is lit (when light is output from the light emitting body 781). In addition, the light transmitted through the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784 is transmitted (guided).

The decorative lens portion 786 includes a top surface portion 786A that overlaps the front side of the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784 in front view, and a side surface portion 786B that is continuously provided on the peripheral side of the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative lens portion 786 is configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross-sectional shape as shown in FIG. 18 (B). More specifically, the top surface portion 786A is formed in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the side surface portion 786B is formed in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially vertical direction.

The front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A is directly and visibly exposed to the player in a region where the protrusion 787, which will be described later, is not provided. Therefore, when the light emitting body 781 is turned on, the light emitted from the front surface 786A1 through the top surface portion 786A can be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the decorative lens portion 786, the exposed portion of the top surface portion 786A is formed in a star shape in front view as shown in FIG. 18A. Therefore, in this configuration, by lighting the light emitting body 781, the player can visually recognize the light emitting decorative body 780 that shines in a star shape by the light emitted from the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A. The decorative lens portion 786 functions as a first decorative portion constituting the main body portion of the decoration in the light emitting decorative body 780.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 is formed in a plate shape in which the front surface 786A1 is a substantially flat surface, the light emitting decorative body 780 is based on the decorative lens portion 786 which is the first decorative portion. The decorative shape (in the present embodiment, the star shape) can be illuminated in a planar shape.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 has a flat plate shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, but is inclined in a predetermined direction (for example, downward in front view). It may be in the shape of a plate (which inclines backward as it increases). Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 has a flat plate shape, that is, the front surface 786A1 (front surface visible to the player) and the rear surface (inner lens 784 side). The surfaces) are all substantially flat, but either the front surface 786A1 or the rear surface, or each of these surfaces may be a curved surface, and is a flat surface or a curved surface including fine irregularities. You may.

The protruding portion 787 is made of a resin having the same light transmittance as the decorative lens portion 786, and projects forward from the front surface 786A1 on the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the protruding portion 787 is integrally molded together with the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 described later, so that the protruding portion 787 is connected to the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A. The protruding portion 787 may be a component independent of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788.

The protruding portion 787 is provided along the peripheral edge at least on the peripheral edge side of the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18A, the protruding portion 787 is provided on the peripheral edge side of the top surface portion 786A formed in a star shape along the peripheral edge, and is in the star shape. It is provided in a substantially straight line connecting adjacent recesses.

The front end surface 787A of the protrusion 787 is subjected to a light diffusion treatment such as sparse surface processing (for example, grain processing). As a result, natural light is diffused on the end face 787A, and the end face 787A can be made to appear whitish. Instead of the sparse surface treatment on the end face 787A, a color that easily reflects light such as white or metallic color (for example, silver or gold) may be printed on the end face 787A.

The peripheral side decorative portion 788 is made of a resin having the same light transmittance as the decorative lens portion 786, and is provided over the entire circumference of the peripheral side (outer side) of the decorative lens portion 786. More specifically, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 projects outward from the side surface portion 786B over the entire circumference of the decorative lens portion 786.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is connected to the side surface portion 786B by being integrally molded together with the decorative lens portion 786 and the protruding portion 787. The peripheral side decorative portion 788 may be a component independent of the decorative lens portion 786 and the protruding portion 787.

The front surface 788A (front surface visible to the player) of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is configured to be a substantially horizontal substantially flat surface. The front surface 788A does not necessarily have to be a substantially horizontal substantially flat surface, and is a plane inclined in a predetermined direction (for example, a plane inclined backward as it goes outward in front view) or a substantially flat surface. May be good. Further, the front surface 788A of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 may be a curved surface, or may be a flat surface or a curved surface including fine irregularities.

In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the front surface 788A of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is configured to be located behind the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786. The front surface 788A does not necessarily have to be on the rear side of the front surface 786A1, and may be located on the front surface side of the front surface 786A1 or may have a configuration in which the position in the front-rear direction substantially coincides with the front surface 786A1. ..

On the other hand, the rear surface 788B (the surface facing the light emitting body 782 side) of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined so as to be separated from the substrate 783 toward the outside. As a result, a part of the light output (light emitted) from the light emitter 782 toward the front is incident from the rear surface 788B and transmitted to the front side (front side 788A side), and a part is reflected on the rear surface 788B. Then, as shown in FIG. 18 (B), it proceeds backward and outward.

Although the details will be described later, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is reflected by the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting body 782 (the directly incident light or the light reflected on the rear surface 788B and then reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790. It shines by the light). Therefore, in the light emitting decorative body 780, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is an edge portion as the second decorative portion with respect to the shape (star shape in the present embodiment) of the decorative lens portion 786 as the first decorative portion in the front view. Functions as.

The decorative sheet 789 is composed of a resin sheet having a light transmittance (translucency) of 1 configured on the outer shape (star shape in the present embodiment) of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, and is decorated. It is arranged between the top surface portion 786A of the lens portion 786 and the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784. The decorative sheet 789 may be attached to the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A (the surface facing the inner lens 784 side) or the front surface of the top surface portion 784A (the surface facing the decorative lens portion 786 side). However, the configuration may be such that it is sandwiched between the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A and the front surface of the top surface portion 784A.

The decorative sheet 789 does not necessarily have to be the resin sheet 1 formed on the outer shape of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, and is divided into a plurality of top surface portions 786A surrounded by the protruding portions 787. It may be a resin sheet of. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 18A, the decorative sheet 789 is a resin sheet corresponding to each of the five substantially triangles formed on the convex side on the star side, and one substantially pentagon formed on the center side. It may be divided into a resin sheet corresponding to the above.

The decorative sheet 789 is configured as a light-transmitting sheet that is entirely colored in a single color (for example, each single color such as yellow or blue) or a plurality of colors. As a result, when the light emitting body 781 is turned on, the light emitted from the front surface 784A1 of the decorative lens portion 786 can be set to a color corresponding to the color of the decorative sheet 789. Thereby, for example, in the configuration in which the inner lens 784 and the decorative lens portion 786 are both made of transparent resin, the player can visually recognize the color of the light emitting decorative body 780 that shines in a star shape with the color of the decorative sheet 789.

When the decorative sheet 789 is colored with a plurality of colors, the decorative sheet 789 may be colored as an independent region, or the plurality of colors may be colored with a gradation. Further, the decorative sheet 789 may have a configuration in which a predetermined pattern (design, pattern, characters, etc.) is drawn.

The reflective component 790 is a resin component provided on the outer side of the light emitting body 782 and having a function of reflecting the light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 so as to travel forward and outward. is there.

The reflective component 790 has a front surface 790A which is an inclined surface which is separated downward from the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and is inclined so as to be separated from the substrate 783 toward the outside like the rear surface 788B.

In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is configured as an inclined surface substantially parallel to the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788. The front surface 790A does not necessarily have to be substantially parallel to the rear surface 788B, and the front surface 790A and the rear surface 788B are not parallel to each other (that is, the inclination angle of the front surface 790A is different from the inclination angle of the rear surface 788B). ) May be.

In the reflective component 790, a part of the front surface 790A overlaps the peripheral decoration portion 788 in the front view, and the rest of the front surface 790A does not overlap the peripheral side decoration portion 788 in the front view (that is, it can be directly seen in the front view). Arranged as. The width of the region (non-overlapping region X3) that does not overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 in the front view of the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is often, for example, about 3 mm or more, and is about 5 mm or more. Is preferable.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the light output from the light emitting body 782 toward the front is reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 (more specifically, the reflection described later). It is possible to travel outward while reflecting between the film portion 790B), and a part of the light reflected at the front surface 790A is incident from the rear surface 788B (for example, arrow J1), and a part is a peripheral side decorative portion. The inclination angles of the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 so that the peripheral side decorative portion 788 can travel outward (for example, arrow J2) without incident on the peripheral side decorative portion 788. The amount of overlap (overlap width) between the rear surface 788B and the front surface 790A in the front view is set.

A reflective film portion 790B that is light-impermeable and capable of reflecting light is formed on the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790. The reflective film portion 790B is a coating film having a substantially uniform thickness formed by, for example, vapor deposition, coating, or printing of a bright pigment such as a metallic pigment.

The reflective film portion 790B may be composed of a single color or may be composed of a plurality of colors. The color of the reflective film portion 790B may be the same as or similar to the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789, and by constructing such a color, a sense of unity is given to the color of the light emitting decorative body 780. It is possible to suppress the unnaturalness of the color scheme and the excessive gorgeousness.

As described above, the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is an inclined surface that inclines so as to move away from the substrate 783 toward the outside. Therefore, the reflective component 790 provided with the reflective film portion 790B on the front surface 790A is on the peripheral side. The light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the decorative portion 788 can be reflected by the reflective film portion 790B so as to travel forward and outward.

In the following, the light reflected by the reflecting film portion 790B based on the light from the light emitting body 782 (that is, the reflected light by the reflecting film portion 790B of the light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788) is referred to as ". Also called "specific reflected light".

According to the light emitting decorative body 780 configured as described above, the inner side (the side closer to the decorative lens portion 786) of the region overlapping the rear side (the side of the substrate 783) of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view. Since the light emitting body 782 is provided in the light emitting body 782, the light output from the light emitting body 782 is directly incident on the inner side (the side close to the decorative lens portion 786) of the peripheral side decorative portion 788.

On the other hand, in the region overlapping the rear side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view, the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 (more specifically, the reflective film portion 790B) is located at a position on the outer side of the light emitting body 782. A part of the inner side of) is arranged. As described above, a part of the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B (specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B) is incident on the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 from the rear surface 788B. Since it is set to obtain, a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can be incident on the outer side of the region where the light output from the light emitting body 782 is directly incident on the peripheral side decorative portion 788. it can.

Therefore, of the light incident from the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788, the direct light from the light emitting body 782 passes through the direct light transmitting region X1 on the inner side, and the specific reflected light by the reflecting film portion 790B is It transmits the reflected light transmission region X2 on the outer side of the direct light transmission region X1.

In FIG. 18A, a linear boundary line G is shown as a boundary between the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2, but the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X1 are shown. It is not necessary to clearly distinguish X2 from the boundary line G, and there is a region in the vicinity of the boundary line G through which both the direct light from the illuminant 782 and the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B are transmitted. There may be.

Further, the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 are outside the peripheral side decorative portion 788 without a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B incident on the peripheral side decorative portion 788. Since it is set so that it can travel on the side (that is, the outer side from the reflected light transmitting region X2), a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B is played on the outer side from the peripheral side decorative portion 788. It can travel in the air as light that is directly visible to the person.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the reflector 785 is provided between the light emitting body 781 and the light emitting body 782, the decorative lens portion 786 and the decorative lens portion 786 are generated by the light output from the light emitting body 781 and the light emitting body 782, respectively. The peripheral side decorative portion 788 can be illuminated independently. Therefore, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 can be independently illuminated as an edge portion with respect to the front view shape (star shape in the present embodiment) of the decorative lens portion 786.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 capable of transmitting the light output from the light emitting body 782 is provided on the peripheral side of the decorative lens portion 786. On the inner side (the side closer to the decorative lens portion 786) of the peripheral side decorative portion 788, the direct light from the light emitting body 782 directly passes through the light transmitting region X1, and on the outer side, the reflective film portion of the reflective component 790. The light reflected in the 790B (specific reflected light) is configured to pass through the reflected light transmission region X2.

As a result, the player determines that the direct light transmitting region X1 in which the light based on the direct light from the light emitting body 782 is emitted and the reflected light transmitting region X2 in which the light based on the specific reflected light by the reflecting film portion 790B is emitted. The appearance of light (for example, brightness and color) can be changed. Therefore, in the peripheral side decorative portion 788 that appears to shine based on the light output from the light emitting body 782 (direct light and the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B), the way of shining differs between the inner side and the outer side. Therefore, it is possible to improve the decorativeness by the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral decorative portion 788 (the decorativeness by the light transmitted through the peripheral decorative portion 788).

Further, in general, since the intensity of the reflected light is smaller than the intensity of the incident light, the direct light from the light emitting body 782 directly passes through the light transmitting region X1 on the inner side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and is outward. On the side, in the configuration in which the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 is transmitted through the reflected light transmitting region X2, the intensity of the light transmitted through the reflected light transmitting region X2 is the light transmitted directly through the light transmitting region X1. Can be weaker than the strength of. As a result, the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 can be made to appear to shine weaker than the inner side. Therefore, since it is possible to change the way the peripheral side decorative portion 788 shines, it is possible to improve the decorativeness by the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral side decorative portion 788.

Since the decorativeness by the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is improved as described above, the light separation from the decorative lens portion 786 that shines in a plane shape by the light from the light emitting body 781 becomes clear. Therefore, the degree of attention to the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 can be improved. As a result, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the light passing through the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 is the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitter 782 (direct light or specific reflected light). Therefore, it is not necessary to separate the light source that is the source of light for passing directly through the light transmitting region X1 and the light source that is the source of light for passing through the reflected light transmitting region X2 (that is,). In that respect, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed and the arrangement of the light sources can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 is incident (entered) on the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788, and a part is on the peripheral side. The light is configured to travel as light directly visible to the player on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 (that is, on the outer side of the reflected light transmitting region X2) without incident on the decorative portion 788. Depending on whether the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B passes through the peripheral side decorative portion 788 (more specifically, the reflected light transmitting region X2) or travels on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788, the game Since the appearance of light by a person (for example, brightness, brilliance, etc.) can be changed, the decorativeness of the light emitting decorative body 780 made by the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a part of the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 does not overlap the peripheral side decorative portion 788 on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view (that is, the front surface). Since the configuration is such that the player is directly exposed to the visible light), the player can refer to the reflected light of natural light by the reflective film portion 790B on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 (hereinafter, the reflected light is referred to as “the reflected light”. Light that is a mixture of "naturally reflected light") and the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to give an impression different from the case where the light that can be visually recognized on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 by the player is only the naturally reflected light, for example, an impressive brilliant feeling (metallic feeling). Become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the decorative sheet 789 is arranged on the rear surface side of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, the decorative lens portion 786, the peripheral side decorative portion 788, and the protruding portion Even if the 787 is integrally molded using a transparent resin, it is possible to illuminate only the decorative lens portion 786 (top surface portion 786A) with the color of the decorative sheet 789. Therefore, it is not necessary to manufacture the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 separately, and in that respect, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to directly print a predetermined color, a predetermined pattern, or the like on the rear surface side of the top surface portion 786A.

When the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789 having light transmission is a relatively dark color such as blue, the illuminant 781 is the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789. It is preferable to emit light in the same color as or in a similar color (for example, a bluish color such as light blue when the decorative sheet 789 is blue). As a result, it is possible to prevent the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789 from appearing lighter than the original color as compared with the case where the illuminant 781 is made to emit light in a single white color.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the protruding portion 787 is located on the peripheral edge side of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 along the peripheral edge. It is provided. Since the decorative sheet 789 is provided on the back surface side of the decorative lens portion 786, the protruding portion 787 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative sheet 789. Thereby, the decorative feeling by the protruding portion 787 can be improved.

In particular, since the front end face 787A is light-diffused, it looks whitish due to the diffusion of natural light. As a result, the main color of the decorative sheet 789 (for example, the color that colors the largest area of the decorative sheet 789) is configured to be a color that is less likely to reflect light than white, so that the end face 787A looks whitish. The feeling can be suitably improved.

Further, since the protruding portion 787 protruding forward with respect to the decorative lens portion 786 is provided on the peripheral edge side of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 along the peripheral edge, in the front view of the decorative lens portion 786. The shape (in the present embodiment, a star shape) can be three-dimensionally decorated by the protrusion 787. Thereby, the decorativeness of the decoration of the light emitting decorative body 780 can be improved.

Further, the protruding portion 787 provided along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 is located between the exposed portion of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788. Therefore, the protruding portion 787 has a shape in front view of the decorative lens portion 786 which is the first decorative portion in the decoration of the light emitting decorative body 780, and the peripheral side which is an edge portion as the second decorative portion with respect to the first decorative portion. It is a clear boundary with the decorative part 788. As a result, when the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion (edge portion) in the decoration of the light emitting decorative body 780 are illuminated independently, each portion can be clearly illuminated.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment, an image corresponding to (corresponding to) an image including a part of a character appearing in the suggestion effect displayed after the predetermined reach display is displayed is displayed in the reach display. By displaying in the suggestion effect displayed after the reach display different from is displayed, the attention of the player is improved.

The "suggestion effect" is the degree of possibility of transition to the special gaming state after the end of the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (hereinafter, "expectation for transition to the special gaming state"). (Also referred to as "degree"), that is, it is an effect that suggests the degree of possibility that the decorative symbol 1621 that is variablely displayed by the decorative symbol display device 479 stops at the stop symbol that becomes the jackpot symbol.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to fourth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the fifth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the fourth embodiments.

19 (A) to 19 (D) are screen views showing an example of an effect image displayed by the decorative symbol display device 479 of the fifth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 479 is configured as an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying an image. In FIG. 19B, for reference, the moving direction of the image 822 is illustrated by an arrow.

In the decorative symbol display device 479 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19 (FIGS. 19A to 19D), the decorative symbol 1621 is displayed as an image. Similar to the decorative symbol 621 (see FIG. 13), the decorative symbol 1621 has a stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery). It is a decorative pattern for displaying on a display device 479.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol 1621 is composed of a main symbol capable of forming a jackpot symbol similar to the main symbol 621A (see FIG. 13). The decorative symbol 1621 may include a main symbol and a sub symbol similar to the sub symbol 621B, which cannot form a jackpot symbol.

The main symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1621 is configured as, for example, a symbol including numerical information indicating a plurality of types of numerical values (for example, each numerical value from "1" to "9"). The main symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1621 may be configured as a symbol that includes not only the numbers indicating the numbers but also both the numbers and the characters corresponding to the numbers as numerical information.

The decorative symbol 1621 is variablely displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and then confirmed and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. (Stop display) is displayed. The display position of the decorative symbol 1621 does not necessarily have to be substantially in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479, and the decorative symbol 1621 may be displayed at various positions within the display area. For example, as shown in FIG. 19, the decorative symbol 1621 may be displayed on the corner side (for example, the upper right corner side) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479.

In the decorative symbol display device 479 of the present embodiment, when a reach display occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621, a predetermined suggestion effect by a moving image or an image can be displayed after the variable display is completed.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a reach display consisting of an odd number (for example, a reach display consisting of "7") is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621, a predetermined probability is obtained after the display of the reach display. Then, a suggestion effect in which a predetermined character appears (hereinafter, the suggestion effect is also referred to as a "first suggestion effect") is executed. The first suggestion effect in which a predetermined character appears may be an effect that is executed (displayed) only in a specific reach display such as a so-called super reach.

As the probability of executing the first suggestion effect (that is, the above-mentioned "predetermined probability") when the reach display consisting of odd numbers is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621, an appropriate value larger than 0% may be adopted. For example, the probability may be less than 100% (for example, 30% or 60%), or the probability that the first suggestion effect is always displayed (that is, 100%) may be used. The selection of whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect is executed by the control of the sub-control board 940.

Whether the reach display by the decorative symbol 1621 is composed of odd numbers or even numbers is determined by, for example, the main control board 920 at the time of starting and winning a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Depends on the jackpot symbol random number obtained by. More specifically, when the stop symbol determined by the main control board 920 based on the jackpot symbol random number is the jackpot symbol, the sub-control board 940 starts from an odd number or an even number depending on the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot symbol. Determine the reach display to be configured. On the other hand, when the stop symbol determined by the main control board 920 based on the jackpot symbol random number is a lost symbol constituting the loss reach, the sub control board 940 starts from a predetermined numerical value regardless of whether it is an odd number or an even number. Determine the reach display to be configured.

For the first suggestion effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns are prepared according to the degree of expectation (or reliability) for the transition to the special gaming state. For the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for each effect pattern, refer to the winning probability in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) and the winning probability in the special symbol lottery. Selection probability in the selection table to be selected (hereinafter, also referred to as "winning selection table") and selection in the selection table (hereinafter, also referred to as "missing selection table") referred to when the player does not win in the special symbol lottery. Determined by probability.

Each moving image data (image data) corresponding to each effect pattern of the first suggestion effect is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in association with each effect pattern. The sub-control board 940 selects an effect pattern of the first suggestion effect, and displays (executes) the first suggestion effect of the selected effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 479.

The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect corresponds to the unit game (that is, the variation display of the special symbol) related to the target special symbol from the main control board 920 by the sub-control board 940. The variation pattern command may be received from the main control board 920, or may be a predetermined timing between the reception of the variation pattern command and the display of the reach display by the decorative symbol 1621. .. Further, in a configuration in which a period during which the operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 can be operated is provided for the display of the first suggestion effect, the sub-control board 940 performs the first suggestion effect at the timing when the period ends. It may be configured to select the production pattern.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each effect pattern in the first suggestion effect appears according to the degree of expectation (or reliability) for the transition to the special gaming state set for the effect pattern. Are configured to be of different types. The player can relatively recognize the high degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state based on the type of the character that appears in the first suggestion effect.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the characters that can appear in the first suggestion effect, for example, short hair holding flags 801A and 801B in both hands as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19C. Characters CA1 and CA2, and ponytail characters CA3 having flags 801A and 801B in both hands as shown in FIG. 19 (D) are prepared. The difference between the characters CA1 and CA2 is the pattern drawn on the flags 801A and 801B. That is, the characters CA1 and CA2 differ depending on whether the pattern drawn on the flags 801A and 801B is a cat or a star.

For the first suggestion effect in which the character CA1 appears, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is set to, for example, 50%, and for the first suggestion effect in which the character CA2 appears, the special game The degree of expectation for the transition to the state is set to, for example, 10%. Further, for the first suggestion effect in which the character CA3 appears, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is set to, for example, 30%.

The player recognizes the expectation set for each character by the instruction manual distributed to the pachinko machine 100, or determines the relative magnitude of the expectation set for each character. Can be recognized empirically. As a result, the player can most expect the transition to the special gaming state when the character CA1 appears in the first suggestion effect among the characters CA1, CA2, and CA3, and the character CA3 can expect the transition to the special gaming state. When it appears, it cannot be expected as much as the character CA1, but it can be expected more than the character CA2.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a reach display consisting of an even number (for example, a reach display consisting of "6") is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621, a predetermined probability is obtained after the display of the reach display. Then, in the first suggestion effect, an image including a part of the character suggesting the degree of expectation (reliability) for the transition to the special gaming state appears (hereinafter, the suggestion effect is also referred to as "second suggestion effect". Is configured to be executed.

As the probability of executing the second suggestion effect (that is, the above-mentioned "predetermined probability") when the reach display consisting of even numbers is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621, an appropriate value larger than 0% may be adopted. For example, the probability may be less than 100% (for example, 30% or 60%), or the probability that the second suggestion effect is always displayed (that is, 100%) may be used. The selection of whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect is executed by the control of the sub-control board 940.

In the example shown in FIG. 19B, after the reach display consisting of “6” is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621, the images 821, 822, 823 including a part of the character CA1 appear (display) at the same time. ) The second suggestion effect is executed. More specifically, image 821 is an image including the left eye portion of the character CA1 of FIG. 19 (A), and image 822 is an image including the left hand of the character CA1 and a part of the flag 801A held by the left hand. Yes, image 523 is an image including the button portion of the jacket in the character CA1.

In the second suggestion effect in which an image including a part of the character (for example, image 821) appears, the magnitude of the degree of expectation (high degree of expectation) for the transition to the special gaming state is expressed. It is possible to make the player relatively recognize the character according to the type of the character corresponding to.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state for the character corresponding to the image appearing in the second suggestion effect is the degree of expectation when the character appears in the first suggestion effect. It is made the same. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, the player who visually recognizes the images 821, 822, 823 appearing in the second suggestion effect corresponds to these images 821, 822, 823 in the first suggestion effect. It is possible to recognize the same degree of expectation as when the character CA1 appears.

Images such as images 821, 822, 823 appearing in the second suggestion effect, that is, images including a part of the character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state in the first suggestion effect are sub-control board 940. It is generated based on the image cut out from the moving image data (image data) corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect stored in the ROM of. Here, the image cut out from the moving image data (image data) is a part of the moving image or the image selected in advance from the moving image or the image composed of the moving image data or the image data, and the expression to be cut out is selected in advance. Or, other expressions such as extraction may be used, and the same shall apply hereinafter.

More specifically, the image appearing in the second suggestion effect is a frame constituting the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern in which the character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state appears in the first suggestion effect. Among them, a corresponding area is cut out from an image of a predetermined frame including the character, and the cut-out image is generated based on the cut-out image (for example, by performing processing such as deformation or enlargement / reduction on the cut-out image).

For example, the image 821 is generated based on an image obtained by cutting out a portion of the region AR1 from an image of a frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19 (A) in the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern appearing by the character CA1. To. Similarly, the images 822 and 823 are generated based on the images obtained by cutting out the portions of the regions AR2 and AR3 from the image of the frame, respectively. Although the details will be described later, the images 821, 822 and 823 are generated by subjecting the image obtained by cutting out the portions of the regions AR1, AR2 and AR3 to processing such as deformation and enlargement / reduction.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect pattern in which the character CA2 appears is also an image of a frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19 (C) in the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern in which the character CA2 appears. Therefore, an image to appear in the second suggestion effect is generated based on the image obtained by cutting out each part of the regions AR1, AR2, and AR3. Similarly, with respect to the effect pattern in which the character CA3 appears, from the image of the frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19 (D) in the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern in which the character CA3 appears, the areas AR1, AR2, Based on the image obtained by cutting out each part of AR3, an image to appear in the second suggestion effect is generated.

In addition, as a region to be cut out of an image in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect, it is preferable that the image cut out from the portion of the region can suggest the type of the character. For example, it is preferable that the area includes the eyes of the character, the pattern of the flag 801A held by the character in the left hand, the jacket worn by the character, the buttons of the jacket, and the like, such as the areas AR1, AR2, and AR3.

In the following, an image including a part of a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state (for example, an image obtained by cutting out a part of the area AR1) cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect. ) Is also referred to as a "cutout image" or the like.

The cropped image is generated under the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 selects one effect pattern from the effect patterns prepared for the first suggestion effect, and in the moving image data stored in the ROM corresponding to the selected effect pattern. A cropped image is generated from an image of a predetermined frame.

For the selection of the effect pattern used to generate the cropped image, the hit-time selection table or the off-time selection table prepared for selecting the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect is selected, and the effect pattern in the first suggestion effect is selected. It is done with reference as in the case. The control is executed by the sub-control board 940.

The frame used for generating the cropped image (that is, a predetermined frame including a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state) is specified in advance by the frame number, the time, and the like in the moving image data. Further, the cutout area such as the area AR1 in the image of the frame to be cut out is specified in advance by the coordinates on the image or the like.

The cutout region does not necessarily have to be a rectangular region such as the region AR1, and may be a non-rectangular region such as a circle. Further, the number of cutout regions may be one or a plurality. When a plurality of cutout regions are provided, the shape of each cutout region does not necessarily have to be all regions having the same shape (for example, all rectangular shapes) as in regions AR1 to AR3, and there are two or more types. The configuration may be such that regions of the shape of are mixed.

The sub-control board 940 generates a cut-out image by cutting out a region specified in advance from the image of the frame specified in advance. The timing at which the sub-control board 940 generates a cutout image is such that the sub-control board 940 mainly controls the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the unit game (that is, the fluctuation display of the special symbol) related to the target special symbol from the main control board 920. It may be the timing received from the substrate 920, or may be a predetermined timing between the reception of the variation pattern command and the display of the reach display by the decorative symbol 1621. Further, in a configuration in which a period during which the operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 can be operated is provided for the display of the second suggestion effect, the sub-control board 940 generates a cut-out image at the timing when the period ends. It may be a configuration.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the image (that is, the cut-out image) cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect is subjected to processing such as deformation and enlargement / reduction, and the processed cut-out image is processed. (For example, image 821, etc.) is displayed in the second suggestion effect. The processing of the cut-out image (for example, deformation, enlargement / reduction, etc.) and the display of the processed cut-out image are controlled by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, the images 821, 822 and 823 appearing (displayed) in the second suggestion effect have a rectangular shape corresponding to the shapes of the cutout regions AR1, AR2, and AR3. It is displayed as a rhombus-shaped image in front view, with the front appearing to face the lower right direction. In this way, by displaying the images 821, 822, 823 so as to be oriented in substantially the same direction different from the front direction, the display orientation of at least one of these images 821, 822, 823 is displayed. It is possible to give an orderly impression as compared with the case where is displayed so as to be different from the display orientation of other images.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, the images 821, 822, 823 appearing in the second suggestion effect are enlarged or enlarged at different scaling ratios (enlargement or reduction ratios) with respect to the corresponding cropped images. This is a reduced image. Specifically, the size of the cropped image increases in the order of the image obtained by cutting out the region AR1, the image obtained by cropping the region AR3, and the image obtained by cropping the region AR2. Each cropped image of is enlarged or reduced in the order of image 822, image 822, and image 823.

It is not always necessary to enlarge or reduce all the cropped images, and some of the plurality of cropped images are enlarged or reduced at different scaling factors or all at the same scaling factor. May be good. Further, a part or all of the plurality of cropped images may be enlarged or reduced at different scaling ratios in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of processed cut-out images (for example, images 821, 822, 823) are configured to appear (display) at the same time in the second suggestion effect. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19 (B), images 821, 822, 823 based on an image (cut out image) cut out from the image of the frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19 (A) are all in the lower right. The images 823, 821, and 822 are displayed side by side in this order from the front to the back.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of processed cutout images appear at the same time in the second suggestion effect, at least one processed cutout image and another processed cutout image appear. Some parts appear to overlap (ie, appear to overlap). The display is also controlled by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, a part of the image 822 and a part of the image 821 are displayed so as to overlap each other, and a part of the image 821 and the image 823 are displayed so as to overlap each other. As a result, the content (drawing content) drawn in the area where the image 821 overlaps in the image 822 and the area where the image 823 overlaps in the image 821 becomes difficult to see (invisible).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the processed cutout image of 1 and the other processed cutout image are displayed so as to overlap at least a part, the drawing content becomes difficult to see due to the overlap. The display position of one of the images is moved so that the drawn contents that were difficult to see can be made visible. The display is also controlled by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, after a part of the image 822 and a part of the image 821 are displayed so as to overlap each other, the overlapping image 821 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the drawn contents. The display position of the image 822 is moved to the left (direction of arrow M). As the overlap between the image 822 and the image 821 becomes smaller, the area in which the drawn content becomes visible in the image 822 increases. As a result, the player can recognize that the image 822 is, for example, an image including a left hand and a part of the flag 801A held in the left hand, and that the flag 801A has a cat pattern drawn on it. Will be.

Here, since the character CA1 is configured in the same manner as the character CA2 except for the pattern drawn on the flag 801A, the player recognizes that the pattern drawn on the flag 801A is a cat by moving the image 822. If it can be done, it becomes possible to infer that the character corresponding to the image displayed in the second suggestion effect is the character CA1. Therefore, the second suggestion is made so that the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state can be easily estimated according to the passage of time after the cut-out image processed in the second suggestion effect appears. In the production, the playability of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is improved.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the image including a part of the character that appears in the second suggestion effect and suggests the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state in the first suggestion effect is the first suggestion effect. The configuration generated based on the image cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern, that is, the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect is diverted to the generation of the image appearing in the second suggestion effect. Since it is configured, it is possible to suppress the storage amount of moving image data (image data), and it is easy to reduce the need to develop production images for the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, and the development cost is reduced accordingly. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it corresponds to an image including a part of a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, which is cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect. Since the image (specifically, the image obtained by subjecting the cut-out image to processing such as deformation and enlargement / reduction) is displayed in the second suggestion effect, the character appearing in the first suggestion effect. The degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state suggested by the above can be similarly suggested in the second suggestion effect. Further, since the suggestion of the expectation degree by the first suggestion effect and the suggestion of the expectation degree by the second suggestion effect are realized with different appearances, it is necessary to develop an effect image for each of the second suggestion effects. It is possible to increase the variation of suggestion production while suppressing the cost.

Here, the image displayed in the second suggestion effect is an image corresponding to an image including a part of the character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state that appears in the first suggestion effect. The amount of information contained in the image is smaller than that in the case where the entire character is displayed, and it is difficult to infer the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in the second suggestion effect.

As a result, the difficulty of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state from the content of each suggestion effect differs between the case where the first suggestion effect is displayed and the case where the second suggestion effect is displayed. When the 1st suggestion effect or the 2nd suggestion effect is displayed, it is possible to improve the playability of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state from the content of each suggestion effect, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game machine. Can be improved.

In particular, since the image cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect is processed such as deformation or enlargement / reduction is displayed in the second suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect is displayed. It is possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in. Also in this respect, it is possible to preferably improve the playability in which the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is estimated from the content of each suggestion effect when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is displayed.

Further, since each image corresponding to the plurality of cutout images cut out from the plurality of areas is displayed at the same time in the second suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect is compared with the case where one cutout image is displayed. It is easy to guess the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the character corresponding to the image from being too difficult to guess from the image displayed in the second suggestion effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of processed cutout images appear at the same time in the second suggestion effect, at least one processed cutout image and another processed cutout image appear. Since the images are displayed so as to overlap (that is, appear to overlap) in a part, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the overlapped images. Also in this respect, it is possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in the second suggestion effect, so that when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is displayed, It is possible to preferably improve the playability in which the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is estimated from the content of each suggestion effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the processed cutout image of 1 and the other processed cutout image are displayed so as to overlap at least a part, the drawing content is difficult to see due to the overlap. Since the display position of the image that has become is moved so that the drawn contents that were difficult to see can be visually recognized, a plurality of processed cutout images initially appeared in the second suggestion effect at the same time. Depending on the passage of time from, the difficulty of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state from the content of the second suggestion effect can be changed. As a result, it is possible to improve the playability of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state from the content of each suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect is displayed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22. In the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment, instead of the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, the stroke amount by the pushing operation is variably configured by the operating mechanism 860. It is equipped with an operating device 1261.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to fifth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the sixth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the fifth embodiments.

FIG. 20 is a schematic view for explaining the configuration and operation of the pressing operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic view showing an example of the appearance of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the operation position. In FIG. 20, for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the internal configuration of the pressing operation device 1261, the base 851 and the operated portion 852 of the button operation unit 850, the operation cover member 870, and the bottom member 880 are cross-sectionald, respectively. It is illustrated by the shape. Hatching is omitted for these cross sections.

Further, in FIGS. 20 and 21, for reference, the position of the surface of the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the surface that the player can contact around the operation cover member 870 in the front block 102) is indicated by a alternate long and short dash line. It is illustrated by Q. That is, the upper side of the alternate long and short dash line Q indicates that a part (operation cover member 870) of the operation device 1261 is exposed (protruding) upward from the surface of the front block 102, and the lower portion of the alternate long and short dash line Q is. It shows that the operating device 1261 is buried below the surface of the front block 102.
Further, in FIG. 21, for the purpose of facilitating understanding of the drawings, the bottom member 880 is not shown, and the region below the alternate long and short dash line Q in the operating device 1261 (that is, below the surface of the front block 102). The area buried in) is shown by the dotted line.

Like the pressing operation device 261, the pressing operation device 1261 is a device capable of a pushing operation by a player. As shown in FIG. 20, the pressing operation device 1261 includes a button operation unit 850, an operating mechanism 860, an operation cover member 870, and a bottom member 880.
The button operation unit 850 includes a base 851, an operated unit 852, and a spring member 853. The substrate 851 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a bottom surface on the lower end side. The operated portion 852 is configured in a cylindrical shape that can be accommodated on the inner peripheral side of the substrate 851. The spring member 853 is, for example, a coil spring, which is interposed between the base 851 and the operated portion 852 to support the operated portion 852 with respect to the base 851. The spring member 853 functions as an urging means for urging the operated portion 852 upward.

An inwardly projecting protrusion 851A is provided on the upper end side of the substrate 851, and an outwardly projecting protrusion 852A overlaps the projecting portion 851A on the lower end side of the operated portion. It is provided at the position.

As a result, the operated portion 852 urged upward by the spring member 853 is maintained in a state in which the protruding portion 851A of the base 851 serves as a stopper and the protruding portion 852A is in contact with the protruding portion 851A from the lower side. To. In the button operating portion 850, the position where the protruding portion 852A abuts on the protruding portion 851A of the substrate 851 from below is the initial position of the operated portion 852.

When the operated portion 852 is pushed in (that is, when the operated portion 852 is pressed downward), the operated portion 852 resists the urging force of the spring member 853 (that is, the spring member 853). Move downward (while deforming). After that, when the pushing operation on the operated portion 852 is completed (that is, when the operated portion 852 becomes unloaded), the operated portion 852 returns to the initial position by the urging force of the spring member 853.

The button operation unit 850 includes a detection sensor 854 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the sub-control board 940 when the operated unit 852 that has been moved downward by the pushing operation is located at a predetermined position. .. The detection sensor 854 is, for example, an optical proximity sensor. Hereinafter, the position of the operated portion 852 detected by the detection sensor 854 is also referred to as “the maximum pressing position of the operated portion 852 by the spring member 853” or the like. The detection sensor 854 outputs a high level signal when the operated portion 852 reaches the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853, and outputs a low level signal when the operated portion 852 moves from the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853. Output.

When the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to the high level signal, the sub-control board 940 determines that the operated unit 852 has reached the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853, and the signal falls to the low level signal. In this case, it is determined that the operated portion 852 has moved from the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853.

The sub-control board 940 sets the maximum pressing position flag (a part of the area of the RAM) to ON when the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to a high level signal. The sub-control board 940 sets the maximum pressing position flag to off when the signal received from the detection sensor 854 drops to a low level signal. As a result, the sub-control board 940 determines that the operated portion 852 is located at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853 when the maximum pressing position flag is set to ON.

The operating mechanism 860 is provided on the lower side with respect to the button operation unit 850. As shown in FIG. 20, the operating mechanism 860 includes a rack 861 which is a rod-shaped body on a geared flat plate, a pinion (gear) 862 that meshes with the teeth of the rack 861, and a motor for rotating the pinion 862. It is equipped with 863. The motor 863 is, for example, a DC motor.

The actuating mechanism 860 rotates (drives) the motor 863 to rotate the pinion 862, whereby the position of the button operating unit 850 can be positioned on the rack 861 without the player's operation on the operated unit 852. It can be moved in a direction along the tooth muscle direction and in a direction corresponding to the rotation direction of the motor 863.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the operating mechanism 860 has a button in a direction substantially the same as the direction in which the operated portion 852 moves (that is, the vertical direction) due to the deformation (reconstruction by compression or urging) of the spring member 853. The operation unit 850 can be moved. The button operation unit 850 can be moved in the vertical direction within the movement range of the rack 861 with respect to the pinion 862 in the operating mechanism 860.

The operating mechanism 860 includes an encoder (not shown) capable of detecting the rotation direction, rotation position, and rotation speed of the motor 863. When the sub-control board 940 controls the movement (position change) of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860, the sub-control board 940 detects the detection result by the encoder and controls the operation of the motor 863 according to the current arrangement position.

The operating mechanism 860 is configured to be able to hold (maintain) the button operation unit 850 at a predetermined position by controlling the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 so that the detection result by the encoder becomes constant. As a result, the unloaded button operation unit 850 (button operation unit 850 in the state where the operated unit 852 is not operated) that the player does not touch the operation cover member 870 is within the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860. Can be held (maintained) at a predetermined position in. The position where the no-load button operation unit 850 is held by the operating mechanism 860 is also referred to as a "neutral position".

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operating mechanism 860 is set to a position corresponding to the satisfied condition among a plurality of predetermined positions as the neutral position of the button operation unit 850. The button operation unit 850 with no load is held. That is, it is configured to change according to the condition that the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 is established.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the height of the button operation unit 850 in the neutral position (more specifically, the height from the surface of the pachinko machine 100) is a special symbol (first special symbol, The unit game related to the second special symbol) is configured to increase as the number of hold times increases.

When the button operation unit 850 is located in the neutral position, the pressing operation device 1261 is also located in the neutral position. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the height of the pressing operation device 1261 in the neutral position is also special. It increases as the number of times the unit game related to the symbol is held increases.

Further, as described above, the operating mechanism 860 has a configuration in which the button operating unit 850 can be held at a predetermined position by the torque (holding force) of the motor 863, so that a force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operating unit 850. When added, the operating mechanism 860 is operated without electrically driving the motor 863 by the force, whereby the button operation unit 850 can be moved in the direction of the force.

For example, when a lower force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operating unit 850 (that is, when the button operating unit 850 is pushed down by a force exceeding the torque), the button operating unit 850 is lowered by the force. Can be moved to the side. Further, when an upward force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operating unit 850 (that is, when the button operating unit 850 is pulled up by a force exceeding the torque), the button operating unit 850 is moved upward by the force. Can be moved to the side.

As a result, in the pressing operation device 1261 of the present embodiment, the stroke amount due to the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is the stroke amount S1 of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853 (that is, the cover in the button operating unit 850). The stroke amount S2 of the button operation unit 850 by the operation mechanism 860 (the amount of movement from the initial position of the operation unit 852 to the maximum pressing position) (the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operation mechanism 860 from the neutral position of the button operation unit 850). The amount of movement to the position at the lower end of the) can be added.

The operation cover member 870 is a member that covers (covers) the button operation portion 850 from the outside, and is configured in a cylindrical shape having an operation surface on the surface on the upper end side. The operation cover member 870 has translucency, and emits light emitted by a light emitting body (not shown) such as an LED arranged inside the operation cover member 870 (for example, the base 851 of the button operation unit 850). It is configured to be transparent.

Since the surface of the operation cover member 870 on the back side with respect to the operation surface (that is, the surface facing the button operation unit 850) is in contact with the operated portion 852 of the button operation unit 850, the player can use the operation cover member 870 of the operation cover member 870. When the pushing operation is performed on the operation surface, the operation cover member 870 and the operated portion 852 are integrally moved downward.

As a result, the pushing operation performed by the player on the operating surface of the operation cover member 870 becomes a pushing operation on the operated portion 852, and the operated portion 852 is pushed downward against the urging force of the spring member 853. The button operation unit 850 can be moved downward by the operation of the operating mechanism 860.

As shown in FIG. 21, a hold count display unit 870A is provided on the surface of the operation cover member 870. The hold count display unit 870A corresponds to the numbers from "0" to "8" corresponding to the hold count of the unit game related to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each of these numbers. A line segment as a scale is drawn.

In the hold count display unit 870A, the numbers corresponding to the hold count of the unit game related to the special symbol are arranged in ascending order from top to bottom, and the button operation unit 850 according to the current hold count. In the neutral position, the numbers corresponding to the number of holdings are drawn so as to be exposed from the surface (dashed line Q) of the pachinko machine 100.

As a result, for example, when the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held is zero, as shown in FIG. 21 (A), the button operation unit 850 sets the number of times held (that is, the number of times held is zero). By being placed in the corresponding neutral position, only the number “0” corresponding to the number of holds drawn on the hold count display unit 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100.

Further, for example, when the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol is 3, as shown in FIG. 21B, the button operation unit 850 corresponds to the number of holdings (that is, the number of holdings of 3). By being arranged in the neutral position, the number “3” corresponding to the number of holdings drawn on the holding number display unit 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. As a result, the numbers from "0" to "3" are exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100.

Further, for example, when the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol is 8, as shown in FIG. 21C, the button operation unit 850 corresponds to the number of holdings (that is, the number of holdings which is 8). By being arranged in the neutral position, the number “8” corresponding to the number of holdings drawn on the holding number display unit 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. As a result, the numbers from "0" to "8" are exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100.

Therefore, in a configuration in which the height of the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 increases as the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol increases, the player can use the pachinko machine among the numbers drawn on the number of times of holding display unit 870A. By visually recognizing the number displayed on the portion exposed from the surface of 100, the current number of holds can be grasped. That is, the pressing operation device 1261 can function as a display device for displaying the number of times the unit game is held for the special symbol, similar to the special symbol holding display device 476 and 477.

It will be described back to FIG. The bottom member 880 is a member that constitutes the bottom portion of the pressing operation device 1261. The bottom member 880 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and a groove 880A capable of accommodating the side surface of the operation cover member 870 is provided on the peripheral side thereof. The groove 880A also functions as a guide for guiding the operation cover member 870 in the vertical direction. The operation cover member 870 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction only within a certain range upward and to be provided with a stopper mechanism for limiting the movement of the operation cover member 870 to the upper side by a certain amount or more, but the illustration is omitted. ing.

The pressing operation device 1261 includes a detection sensor 890 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the sub-control board 940 when the button operation unit 850 is located at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860. .. The detection sensor 890 is, for example, an optical proximity sensor. The detection sensor 890 does not necessarily have to be provided, and the detection position by the detection sensor 890 may be detected by using the information of the sensor (encoder) capable of detecting the upper and lower positions of the button operation unit 850.

The detection sensor 890 outputs a high level signal when the button operation unit 850 reaches the position at the lower end of the movement range by the operation mechanism 860, and the button operation unit 850 is from the position at the lower end of the movement range by the operation mechanism 860. Outputs a low level signal when moved.

The sub-control board 940 determines that the button operation unit 850 has reached the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 when the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to a high level signal, and the signal is low level. When the signal is dropped, it is determined that the button operation unit 850 has moved from the position at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860.

The sub-control board 940 sets the lower end position flag (a part of the area of the RAM) to ON when the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to a high level signal. The sub-control board 940 sets the lower end position flag to off when the signal received from the detection sensor 890 falls to the low level signal. As a result, the sub-control board 940 determines that the button operation unit 850 is located at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 when the lower end position flag is set to ON.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the sub-control board 940, the button operating portion 850 is located at the lower end of the moving range by the operating mechanism 860, and the operated portion 852 is located at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853. Is generated, it is determined that the pressing operation device 1261 has been operated.

More specifically, when the sub-control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 854 has risen to the high level signal, if the lower end position flag is set to ON, the pressing operation device 1261 is operated. judge. Similarly, when the sub-control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to the high level signal, if the maximum pressing position flag is set to ON, the sub-control board 940 determines that the pressing operation device 1261 has been operated. To do.

When the pressing operation device 1261 (button operation unit 850) is set to the neutral position at a position where the button operation unit 850 is above the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860, the sub-control board 940 is set to the pressing operation device 1261. When it is determined that the operation has been performed, the button operation unit 850 controls the operation mechanism 860 so as to return to the neutral position. As a result, the pressing operation device 1261 can be returned to the current neutral position.

When the button operation unit 850 is moved by applying a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 to the button operation unit 850, the motor 863 is rotated by the rotation of the pinion 862. The rotation speed can be detected by an encoder (not shown) included in the operating mechanism 860. The sub-control board 940 determines that the rotation speed of the motor 863 detected by the encoder is zero when it is determined that the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to a high level signal in a situation where the lower end position flag is off. If so, the operating mechanism 860 is controlled so that the button operation unit 850 returns to the current neutral position.

As a result, even though the button operation unit 850 is operated (pushing operation) with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, the operation is performed before the button operation unit 850 reaches the position at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860. The pressing operation device 1261 can be returned to the current neutral position even when the above is completed.

When the pressing operation device 1261 is returned to the current neutral position, the moving speed of the button operating unit 850 that moves toward the neutral position within the moving range of the button operating unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860 is a constant moving speed. The movement speed may be different depending on the state at that time.

Next, the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 configured as described above will be described. When the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is the position where the button operation unit 850 is the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20A), the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position is performed. (That is, when the pushing operation is performed on the operation surface of the operation cover member 870), the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed down by the position change of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853. ..

Therefore, the stroke amount when the pressing operation device 1261 whose neutral position is the position where the button operation unit 850 is the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 is pushed down to the situation where it is determined that the operation is performed by the sub-control board 940. Corresponds to the stroke amount S1 of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853, as shown in FIG. 20 (B).

On the other hand, when the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is a position where the button operation unit 850 is above the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20C), the neutral position is set. When a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 and the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 is larger than the urging force of the spring member 853 at the maximum pressing position, the pressing operation device 1261 first starts with the spring member. After the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of 853 is pushed down to the maximum pressing position (see FIG. 20 (D)), it is pushed down by the position change of the button operating portion 850 by the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20 (E)).

Therefore, when the pressing operation device 1261 whose neutral position is the position where the button operation unit 850 is above the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 is pushed down to a situation where it is determined that the operation has been performed by the sub-control board 940. As shown in FIGS. 20 (D) and 20 (E), the stroke amounts of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853 and the stroke amount S2 of the button operating portion 850 by the operating mechanism 860 are the same. That is, (stroke amount S1 + stroke amount S2).

The stroke amount S2 of the button operation unit 850 by the operation mechanism 860 is the amount of movement from the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 to the lower end of the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operation mechanism 860. It is a value that fluctuates due to fluctuations in the neutral position of 850. More specifically, the stroke amount S2 is a value that increases as the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 becomes higher. Therefore, in the pressing operation device 261 of the present embodiment, the stroke amount due to the pressing operation increases as the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 increases.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 and the reaction force with respect to the pushing operation when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261. More specifically, FIG. 22 is a graph in which the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 is on the horizontal axis, and the reaction force with respect to the pushing operation is on the vertical axis.

In the present embodiment, the position of the operation surface of the operation cover member 870 in the pressing operation device 1261 is referred to as the “operation position of the pressing operation device 1261”. The position of the operated portion 852 of the button operating portion 850 may be set as the “operating position of the pressing operating device 1261”.

When the button operation unit 850 performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20A), which is set to the neutral position at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860, the button operating unit 850 is in the neutral position. From the operation position A1 of the pressing operation device 1261 to reaching the operation position Amin of the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20B) in a situation where it is determined that the operation (pushing operation) has been performed by the sub-control board 940. The reaction force to the pushing operation in the section (that is, the section of the stroke amount S1) is the spring constant of the spring member 853 as it approaches the operation position Amin from the operation position A1 as shown by the straight line J1 shown in FIG. 21 (A). It increases linearly with the inclination.

Next, when the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is raised and the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 in the neutral position is moved from the operation position A1 to the operation position A2 (see FIG. 20C), the neutral position is concerned. A case where a pushing operation is performed on the position pressing operation device 1261 will be described.

In such a case, when the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 is larger than the urging force of the spring member 853 at the maximum pressing position, the operated portion 852 is maximally pressed from the operating position A2 of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position. The reaction force to the pushing operation in the section up to the operating position A2x (that is, the section of the stroke amount S1) of the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20C), which is the position, is the reaction force of the straight line J2 shown in FIG. As described above, as the operating position A1 approaches the operating position Ax, the inclination of the spring constant of the spring member 853 linearly increases.

The section (that is, the stroke) from the operation position A2x to the operation position Amin of the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20B) in the situation where it is determined that the operation (pushing operation) is performed by the sub-control board 940. The reaction force for the pushing operation in the section (quantity S2) is a value corresponding to the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 in the section.

Since the torque of the motor 863 depends on the current value that energizes the motor 863, the relationship between the operating position of the pressing operation device 1261 and the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is determined by the current value that energizes the motor 863. It is possible to make various modes by controlling the above, and it is possible to set a plurality of types so as to have different operation feelings according to the game situation and the lottery result.

For example, when the torque of the motor 863 is constant regardless of the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261, the reaction force against the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is operated as shown by the straight line J3 shown in FIG. 21 (A). A certain pattern can be included in the section from the position A2x to the operation position Amin.

Alternatively, when the torque of the motor 863 is linearly increased as the operating position of the pressing operation device 1261 approaches the operating position Amin, the reaction force to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is shown in FIG. 21 (A). Like the two-dot chain line J4, the configuration may include a pattern that linearly increases as the operating position A2x approaches the operating position Amin.

The pattern of not only increasing the torque of the motor 863 but also decreasing the torque of the motor 863 may be included. In such a case, the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 can be reduced as the operating position A2x approaches the operating position Amin. Further, a pattern that combines an increase and a decrease in the torque of the motor 863 may be included. Further, the increase or decrease of the torque of the motor 863 does not necessarily have to be linear, and may include a pattern in which the torque of the motor 863 increases or decreases in a curve, or a maximum that decreases after the torque increases. It may be a pattern including a portion including a portion, or a pattern including a minimum portion that increases after the torque decreases.

Further, a pattern in which the change in torque of the motor 863 becomes discontinuous in the section between the operation position A2x and the operation position Amin (specifically, a pattern in which the change in torque includes a step and becomes discontinuous before and after the predetermined position). It may be. In such a case, for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (B), the reaction force to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 becomes discontinuous because the operation position does not change at the operation position X and rises sharply. The change in the reaction force with respect to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from the operating position X to the operating position Amin may be constant in the section as shown by the straight line J5 shown in FIG. 21 (B). A pattern that increases as the operating position approaches Amin may be included, such as the alternate long and short dash line J6 shown in 21 (B).

Further, the mode of change of the reaction force with respect to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from the operating position A2x to the operating position X, and the reaction force to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from the operating position X to the operating position Amin. A pattern having the same change mode may be included, or these change modes may have different configurations.

Further, the operation position where the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is discontinuous does not necessarily have to be one as shown in FIG. 21 (B), and the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is not necessarily one. A pattern in which a plurality of (that is, two or more) operation positions for discontinuing the reaction force may be included may be included.

Further, it is not always necessary to discontinuously change the torque change of the motor 863 at the operation position X (that is, discontinuously change the reaction force to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261), and before and after the operating position X. In the pattern in which the change mode of the reaction force with respect to the push operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is different, a pattern in which each change mode continuously changes at the operation position X may be included.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the button operating unit 850 is moved by applying a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 to the button operating unit 850 by an encoder (not shown) provided in the operating mechanism 860. The rotation direction, rotation position, and rotation speed of the motor 863 can be detected. The sub-control board 940 can detect the pushing speed (moving speed of the pressing operation device 1261) in the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 and the moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 based on each value detected by the encoder.

Here, a target value is set in advance for the moving speed and moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 that has been pushed in (that is, the moving speed and moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 that is the target value are set to the sub-control board 940. The moving speed or moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 detected by the sub-control board 940 based on each value detected by the encoder is stored in advance as a target value. Alternatively, when the movement amount is exceeded, a predetermined effect or display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, or a pattern in which a predetermined accessory provided on the game board 400 operates may be included.

Specifically, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 (button operation unit 850) with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, the sub-control board 940 determines the rotation direction of the motor 863 detected by the encoder. The movement speed or movement amount of the pressing operation device 1261 is detected based on the rotation position and the rotation speed, and the detected movement speed or movement amount is compared with the movement speed or movement amount stored as a target value in advance. When it is determined that the detected movement speed or movement amount exceeds the movement speed or movement amount stored as a target value in advance, a predetermined effect or display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, or the game board 400 is displayed. A pattern for operating a predetermined accessory provided may be included.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game property in which the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 according to a predetermined target value, thereby improving the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100. ..

The target value may be set to either the movement speed or the movement amount, a combination of both, or the button operation unit 850 held at a constant height position. It may be the pushing operation force. Further, the target value may be set by a threshold value such as whether or not the target value is exceeded, or may be maintained at a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range for a certain period of time or longer. The operation may be an operation with a target for which an operation time with the operation is set.

Further, it is preferable to set a plurality of types of the target value in the pressing operation device 1261, the height position of the neutral position, the magnitude of the reaction force, and the pattern of change. Then, depending on the conditions based on the game situation (for example, the number of holds, the time of the game, the number of times a predetermined effect (for example, the display of a specific character) is executed), which of the plurality of types is selected, or a big hit lottery Depending on the conditions based on the lottery result of a predetermined lottery, etc., which of the multiple types should be selected, for example, the result of winning or failing related to the symbol lottery and the possibility of transition to the special gaming state (expectation, reliability). ) Is preferably used as an effect to suggest to the player.

For example, since the sub-control board 940 can detect the amount of movement of the pressing operation device 1261 that has been pushed in based on each value detected by the encoder, the height of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is related to the special symbol. In a configuration that changes according to the number of times a unit game is held, the sub-control board 940 pushes the pressing operation device 1261 with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, and has a speed below a certain level. When a pushing operation with a target value of (for example, a moving speed of 0.5 seconds or less per stroke for one scale) is executed, a special symbol lottery (first special) is included in the currently held unit game. If the unit game that has been won in the symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is included, the number of holds corresponding to the unit game that has won the special symbol lottery has a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). The operating mechanism 860 may be controlled so as to discontinuously change the torque of the motor 863 at the corresponding position.

When the unit games currently held include the unit games that have been won in the special symbol lottery, the motor 863 is located at the position corresponding to the number of holds corresponding to the unit games that have been won in the special symbol lottery. The probability of discontinuously changing the torque of is greater than 0% and less than 100%, or may be 100%.

In this way, when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, the content of each unit game held (for example, whether or not the special symbol lottery has been won). The movement mode of the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the change in the operation feeling due to the discontinuous change in the torque of the motor 863 during the movement of the pressing operation device 1261 and the pattern of the reaction force against the movement) change according to the movement mode. In the above, it is possible to provide the game property in which the contents such as the lottery result of each of the reserved unit games are estimated based on the movement mode of the pressing operation device 1261.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 that can be pushed by the player has a button operation unit 850 in which the operated portion 852 is supported by the base 851 via the spring member 853, and the button operation. It is provided with an operating mechanism 860 that enables the vertical movement of the unit 850, the operating mechanism 860 can hold the button operating unit 850 in a predetermined neutral position, and the torque of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 ( By applying a lower force (pushing operation force) exceeding the holding force) to the button operation unit 850, the button operation unit 850 can be moved in the direction of the force.

Thereby, the stroke amount due to the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 can be changed according to the change of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the neutral position of the button operation unit 850). As a result, it is possible to diversify the operation feeling when the player operates the operated portion 852 as compared with the case where the moving amount of the operated portion 852 is limited to a certain range based on the deformation of the spring member 853. Therefore, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be suitably improved.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the height of the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 (the neutral position of the button operation unit 850) increases as the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held increases. .. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the holding number of times by visually recognizing the pressing operation device 1261, and recognizes the holding number of times by the height of the button operation unit 850 even in the situation where the game is played with the line of sight down. It can be made easier.

Further, the stroke amount of the pressing operation device 1261 becomes longer as the number of holdings increases. As a result, the operation feeling when the player operates the operated portion 852 can be made different according to the number of times of holding, so that the player can feel the holding by pushing the pressing operation device 1261. The number of times can be estimated (recognized). Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game property in which the number of times of holding a unit game related to a special symbol can be estimated (recognized) by the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 without visually recognizing the information on the number of times of holding. it can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 can be changed according to the current value by changing the current value of energizing the motor 863. With the 860, the operation feeling with respect to the operated unit 852 (operation feeling with respect to the button operation unit 850) can be variously changed in the section in which the button operation unit 850 can move in the vertical direction.

For example, when the torque of the motor 863 is constant within the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860 regardless of the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 (the operation amount of the pressing operation device 1261), the pressing operation device Since the reaction force for the pushing operation to the 1261 can be made constant within the moving range, the player can perform the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 with a constant force within the range.

Further, when the torque of the motor 863 is linearly or non-linearly increased or decreased as the operating amount (pushing amount) of the pressing operating device 1261 increases within the moving range of the button operating unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860, Since the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 can be increased or decreased linearly or non-linearly within the movement range, the player can increase or decrease the force for pushing the pressing operation device 1261 within the range. The pressing operation device 1261 can be operated while increasing or decreasing the pressing force linearly or non-linearly.

As a result, the operation feeling of the pressing operation device 1261 in the section where the button operation unit 850 can be moved in the vertical direction by the operating mechanism 860 is an operation feeling that the pushing operation can be performed with a constant force, or increases as the pushing amount increases. It can be changed in various ways, such as a feeling of operation that requires the pushing operation to be performed with a decreasing force. This makes it possible to diversify the feeling of operation when the player operates the operated portion 852. In this respect as well, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be suitably improved.

Further, by changing the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 by controlling the current value of energizing the motor 863 according to the content of the predetermined effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the operated portion 852 can be moved. The feeling of operation when operated can be changed according to the content of the effect.

For example, when the effect of injecting air into a balloon with a manual air pump is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during variable display, the torque of the motor 863 is constant according to the depiction of operating the manual air pump. By controlling the current value so as to be, the operation feeling of the pushing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 can be made constant as if the manual air pump is operated. Then, when the display result of the variable display is a winning or suggests to the player that the variable display has a high degree of expectation, a reaction force is generated until the end of the production, and the balloon is maximized by the pushing operation. While describing that it has grown, when it is lost or suggests to the player that it is a variable display with low expectation, there is a hole in the balloon and the balloon shrinks, along with the shrinking display The torque may be reduced to minimize the reaction force, and the balloon may be described so as not to inflate.

In addition, when the effect of the character trying to open the tightly closed door is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display, the character pushes the door to open the door. By controlling the current value so that the torque of the motor 863 decreases sharply at the moment when the door is opened, the operation feeling of the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 can be sharply lightened as if the door was opened. .. Then, when the display result of the variable display is a winning or suggests to the player that the variable display has a high degree of expectation, the torque is reduced to minimize the reaction force at the end of the production, and the door is opened. If you want to describe that the character showing the lucky state is behind the door, but if you lose it or suggest to the player that it is a variable display with low expectation, the reaction force is applied until the end of the production. It may be generated so that the door does not open.

The effect corresponding to the display result of the variable display is not limited to the above, and the state of being pushed to the bottom is continued for a certain period of time, and then the button operation unit 850 is maintained at the lower end position according to the degree of expectation or whether or not it is correct. The position after the operation may be different, the magnitude of the operation force (reaction force) may be different, or a combination thereof may be used. Good.

In this way, pressing is performed by controlling the current value of energizing the motor 863 so that the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 changes according to the content of the predetermined effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. The operation feeling of the pushing operation on the operation device 1261 can be made to match the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. As a result, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he / she is participating in a predetermined effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 can be changed according to the current value of energizing the motor 863, the button operation unit 850 is moved in the vertical direction by the operating mechanism 860. The torque of the motor 863 can be discontinuously (or stepped or suddenly changed) at a predetermined position within the movable section.

As a result, when the player operates the operated portion 852 with a force exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860, the button operating portion 850 can be moved in the vertical direction by the operating mechanism 860 within the section. At a predetermined position, the feeling of operation with respect to the operated portion 852 (pressing operation device 1261) changes discontinuously. Since the operation feeling for the pressing operation device 1261 changes discontinuously at a predetermined position, the operation feeling for the pressing operation device 1261 is unlikely to be monotonous, whereby the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be suitably improved. ..

Further, in the pressing operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the position of the button operation unit 850 is configured to be changeable by the operating mechanism 860, and the elastic body is deformed as a control of the sub-control board 940. It can be configured to include a control to move the button operation unit 850 at a speed at which an inertial force is generated. That is, by moving the button operating portion 850 in a predetermined direction (upward or downward) by the operating mechanism 860 and then suddenly stopping the movement, the button operating portion 850 is attached to the base 851 via the spring member 853. The supported portion 852 can be moved along a predetermined direction (for example, upward) by the inertial force received by the operated portion 852 due to the sudden stop of the button operation portion 850, and is in a predetermined direction. And, it is also possible to make a vibrating motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, downward direction).

As a result, the pressing operation device 1261 functions not only as a device for causing the player to perform a predetermined operation (specifically, a pushing operation), but also as a device capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion 852. Can be made to. Since the pressing operation device 1261 can form a part of the effect, the interest in the pressing operation device 1261 can be improved, and thereby the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be improved.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. The pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment is devised so that the operation feeling and the operation feeling (operation feeling) of the pressing operation device 1261 of the sixth embodiment can be suitably realized.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to sixth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the seventh embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the sixth embodiments.

FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 24 is a schematic view for explaining the pressing operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. More specifically, FIG. 24 (A) is a top view schematically showing the vicinity of the pressing operation device 1261, and FIG. 24 (B) is a pressing operation device 1261 viewed from the direction of arrow A in FIG. 24 (A). It is a side view of the vicinity.

In FIG. 24 (FIGS. 24 (A) and 24 (B)), the pressing operation device 1261, the case 893 accommodating the pressing operation device 1261, and the hand rest stand are used for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the drawings. 895 is illustrated. Further, in each of the drawings of FIGS. 24 (A) and 24 (B), for reference, arrows indicating the front-back direction, the left-right direction, or the up-down direction with respect to the illustrated contents are shown.

Further, in FIG. 24A, for reference, the position of the front plate 222 with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 and the like is shown by a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIG. 24B, for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the drawings, the partial cross sections of the case 893 and the hand rest 895 on the upper end side are shown, and the hatching for each of these cross sections is omitted. There is. Further, in FIG. 24B, for reference, the alternate long and short dash line QA showing the vertical position of the opening R on the opening surface is shown.

Further, in FIG. 24, for reference, two examples of a player's hand that operates the pressing operation device 1261 (the pushing operation is performed on the operation surface 870B) and a part of the forearm portion that is continuous with the hand. It is illustrated by the alternate long and short dash line TE. In the present embodiment, the "hand" is a part on the tip side of the wrist and is composed of a palm and a finger, and the "forearm part" is a part continuous with the hand from the wrist to the elbow. Indicates the part of.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the input operation device 260 is configured to include a pressing operation device 1261 and a selection operation device 263. The input operation device 260 may be configured to include a rotation operation device 262 in addition to the pressing operation device 1261 and the selection operation device 263.

As shown in FIG. 23, the pressing operation device 1261 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper protruding portion 217. On the side closer to the player than the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the front side with respect to the pressing operation device 1261), a hand rest 895 on which the player can place a hand (for example, a right hand) for operating the pressing operation device 1261 is provided. It is provided. The hand rest 895 is a stand extending forward from the case 893 that houses the pressing operation device 1261.

The pressing operation device 1261 is housed in the case 893 through an opening R opened upward. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24B, the pressing operation device 1261 is an operation on the upper end side surface of the operation cover member 870 and touched by a player when performing a pushing operation. The neutral position is such that the surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R (the opening surface located on the alternate long and short dash line QA) accommodating the pressing operation device 1261 in the vertical direction, which is the moving direction of the pressing operation device 1261. It is composed.

In this embodiment, the case where the opening R is arranged at a position that coincides with the plane is illustrated, but the opening R may be arranged at a height position that does not coincide with the plane. For example, the operation surface 870B may be configured so that the position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to at least a part of the peripheral edge of the opening in the moving direction of the operation surface 870B is a neutral position. In this case, at least one of the peripheral edges of the opening. A position that is substantially equal to a part of the portion on the side closer to the player may be configured to be a neutral position.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the hand rest 895 is pushed by a player who operates the pressing operation device 1261 (pushing the operation surface 870B). It is configured so that at least a part of a part of the hand (more specifically, a part excluding a part on the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B of the hand) and a forearm part continuous with the hand can be placed. To.

That is, the hand rest 895 is a support base that allows the player to manually push the operation surface 870B and support at least a part of the hand and the forearm portion continuous with the hand from below. Has the function of. In the example shown in FIG. 24, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line TE, a part of the wrist side of the player's hand and a part of the wrist side of the forearm are supported by the hand rest 895.

Therefore, the player supports the operating surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 by placing at least a part of the hand performing the pushing operation and the forearm portion continuous with the hand on the hand rest 895. The operation surface 870B can be operated while allowing the operation surface 870B to be operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (B), both the upper surface of the operation surface 870B and the upper surface of the hand rest 895 are substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 (the opening surface located at the alternate long and short dash line QA) in the vertical direction. In the position configuration, the palm is placed on the hand rest 895, and the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side) is moved up and down with the wrist side of the palm as a fulcrum to move the palm up and down with respect to the operation surface 870B. The pushing operation can be performed. Further, by placing the hand on the operation surface 870B with the wrist side of the palm as a fulcrum, the movement of the operation surface 870B makes it easier for the hand to move up and down (more specifically, the fingertip side). Therefore, the operation surface 870B can be easily moved, and the feeling of movement of the movement can be easily felt.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the neutral position, the operation surface 870B is located at a position substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction. Compared with the case where the operation surface 870B protrudes upward with respect to the opening surface of the opening R, the player who performs the operation makes it difficult to perform a powerful pushing operation (pressing operation) such as hitting the operation surface 870B. Can be done.

Therefore, in a configuration such as the pressing operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in which the position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction is the neutral position, the pressing operation device 1261 is used. The torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20) is not a forceful pushing operation (pressing operation) such as hitting the operation surface 870B to the player who pushes the operation surface 870B. ), The operation surface 870B can be pushed in slowly.

Therefore, when a lower force (pushing operation force) exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 is applied to the operation surface 870B, the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed from the neutral position (pressing). In the pachinko machine 100 having a configuration capable of moving in the direction of), the player can suitably experience the operation feeling of pushing (pressing), which is difficult to feel due to the momentum of the pushing operation. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player who operates the pressing operation device 1261 (which performs a pushing operation on the operation surface 870B) operates the pressing operation device 1261 on the side closer to the player than the pressing operation device 1261. At least a part of the hand (more specifically, the part excluding the part on the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B of the hand) and the forearm continuous with the hand can be placed. A hand rest 895 (which can be supported from below) is provided.

As a result, at least a part of the part of the player's hand excluding the part on the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B and the forearm part continuous with the hand can be supported by the hand rest 895. The hand can be stabilized, and it is possible to prevent the player from performing a pushing operation at an inappropriate position on the operation surface 870B.

Further, since at least a part of the part of the player's hand excluding the part on the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B and the forearm part continuous with the hand can be supported by the hand rest 895, the hand and the hand and the forearm part can be supported. The strength of the pushing operation with respect to the operating surface 870B can be suppressed as compared with the case where the forearm portion moves freely. Therefore, it is difficult for the player who pushes the operation surface 870B (operates the pressing operation device 1261) to perform a vigorous operation (for example, hitting the operation surface 870B) on the operation surface 870B. Can be done.

As a result, the player who pushes the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 is made to perform the pushing operation of pushing the operation surface 870B slowly against the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860. be able to. Also in this respect, when a lower force (pushing operation force) exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 is applied to the operating surface 870B, the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed from the neutral position. In the pachinko machine 100 having a configuration that can move in the direction of operation (pressing), it is difficult for the player to experience the operation feeling of pushing (pressing), which is difficult to experience due to the momentum of the pushing operation. This makes it possible to improve the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24 (A), from the length in the front-rear direction (length W1) in the region in front of the front plate 222, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 The length excluding the length (length WA) in the front-rear direction from the front end of the operation surface 870B (pressing operation device 1261) to the rear end of the hand rest 895 in the region including the 870B and the hand rest 895 (that is, the length WA). The length WB) is shorter than the length (length W2) in the front-rear direction of the operation surface 870B (pressing operation device 1261). That is, the region of the pressing operation device 1261 including the operation surface 870B and the hand rest 895 occupies a relatively large region in the front-rear direction of the region on the front side of the front plate 222.

In such a configuration, the size of the operation surface 870B is set to be relatively large in the region on the front side of the front plate 222, whereby the player can easily operate the operation surface 870B. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 24A, the operation surface 870B occupies approximately half in the front-rear direction in the region in front of the front plate 222, or the player has a plurality of fingers (for example, thumbs). It is a size that can be operated with four fingers) except for, and is relatively large.

As described above, even when the operation surface 870B (pressing operation device 1261) is relatively large in the region on the front side of the front plate 222, the support portion is provided so that at least a part thereof is on the front side of the pressing operation device 1261. Is provided, thereby enabling a suitable operation on the operation surface 870B (that is, an operation surface 870B configured to be relatively large), and at the same time, the player can feel the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 provided with the operation surface 870B. You can experience it favorably.

Further, as described above, in the pressing operation device 1260 of the present embodiment, the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side of the hand) is placed on the operation surface 870B with the wrist side of the palm placed on the hand rest 895 as a fulcrum. By mounting the device, the operation feeling of the movement of the pressing operation device 1260 (movement of the operation surface 870B) can be experienced by the movement of the hand accompanying the movement of the operation surface 870B.

Therefore, for example, in the pressing operation device 1260 of the present embodiment, the height of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is the number of times the unit game is held for the special symbol, as in the pressing operation device 1260 described in the sixth embodiment. In a configuration that changes according to the situation (more specifically, the number increases as the number of holdings increases), the player places the hand placed on the operation surface 870B with the wrist side of the palm placed on the hand rest 895 as a fulcrum. You can feel the increase or decrease in the number of holdings by moving.

Further, in the configuration in which the height of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1260 of the embodiment changes according to the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held (more specifically, the height increases as the number of times of holding increases). A neutral position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction is set with respect to a predetermined number of holdings (for example, zero) smaller than the maximum number of holdings (for example, 8 times). It is also possible to sensibly grasp whether the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol is more or less than the predetermined number of holdings by moving the hand placed on the operation surface 870B. It is possible.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment is devised so as to improve the attention of the player even in the non-gaming state in which the fluctuation display is not performed.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to seventh embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the eighth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the seventh embodiments.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the non-game state (standby) in which the player is waiting for the execution of the game and the variation display is not performed. The so-called "customer waiting effect" is composed of moving images or images obtained by diverting moving image data (image data) prepared in advance for various effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during variable display. The moving image data for the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in association with each effect pattern.

Specifically, for example, for a part or all of a plurality of types of effects prepared in advance, a partial series of moving images in the effect from each video data corresponding to each target effect ( A continuous frame image) is cut out, and if there are multiple cut-out videos or, if there are multiple target effects, each cut-out video is connected in a predetermined order for each target effect, and the video is configured as a customer waiting effect. To do.

For example, when a plurality of types of suggestion effects, which are one of the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, are prepared during the variable display, some or all (that is, at least one) of the plurality of types of suggestion effects are prepared. For the suggestion effect, a partial series of moving images (continuous frame images) in the suggestion effect are cut out from each video data corresponding to each target suggestion effect, and the cut out video or the target When there are a plurality of suggestion effects, each of the cut out moving images is connected to each of the target suggestion effects in a predetermined order, and a moving image is configured as a customer waiting effect.

The "partial series of moving images" cut out from the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display may be any range of moving images in the effect. For example, it may be configured to cut out a part of a partial moving image (continuous frame image) including at least a range in which a characteristic display is performed in the target effect.

As the "range in which a characteristic display is performed in the production", for example, when the target production is a suggestion production, a predetermined moving image capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state in the suggestion production. A part (a moving image in a predetermined range), more specifically, for example, a moving image part in which a character suggesting the degree of expectation for a transition to a special gaming state appears, or a moving part in which the background color is a color suggesting the degree of expectation. And so on. For example, in the first suggestion effect of the fifth embodiment described above, a moving image portion in which a predetermined character such as characters CA1 to CA3 (see FIG. 19) appears is cut out as a "range in which a characteristic display is performed in the effect". It may be the configuration to be targeted by.

Alternatively, for example, when the target effect is an effect that prompts an operation on the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during the variable display, the effect of prompting the operation is characteristic. The moving image portion showing the specific content may be defined as "the range in which the characteristic display is performed in the production". For example, the moving image portion corresponding to the "effect of injecting air into a balloon with a manual air pump" and the "effect of a character trying to open a tightly closed door" illustrated in the sixth embodiment described above is described as " It may be configured to be cut out as "a range in which a characteristic display is performed in the production".

In addition, the "range in which a characteristic production is performed in the production" is a characteristic video part (for example, a suggestive production) that cannot be seen in other productions (suggestion production, etc.) regardless of the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state. , A moving image part in which a character that cannot be seen in other productions appears).

It should be noted that the customer waiting effect does not necessarily have to be a partial moving image cut out from the target effect or a moving image obtained by connecting the cut out moving images in a predetermined order. For example, the entire range of moving images in the target production, or the moving images in which the entire range of moving images are connected in a predetermined order may be used as the customer waiting production, and a part of the target production may be cut out. A moving image in which the moving image and the moving image of the entire range in the target effect are mixed may be configured as a customer waiting effect.

The customer waiting effect does not necessarily have to be composed of a partial moving image cut out from the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display or a full range of moving images in the effect as described above. For example, from one or more frame images among the frame images constituting the respective moving image data corresponding to each target effect, targeting a part or all of the plurality of types of effects prepared in advance. An image of one or a plurality of areas may be cut out, and an image or a moving image including each of the one or a plurality of images cut out from each effect may be configured as a customer waiting effect.

Specifically, for example, as the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display, a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state similar to the first suggestion effect in the fifth embodiment described above. When multiple types of suggestion effects appearing in are prepared, some or all (that is, at least one) suggestion effects of the plurality of types of suggestion effects are targeted, and each target suggestion effect is supported. Of the frame images constituting each moving image data, an image of one or a plurality of areas is cut out from one or a plurality of frame images, and an image or a moving image including each of the one or a plurality of images cut out from each production is waited for by the customer. It may be configured as a production.

In this case, for example, an image or a moving image in which all the images (cutout images) appear at once on a predetermined background image, or all the cutout images are displayed a plurality of times. Images or videos that are divided and appear in sequence are configured as a customer waiting effect.

The frame image from which the image is cut out may be any of the frame images constituting the target effect. For example, when the target effect is the same suggestion effect as the first suggestion effect of the fifth embodiment described above, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state among the frame images constituting the suggestion effect is set. An image of a predetermined area may be cut out from a frame image including a suggestion character.

Alternatively, if the target effect is an effect that prompts an operation on the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during the variable display, among the frame images constituting the effect. , A configuration in which an image of a predetermined area is cut out from a frame image corresponding to an image including characteristic contents in the effect (for example, a predetermined image including a manual air pump in an effect of injecting air into a balloon with a manual air pump). It may be.

Alternatively, in the target production (suggestion production, etc.), an image containing characteristic contents that cannot be seen in other productions regardless of the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state (for example, viewing in other productions). An image of a predetermined area may be cut out from a frame image corresponding to (such as an image in which a character that cannot be used) appears.

Further, the cropped area of the image in the frame image may be any area in the target frame image. For example, when the target frame image is a frame image including a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, the configuration may be such that a region including a part of the character is cut out.

The customer waiting effect includes an image or a moving image including one or a plurality of images cut out from each effect, a moving image of the entire range in the target effect as described above, or a partial moving image cut out from the effect. It may be a combination of.

When it is determined that the time when the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, the sub-control board 940 is in a state of waiting for the player to execute the game, and the variation display is not performed. Assuming that the player is in the gaming state (waiting), the display of the customer waiting effect of the above-described embodiment is started.

Specifically, the sub-control board 940 is determined that the firing handle 252 is not operated based on the command received from the main control board 920, and the decorative symbol display device 479 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner or produces a jackpot effect. The pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player when the period during which the non-execution state continues is timed by a timer or counter provided in the sub-control board 940 and the period exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It is determined that the predetermined time has passed.

It should be noted that the customer waiting effect does not necessarily have to be one type, and the combination of the effects to appear in the customer waiting effect (the effect used for cutting out a moving image or an image) can be changed, or the same effect can be displayed in the customer waiting effect. A plurality of customer waiting effects may be prepared by changing the position of the cut-out moving image or image to be output, changing the appearance order of the cut-out moving image or image, or the like.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a predetermined pushing operation with respect to a pressing operation device such as a pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or a pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during a non-gaming state (standby). The mode selected under the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs during the game (that is, the period during which the game is not in the non-gaming state). The variation display (variation effect) according to (contents of variation display, variation pattern) is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. Specifically, in the non-gaming state, predetermined information (for example, "when viewing a sample of the variable display" is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, which prompts the player to start the variable display for demonstration. , Press the button! ”) Is displayed, and in this situation, the variable display starts when the push operation is executed.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment having such a configuration includes a demo pseudo-winning random number counter, a demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, a demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and a first demo pseudo variation type counter to the first. The sub-control board 940 is provided with the pseudo-variation type counter for demonstration of No. 4.

These counters included in the sub-control board 940 (pseudo winning random number counter for demo, pseudo jackpot symbol random counter for demo, pseudo stop pattern selection counter for demo, and pseudo variable type counter for first demo to pseudo for fourth demo). The variable type counter) functions in the same manner as the winning random number counter, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the first variable type counter to the fourth variable type counter related to the special symbol provided in the main control board 920, respectively. It is a counter to do.

The counter included in the sub-control board 940 will be specifically described. While the winning random number counter for the special symbol provided in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for performing the special symbol lottery, the demo pseudo-winning random number counter (a part of the area of RAM in the sub control board 940) is used. , It functions as a counter for performing a winning / failing lottery for a pseudo demonstration corresponding to the special symbol lottery. The demo pseudo-winning random number counter generates a demo pseudo-winning random number (hereinafter, also referred to as “demo pseudo-winning random number”) corresponding to the winning random number related to the special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demo pseudo-winning random number counter has the same winning probability as the jackpot winning probability by the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, and is a pseudo jackpot for demonstration (hereinafter, "pseudo jackpot for demonstration"). (Also called) can be selected (lottery possible). Therefore, the demo pseudo-winning random number counter is configured to be the same as the winning random number counter related to the special symbol included in the main control board 920, for example.

While the jackpot symbol random number counter provided in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for selecting the jackpot symbol, the demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter (a part of the area of the RAM in the sub control board 940) is concerned. It functions as a counter for selecting a pseudo jackpot symbol for demonstration (hereinafter, also referred to as "pseudo jackpot symbol for demo") corresponding to the jackpot symbol. The demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter generates a demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as “demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number”) corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number.

The demo pseudo jackpot symbols are prepared for each type of jackpot symbol, and the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter is configured so that any type of demo pseudo jackpot symbol can be selected. ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter is a type corresponding to each type of the demo pseudo jackpot symbol and can be selected by the jackpot symbol random number counter. It is configured so that it can be selected with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type. Therefore, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter is configured to be the same as the jackpot symbol random number counter included in the main control board 920, for example.

While the stop pattern selection counter included in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for selecting a stop pattern, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter (a part of the area of the RAM in the sub control board 940) is concerned. It functions as a counter for selecting (selecting) a pseudo stop pattern for demonstration (hereinafter, also referred to as "pseudo stop pattern for demonstration") corresponding to the stop pattern. The demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter generates a demo pseudo stop pattern random number (hereinafter, also referred to as “demo pseudo stop pattern random number”) corresponding to the stop pattern random number.

The demo pseudo stop pattern is prepared for each type of stop pattern, and the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter is configured so that any type of demo pseudo stop pattern can be selected. ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter is a type corresponding to each type of the demo pseudo stop pattern and can be selected by the stop pattern selection counter. It is configured so that it can be selected with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type. Therefore, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter is configured to be the same as the stop pattern selection counter included in the main control board 920, for example.

The first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter provided in the main control board 920 select the variation time, variation pattern, etc. of the variation display of the decorative symbol performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 when the special symbol starts and wins. While the counter functions as a counter for determining), the first demo pseudo-variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter (both are a part of the area of the RAM in the sub-control board 940) are used. A counter for selecting the fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern of the pseudo decorative symbol variation display performed for demonstration by the decorative symbol display device 479 when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state. Functions as. Each of the various demo pseudo-variation type counters generates pseudo-variation pattern random numbers for various demos corresponding to the various variation pattern random numbers.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, various types of pseudo-variation type counters for demonstrations are used to set each type of the variation display of the pseudo-decorative pattern performed for demonstration, such as the variation time and the variation pattern, to the respective types. It is configured so that it can be selected with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type such as fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern that can be selected by various fluctuation type counters. Therefore, the first demo pseudo-variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter are configured to be the same as, for example, the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter included in the main control board 920, respectively. Will be done.

The demo pseudo-winning random number counter, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and the first demo pseudo-variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter are all , Each counter of the main control board 920 corresponding to each of these counters (that is, a winning random number counter related to a special symbol, a jackpot symbol random number counter, a stop pattern selection counter, and a first variation type counter to a fourth variation type counter. It suffices to be configured to be the same as various winning probabilities or selection probabilities in the counters), and does not necessarily have to be the same as each counter of the main control board 920 corresponding to each of these counters.

The demo pseudo-winning random number counter, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and the first demo pseudo-variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter provided in the sub-control board 940. Is updated in the same manner as the update of the winning random number counter, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter related to the special symbol provided in the main control board 920, respectively. To.

That is, the sub-control board 940 has a demo pseudo-winning random number counter, a demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, and a demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and the main control board 920 has a special symbol in timer interrupt processing (main control interrupt processing). The process of updating the winning random number counter, the jackpot symbol random number counter, and the stop pattern selection counter according to the above (that is, the random number update process S1203 (see FIG. 12)) is updated at the same interval as the execution interval.

Further, the sub-control board 940 uses the first demo pseudo-variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter, and the main control board 920 performs the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter in the main processing. (That is, the fluctuation counter update processing S1022 (see FIG. 11) is executed at the same interval as the execution interval, and the main control board 920 performs the first fluctuation in the timer interrupt processing (main control interrupt processing). The type counter to the fourth variation type counter are updated at intervals similar to the interval at which the process of updating (that is, the variation counter update process S1205 (see FIG. 12)) is executed.

Specifically, the sub-control board 940 has each of these counters (that is, a demo pseudo-winning random number counter, a demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, a demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and a first demo pseudo variation. If the value of each counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576") of each counter at each update timing of the type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter, the current value is used. Change to a value larger by "1". On the other hand, when the value of each counter is the specified maximum value of each counter, the value is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”) of each counter.

The above-mentioned pseudo-winning random number counter for demo, pseudo-big hit symbol random counter for demo, pseudo-stop pattern selection counter for demo, and various pseudo-variation type counters for demo (first pseudo-variation type counter to fourth demo). The demo pseudo-variation type counter) does not necessarily have the above configuration, and at least a part of the counter may have another configuration.

For example, in the above configuration, the demo pseudo-winning random number counter, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and various demo pseudo variation type counters are updated from a certain initial value. However, the initial value (circular initial value) may be set each time by using the initial value counter, or it may be configured by a random number generation IC without using a program and the value may be referred to as necessary. May be.

Specifically, for example, the sub-control board 940 includes two types of random number initial value counters that function in the same manner as the winning random number initial value counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol included in the main control board 920. Then, using each of these random number initial value counters, the setting of the circular initial value of the demo pseudo-winning random number counter and the demo pseudo-big hit symbol random number counter is set, and the winning random number initial value counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol are set. The configuration may be performed in the same manner as in the case of setting the circulation initial value of the winning random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number counter related to the special symbol.

When the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pushed in during the non-gaming state, the sub control board 940 has a winning random number, a jackpot symbol random number, related to the special symbol when the main control board 920 starts and wins a special symbol. And the pseudo-winning random number for demo, the pseudo-big hit symbol random number for demo, and the pseudo-big hit symbol random number for demo from the pseudo-winning random number counter for demo, the pseudo-big hit symbol random number counter for demo, and the pseudo-stop pattern selection counter for demo, as in the case of acquiring the stop pattern random number. And the pseudo stop pattern random number for demonstration is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the sub-control board 940.

Based on the acquired pseudo-winning random numbers for demonstration, the sub-control board 940 performs a lottery (pseudo-win / fail lottery) in the same manner as when the main control board 920 performs a special symbol lottery to perform a pseudo-win / fail determination.

When the demo pseudo jackpot is won in the pseudo win / loss lottery, the sub control board 940 is based on the acquired demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number, and the main control board 920 is based on the jackpot symbol random number. Similar to the case of determining the type, the type of the pseudo stop symbol for the demo (pseudo jackpot symbol for the demo) corresponding to the winning of the pseudo jackpot for the demo is determined. The types of pseudo jackpot symbols for demonstration in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment correspond to the types of jackpot symbols determined based on the jackpot symbol random numbers.

On the other hand, when the sub-control board 940 does not win the demo pseudo jackpot in the pseudo win / loss lottery, the sub control board 940 has a pseudo stop symbol for demonstration (for demo) different from the pseudo jackpot symbol for demo. Pseudo-missing symbol) is set as the stop symbol.

After the pseudo winning / failing lottery, the sub-control board 940 is performed for demonstration based on the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery, the value of the pseudo-stop pattern random number for demonstration, and the value of various pseudo-variation type counters for demonstration. The variation time of the pseudo-decorative symbol variation display is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the variation display is selected.

The sub-control board 940 is configured to randomly determine the virtual number of holds and the virtual game state corresponding to the number of hold of the unit game related to the special symbol, and the lottery result and demo of the pseudo winning / fail lottery. Pseudo-stop pattern Pseudo-decorative pattern performed for demonstration using the value of random numbers and the values of various pseudo-variation type counters for demonstration, as well as the determined virtual hold count and virtual game state. The variation time of the variation display of the above and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the variation display may be determined.

The sub-control board 940 determines the variation time of the variation display of the pseudo decorative symbol performed for demonstration and the variation pattern of the decoration symbol in the variation display, and then decorates the variation display of the pseudo decorative symbol. It starts in the symbol display device 479. As a result, the display of the decorative symbol display device 479 is switched from the customer waiting effect to the variable display of the decorative symbol.

After the sub-control board 940 starts the variation display of the pseudo decorative symbol for demonstration, the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the variation display at the variation time determined for the variation display. Continue according to the determined variation pattern. The sub-control board 940 confirms and displays the symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol determined based on the pseudo jackpot symbol random number for demonstration as the variation time determined for the variation display elapses.

When the determined variation pattern is a specific reach display (for example, super reach) by a decorative symbol, the sub-control board 940 selects an effect pattern of a suggestion effect. As a result, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the suggestive effect of the selected effect pattern is displayed after the reach display.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is similar to various counters used for determining the content of the variable display performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the start winning of the special symbol. It is equipped with a pseudo demo counter (pseudo winning random number counter for demo, pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter for demo, pseudo stop pattern selection counter for demo, and various pseudo variable type counters for demo). When a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pushed in during the game state, the same selection conditions (that is, each) as when the special symbol is started and won are used by using these pseudo demo counters. The variation pattern and the effect pattern in the suggestion effect are selected with the same winning probability or selection probability by the counters and the same method of acquiring random numbers from each counter).

As a result, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player pushes the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, which is the same as the case where the start prize of the special symbol is generated. The variation display (variation effect) according to the mode selected by the selection condition is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, and the variation display can be visually recognized.

When the display of the decorative symbol display device 479 is switched from the customer waiting effect to the variable display due to a predetermined pressing operation on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, the variable display is displayed. If neither the pressing operation device nor the firing handle 252 is operated even after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the above, the display of the decorative symbol display device 479 is switched to the customer waiting effect.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the so-called "customer waiting effect" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the non-gaming state is used for various effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display. It is composed of a moving image or an image obtained by diverting the moving image data prepared in advance.

As a result, in the customer waiting effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the non-gaming state, the video or image included in the customer waiting effect is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display. The content of the effect portion corresponding to the moving image or the image can be recognized or guessed by the player who visually recognizes the customer waiting effect. For example, the player can be made to recognize the content of the production portion corresponding to the video based on the video cut out from the production, and the production corresponding to the video is based on the image cut out from the frame image constituting the production. The content of the part can be guessed by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100.

Further, since the video data prepared in advance for various effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display is diverted for the customer waiting effect, the video data dedicated for the customer waiting effect is used. It is not necessary to prepare the data, and the amount of memory can be suppressed accordingly. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare dedicated video data for the customer waiting production, the development cost can be suppressed accordingly.

In addition, when dedicated video data is prepared for the customer waiting effect, it may be necessary to lower the resolution of the customer waiting effect due to the limitation of the storage capacity of the storage unit, but the effect displayed during the variable display. Since it is configured to divert the moving image data for the purpose, it is possible to display the customer waiting effect with the same high resolution as the effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, a special symbol (first special symbol, first special symbol, first 2 The variation display (variation effect) according to the mode selected under the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, so that it appears based on the start prize of the special symbol. In the non-gaming state, the variable display to be displayed can be made to appear with the same appearance probability at the time of the start winning.

As a result, the player can determine what kind of fluctuation display appears at what frequency (probability) in the actual game (that is, during the game) during the non-game state, and the special game state. You can experience the contents of the variable display according to the high degree of expectation for the transition to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the playability brought about by the variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, which can improve the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100.

It should be noted that, in the period from when the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the non-gaming state until the variation display (variation effect) ends, after the sub-control board 940 receives a start prize of a special symbol. It may be configured to stop (do not execute) a part of the functions executed during the period when the variation display based on the start winning prize ends.

For example, when the pressing operation device is operated during the non-gaming state, the sub-control board 940 has a function of being executed during the period after the start winning of the special symbol is generated and the variation display based on the starting winning is finished. Of these, at least among the variable display of the decorative symbol, the definite display of the stop symbol (for example, the jackpot symbol) by the decorative symbol, and the operation of the predetermined electric accessory that operates during the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol. It may be configured to stop the function of 1, and thereby, at least a part of the effects may be non-executed.

Further, when an input operation is enabled for the input operation device 260 (see FIG. 1 or 23) during the variable display, and a button effect is executed in which the effect accompanying the execution of the variable display changes depending on the presence or absence of the input operation. In addition, the button effect associated with the input operation may be non-executed. For example, when a display prompting an input operation such as "press a button" is displayed during the variable display, by disabling the input operation to the input operation device 260, the start of the special symbol is started after the winning prize is generated. It may be configured to stop a part of the functions executed during the period when the variable display based on the winning is finished.

When the final display of the stop symbol by the decorative symbol is stopped (that is, the final display of the stop symbol is not executed), the sub-control board 940 is a substitute for the jackpot symbol suggesting that a jackpot has occurred. Decorate the display (for example, a character string such as "Atari?" Or "Lucky" that can recall the occurrence of a big hit, or a pattern or image (for example, a character in a guts pose) that can recall the occurrence of a jackpot). It may be configured to be displayed on the symbol display device 479, and a display instead of the lost symbol suggesting that the loss has occurred (for example, a character string such as "sorry" that can recall the occurrence of the loss, or the occurrence of the loss is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured to display a display using a reminiscent pattern or image (for example, a drooping character).

In this way, by non-execution of some of the effects, the period from the pressing operation device being performed during the non-game state to the end of the variation display, and the start of the special symbol after the start prize is generated. There is a difference in appearance from the period in which the variation display based on the winning is finished in that some of the functions executed in the latter period are not executed in the former period. As a result, the variation display (variation effect) displayed when the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the non-game state is displayed based on the start winning of the special symbol. Unlike this, it is possible to make the player preferably recognize that the variable display is a pseudo variable display in which a special gaming state is unlikely to occur after the end of the variable display.

That is, when the player operates the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like, for example, changes the display (variation) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the operation. It is possible to suppress misidentification of an event that is impossible after the pseudo fluctuation display, such as a special gaming state occurring after the fluctuation display. As a result, the player or the clerk of the game hall operates the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, so that the recognition after the fluctuation display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is erroneous, and thereby it should not occur. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of situations that are unfavorable to the player or the clerk of the game hall, such as expectations for the occurrence of a special gaming state.

Further, as a variable display (variable effect) that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a special symbol start winning is generated, a pushing operation device (for example, pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23)) is used during a predetermined operable period. )) In a configuration provided with a variation display (hereinafter, the variation display is also referred to as "variation display configured to enable operation input") in which a predetermined suggestive effect can be displayed by performing a push operation. When the variation display (variation display configured to enable operation input) is displayed in the non-gaming state by the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261, it is controlled by the sub-control board 940 during the operable period in the variation display. , Automatically (ie, without the player's operation) as if the pressing operation device 1261 was pushed by the player (ie, to have the same variation display appearance as when the pushing operation was performed). It may be configured to be used.

Specifically, when the variation display configured to enable operation input is displayed in the non-gaming state (standby), the motor 863 by the sub-control board 940 during the operable period in the variation display (see FIG. 20). The operating mechanism 860 is operated by the control of the above, whereby the pressing operation device 1261 automatically moves from the neutral position to the downward direction (operating direction) of the pressing operation device 1261, and then moves downward. It may be configured to move upward and return to the neutral position. As a result, when a variation display configured to enable operation input by the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 in the non-gaming state is displayed, the player operates the pressing operation device during the operable period in the variation display. Such a situation can be simulated without the player actually operating the push-in operation device.

In such a configuration, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to automatically move the pressing operation device 1261 up and down and then display a predetermined suggestion effect that can be displayed by the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261. As a result, when the variable display configured so that the operation can be input by the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 in the non-gaming state is displayed, the player operates the pushing operation device during the operable period in the variable display. Then, you can experience what kind of suggestive effect will appear in a simulated manner without actually operating the push-in operation device.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a variable display configured to allow operation input is provided as a variable display that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a special symbol start winning is generated, the player is in a non-gaming state. Since the variable display (variable display configured to enable operation input) can be simulated, the variable display enables a predetermined suggestion effect to appear with the participation of the player such as the operation of the push-in operation device. Since it is possible to increase the player's interest in the playability that is brought about, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100.

Further, the predetermined suggestion effect that can be displayed by the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is executed based on the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 only when the start winning of the special symbol actually occurs. Can be done. For this reason, it is possible to add the playability in which the suggestion effect appears in response to the pushing operation that cannot be obtained in the simulated experience to the actual game executed based on the launch of the game ball, and the non-game state. It is possible to urge the player who visually recognizes the variable display inside to start the game.

In addition, when the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device during the display of the variation display based on the pushing operation on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 1261 in the non-gaming state, the sub The control board 940 may be configured to terminate the non-gaming state. In such a case, the sub-control board 940 displays the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 after the end of the non-gaming state, for example, the contents displayed before the non-game state starts (for example, the final display by the decorative symbol 1621). ) Is displayed again.

Since the variation display displayed during the non-game state also ends when the non-game state ends, the player displays the variation display displayed by pushing the pressing operation device during the non-game state. Can be easily terminated by pushing the pressing operation device during the fluctuation display.

As a result, for example, the player operates the pressing operation device when he / she sees a part of the variation display that he / she wants to see while displaying the variation display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state. By doing so, the variable display being displayed can be forcibly terminated, so that it is possible to start the game as soon as possible without having to wait until the display of the part that is not necessary for itself is completed.

<9th embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 25. The pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment described above, and more specifically, the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during the non-gaming state (standby). This is the same as when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started and won during a game when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23). An example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the non-gaming state is shown in the configuration in which the variable display according to the mode selected by the selection condition is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to eighth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the ninth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to eighth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the eighth embodiments.

FIG. 25A is a screen transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when the start prize of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs. 25 (B) shows a screen in a variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-gaming state. It is a screen transition diagram which shows an example of transition.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A), when a start prize of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs, it corresponds to the right of the unit game related to the special symbol generated based on the start prize. The hold display 1622 indicating the hold of the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the start of the unit game related to the special symbol based on the start prize (that is, before the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the start prize). Will be done. As shown in FIG. 25A, for example, the hold display 1622 is stopped and displayed on the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 479, specifically, before the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the start prize of the special symbol. It is displayed on the lower side of the decorative pattern 1621. The display control of the hold display 1622 is executed by the sub-control board 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, between the time when the starting condition is satisfied and the start of the variable display (unit game), after the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed. It has a function of suggesting the degree of possibility (expectation) of transition to the special gaming state to the player, and as an example of the function, a case where the hold display 1622 is used will be described as an example.

The hold display 1622 indicates the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for the shape according to the shape. For example, when the shape of the hold display 1622 is a star shape as shown in FIG. 25 (A), the degree of expectation for the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the hold display (A). It indicates that the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state based on the start winning prize) is a predetermined value (for example, about 70%) set for the star shape.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of hold display 1622 having different shapes are prepared so as to be displayable, and the expectation degree (expectation degree for transition to the special gaming state) that differs depending on the shape difference of the hold display 1622 is set. It is configured as shown.

For example, when the hold display 1622 has a star shape, it shows the highest expectation (for example, about 70%) among all the shapes of the hold display 1622 that can be displayed, and when the hold display 1622 has a regular triangle shape. Shows a lower expectation (for example, approximately 50%) than when the hold display 1622 is star-shaped, and when the hold display 1622 is inverted triangular, it is higher than when the hold display 1622 is regular triangle. When the hold display 1622 shows a low degree of expectation (for example, about 30%) and the hold display 1622 has a circular shape (round shape), the degree of expectation is lower than when the hold display 1622 has an inverted triangular shape (for example, about 10%). It may be configured to indicate. The player can relatively recognize the high degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state based on the difference in the shape of the hold display 1622.

It should be noted that the suggestion of the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state by the hold display 1622 does not necessarily have to be made by the shape of the hold display 1622, and instead of the shape of the hold display 1622 or in addition to the shape of the hold display 1622. , The configuration may use elements other than the shape such as the color of the hold display 1622 and the display mode (for example, blinking) of the hold display 1622.

The degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for each shape of the hold display 1622 is a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, 1st special symbol lottery) performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the hold display. Based on the winning probability in the second special symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table referred to when winning in the special symbol lottery, and the selection probability in the selection table referenced when not winning in the special symbol lottery. It is determined.

It should be noted that the configuration may include a hold display 1622 having a shape indicating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, and a hold display 1622 having a shape not showing the degree of expectation (irrelevant to the degree of expectation). In such a case, the sub-control board 940 selects whether or not to suggest the expected degree by the hold display 1622 by a predetermined lottery, and if it is selected not to suggest the expected degree, the expected degree is selected. When it is selected to display the hold display 1622 of a shape not shown (for example, a star shape or a regular triangle shape) and suggest the degree of expectation, a shape according to the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state (for example, a shape according to the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state). For example, it may be configured to display the hold display 1622 (circular shape).

Further, as a type of the hold display 1622, it may have a function of changing the shape from the hold display 1622 having a shape with a low expectation to the hold display having a shape with a high expectation.

In FIG. 25 (A), when the number of hold of the unit game related to the special symbol is zero, the start prize of the special symbol is generated, and thereby, the hold display 1622 of 1 is displayed based on the occurrence of the start prize. The case where it was done is illustrated. The hold display 1622 is displayed one by one for each right of the unit game related to the special symbol.

If a new start prize for a special symbol is generated when the number of hold of the unit game related to the special symbol is 1 or more, the shape of the hold display 1622 corresponding to the new start prize is set to the expected degree. The shape may be displayed according to the shape. For example, the shape of the hold display 1622 corresponding to the new start prize is temporarily displayed (for example, a predetermined period such as 30 seconds, or then a start prize of a special symbol is generated. It may be configured to be displayed in a shape according to the degree of expectation during the period until the game is played, the period until one right of the unit game related to the pending special symbol is exhausted, and the like).

When the variable display of the special symbol based on the start prize of the special symbol is started, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the hold display 1622 corresponding to the start prize disappears and becomes invisible, and the decorative symbol 1621 becomes invisible. The variable display is started. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), the suggestion display 1623 has a predetermined probability (for example, 30% or 60) in the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621 (variable display of the special symbol). It may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 with a probability smaller than 100 such as% or 100%).

Similar to the hold display 1622, the suggestion display 1623 functions as a display indicating the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state (the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state) after the end of the unit game related to the special symbol. That is, the suggestion display 1623 functions as a display suggesting the degree of possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state after the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621 being executed. The display control of the suggestion display 1623 is executed by the sub-control board 940.

In the example shown in FIG. 25 (A), the suggestion display 1623 is configured in a balloon shape including a comment such as "super heat!". The suggestion display 1623 of the balloon shape is expected to transition to the special gaming state after the variable display during execution (reliability) depending on the content of the comment in the balloon (for example, "super heat!" Or "chance!"). ) Is shown. For example, when the content of the comment included in the balloon constituting the suggestion display 1623 is "super heat!" As shown in FIG. 25 (A), the expectation degree of transition to the special gaming state after the variable display during execution is It indicates that it is a predetermined value (for example, about 80%) set for the content of the comment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of suggestion displays 1623 having different comment contents are prepared so as to be displayable, and the expected degree (expectation for transition to the special gaming state) differs depending on the difference in the comment contents in the suggestion display 1623. Degree). The player can relatively recognize the high degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state based on the difference in the content of the comment in the suggestion display 1623.

The degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for the content of the comment in the suggestion display 1623 is a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the suggestion display. , 2nd special symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table that is referred to when winning in the special symbol lottery, and the selection probability in the selection table that is referred to when not winning in the special symbol lottery. Determined by.

The high degree of expectation (the magnitude of the degree of expectation) for transitioning to the special gaming state indicated by the suggestion display 1623 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the suggestion display 1623. The hold display 1622 (that is, the hold display 1622 based on the start prize of the same special symbol as the suggestion display 1623) may be the same as or different from the high degree of expectation for transitioning to the special gaming state. Good.

If the magnitude of the expectation (expectation to transition to the special gaming state) indicated by the suggestion display 1623 is different from the high expectation indicated by the hold display 1622 corresponding to the suggestion display 1623, the former The value may be larger than the latter, or the former may be smaller than the latter.

The suggestion display 1623 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621 (during the variable display of the special symbol) does not necessarily have to have a balloon shape as shown in FIG. 25 (A). , A character or the like showing the degree of expectation of transitioning to a different special gaming state depending on the type, a combination of the character and the balloon described above, or the like, or a display by a still image. It may be a moving image in which the movement of the character and the characters of the balloon are gradually displayed.

When a reach display occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621, a predetermined probability (for example, 100 such as 30% or 60%) is obtained after the display of the reach display, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment described above. With a smaller probability or 100%), a suggestion effect in which a predetermined character appears is executed. The display control of the suggestion effect is executed by the sub-control board 940. The suggestive effect in which a predetermined character appears may be an effect that is executed (displayed) only in a specific reach display such as so-called super reach, or may be displayed before the reach display. Often, it may be displayed after the start winning prize and before the unit game is started.

As for the suggestion effect after the reach display, a plurality of types of effect patterns are prepared according to the degree of expectation (reliability) for the transition to the special gaming state, as in the case of the first suggestion effect of the fifth embodiment. The degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for each effect pattern is the special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery, 2nd special) performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the reach display. It is determined by the winning probability in the symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table referred to when the special symbol lottery is won, and the selection probability in the selection table referred to when the special symbol lottery is not won.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each effect pattern in the suggestion effect after the reach display is configured to be different according to the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for the effect pattern. Examples of the pattern include a plurality of types of characters having different types of characters, clothes, belongings, movements, and the like.

For example, when the character CA11 holding a sword in the right hand appears in the suggestion effect after the reach display, the expectation level for transitioning to the special gaming state after that is a predetermined value set for the character CA11 (for example). , Approximately 90%). The player can relatively recognize the high degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state based on the type of the character appearing in the suggestion effect.

When the suggestion effect is executed after the reach display in the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621, it corresponds to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the reach display after the end of the suggestion effect. The final display of the decorative symbol 1621 to be displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the reach display is a big hit, the decorative symbol 1621 is set to "777" as shown in FIG. 25 (A). Confirmed display.

When a special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) starts winning a prize during the game, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1621 corresponding to the variation pattern selected based on the values of various variation type counters is displayed. The fluctuation display time (variation time) corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is displayed from the beginning to the end (confirmed display). That is, when the start prize of the special symbol occurs during the game, the period (time) from the start to the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol 1621 corresponds to the variation pattern of the variation display (that is, the selected variation pattern). It is said to be the fluctuation time.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-gaming state (standby), the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment is performed. Similar to the above, the variation display selected under the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol occurs during the game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as a pseudo variation display for demonstration.

It should be noted that the selection condition of the variation display when the pressing operation for the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the non-game state, and the selection condition of the variation display when the start prize of the special symbol occurs during the game. Does not necessarily have to be the same or substantially the same, and the selection condition of the variable display differs depending on whether the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state or when the start prize of the special symbol occurs during the game. It may have a different configuration.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, the variation pattern selected under the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol occurs during the game. In the variable display (pseudo variable display for demonstration) of the decorative symbol 1621 corresponding to, the period (time) from the start (first) to the end (the final confirmation display which is the last of the variable display) is the variable display. The period (time) is shorter than the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of (that is, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern).

For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, after the hold display 1622 is displayed, a pseudo variable display for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621 is displayed. In the period from the start of the variation display to the appearance of the suggestion effect after the reach display, the variation display is displayed in the variation display based on the start prize of the special symbol (that is, the start of the special symbol). Pseudo variable display for demonstration by displaying at a higher speed (that is, increasing the playback speed of the video) compared to the period from the start of the variable display based on the prize to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the reach display). The time from the start to the end in is shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display.

In addition, the time from the start of the variation display based on the pressing operation to the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state (that is, the pseudo variation display for demonstration) to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the reach display is set as the special symbol. As a specific example in which the variable display based on the start winning prize is set to a shorter time than the corresponding period, for example, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, the variable display based on the pressing operation (that is, , Pseudo variable display for demonstration) The content displayed during the period from the start of the suggestion effect after the reach display to the appearance of the suggestion effect after the reach display is displayed from the start of the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol to the reach display. The configuration may be such that the display is performed at a higher speed than the variable display during the period until the suggestion effect appears (that is, the playback speed of the moving image is increased as compared with the case where the start prize of the special symbol occurs).

Alternatively, for example, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during a non-gaming state, among the variation displays based on the pressing operation, a suggestion effect after the reach display is performed from the start of the variation display. The display of the content to be displayed before the appearance may be omitted (that is, the suggestion effect after the reach display is displayed after the start of the variable display) may be used.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the case of displaying the suggestion effect after the reach display in the pseudo variation display for demonstration (that is, the variation display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state). In addition, two or more suggestion effects (that is, variable displays based on the starting prizes) in which the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state differs depending on the display contents, the variable displays that are separately executed by the two starting prizes. (2 or more suggestive effects) that can be displayed by are simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. The control of the display is executed by the sub-control board 940.

For example, when a plurality of types of characters having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state are prepared as characters that can appear during the suggestion effect, at least some of the characters of the plurality of types are each. Two or more suggestive effects that appear are configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 at the same time.

Specifically, for example, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected by pushing the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, the suggestion after the reach display in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern. When four types of characters CA11 to CA14 having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state are prepared as characters that can appear in the production, these four types of characters are shown in FIG. 25 (B). Suggestion effects including CA11 to CA14 are displayed in each of the display areas 479D to 479G in which the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 is divided into substantially four in the vertical and horizontal directions.

As a result, the two or more suggestion effects in which the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state differs depending on the type of the appearing character constitutes the variable display like the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol. The image (frame image) to be displayed is displayed in each display area 479D to 479G at the same time in a size reduced to a smaller size than the case where the image to be displayed (frame image) is displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 479.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned four types of characters are not necessarily the suggestion effects (suggestion effects after reach) that can appear in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern and have different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state. It is not necessary that there are four types corresponding to, and there may be three or less types, or five or more types.

In addition, the number of suggestion effects (suggestion effects after reach) that can appear in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern and have different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state is reached in the decorative symbol display device 479. If the number of display areas divided to display each of the subsequent suggestion effects is larger than the number of display areas (for example, four in the example shown in FIG. 25 (B)), the division of the suggestive effects that can appear is the division. As many as possible to be displayed in the displayed display area may be selected and displayed.

Further, the number of display areas divided in order to display each suggestion effect after reach in the decorative symbol display device 479 does not necessarily have to be four as described above, but may be three or less, or five or more. You may. Further, the number of display areas divided in order to display each suggestion effect after reach in the decorative symbol display device 479 is present according to the selected variation pattern (that is, in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern). It may be a variable configuration (depending on the number of suggested effects after reach that can be produced).

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, FIG. 25 (B) shows before the start of the pseudo fluctuation display for demonstration. As shown, the hold display 1622 is displayed as a pseudo hold display corresponding to the pseudo variation display. More specifically, the hold display 1622, which is at least a part of the hold display 1622 having a plurality of shapes different depending on the high degree of expectation (magnitude of the degree of expectation) for the transition to the special gaming state, and has two or more shapes. (Two or more types of hold display 1622) are configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 at the same time. The control of the display is executed by the sub-control board 940.

For example, four types of shapes (for example, star shape, regular triangle shape, inverted triangle shape, and circular shape) are prepared as the shape of the hold display 1622 according to the high degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state. If so, as shown in FIG. 25B, each of these four types of hold display 1622 divides the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 before the start of the pseudo variable display for demonstration. It is displayed simultaneously in the areas 479D to 479G.

As a result, the display images including the two or more types of hold display 1622 having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state according to the shape are displayed in the variable manner as in the variable display based on the start prize of another symbol. The image (frame image) constituting the above is displayed in each display area 479D to 479G at the same time in a size reduced to a smaller size than the case where the image (frame image) constituting the above is displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 479.

The number of hold displays 1622 having different shapes is the number of display areas divided for displaying the hold displays 1622 of each shape in the decorative symbol display device 479 (for example, four in the example shown in FIG. 25 (B)). ), As many as the number of hold displays 1622 having different shapes that can be displayed in the divided display area may be selected and displayed.

Further, the number of display areas to be divided in order to display the hold display 1622 having a different shape in the decorative symbol display device 479 does not necessarily have to be four as described above, but may be three or less, or five or more. You may. Further, the number of display areas divided to display the hold display 1622 having a different shape in the decorative symbol display device 479 and the number of display areas divided to display each character that can appear in the suggestion effect are determined. It does not necessarily have to be the same, and the former number and the latter number may have different configurations.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), a variation display (demo) based on the pushing operation is performed. Pseudo-confirmed display for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621 displayed after the end of the pseudo-variable display for demo (more specifically, the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol determined based on the pseudo jackpot symbol random number for demonstration). The definite display of the decorative symbol 1621 consisting of the combination of the above) is smaller than the definite display by the decorative symbol 1621 (see FIG. 25A) displayed after the end of the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479. Is displayed. The display control of the size of the definite display is executed by the sub-control board 940.

Further, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), in addition to the pseudo-confirmed display for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621, the non-gaming state is in progress. A display 1624 containing information reminiscent of is displayed. The display control of the display 1624 is executed by the sub-control board 940.

The player who visually recognizes the display 1624 can confirm the display by the decorative symbol 1621 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the content of the display 1624 (that is, information reminiscent of being in a non-gaming state). , It can be recognized that it is not a confirmation display displayed after the end of the fluctuation display based on the start prize of the special symbol, but a pseudo confirmation display for demonstration.

In the example shown in FIG. 25 (B), the display 1624 is configured to include the character string "demo" as information reminiscent of being in a non-gaming state, but is in a non-gaming state. As long as it is a character string that can be recalled, it may be a character string different from "during demonstration". Further, the information included in the display 1624 that can be recalled to be in a non-gaming state does not necessarily have to be a character string such as "demo" described above, and it is possible to recall that the information is in a non-gaming state. It may be a simple pattern or a pattern (for example, a pattern such as a cross mark).

In addition, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, after the variation display (pseudo variation display for demonstration) based on the pressing operation is completed, the pseudo variation display for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621 is completed. Instead of the definite display, a pseudo definite display for demonstration by the alternative display 1625, which does not include the decorative symbol 1621 as shown in FIG. 25 (B), may be performed. The display control of the alternative display 1625 is executed by the sub-control board 940.

The alternative display 1625 is configured to include a display that substitutes for the jackpot symbol that suggests that a jackpot has occurred, and a display that substitutes for the lost symbol that suggests that a jackpot has occurred.

As an alternative display 1625 that substitutes for the jackpot symbol that suggests that a jackpot has occurred, for example, a character string such as "Atari?" Or "lucky" that can recall the occurrence of a jackpot, or the occurrence of a jackpot can be recalled. Examples include a pattern or an image (for example, a character in a guts pose as shown in FIG. 25 (B)).

On the other hand, as an alternative display 1625 instead of the lost pattern suggesting that the loss has occurred, for example, a character string such as "sorry" that can recall the occurrence of the loss, or a pattern or image that can recall the occurrence of the loss. (For example, a drooping character, etc.) and the like are exemplified.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, by performing a pushing operation on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state can be suggested by the shape of the hold display. Since 1622 and the variation display including the suggestion effect after the reach display can be displayed as a pseudo variation display for demonstration, even if the start prize of the special symbol does not occur (the start prize of the special symbol is generated). (Even if it is not), the player can visually recognize what kind of display can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, such as the suggestion effect after reach and the hold display 1622. ..

Therefore, when it is possible to display a variable display including a display that can suggest the degree of expectation such as a suggestion effect after reach as a variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol, or when a start prize of the special symbol occurs. In a configuration in which the degree of expectation can be suggested by the hold display 1622 for the start prize, an event that can be expected after the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol (for example, the degree of ease of transition to the special gaming state) is displayed. It is possible to improve the playability inferred from the content of the variable display, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game machine.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. 25B, for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621. The time from the start of the pseudo-variation display to the appearance of the suggestion effect after the reach display is the time from the start of the variation display to the appearance of the suggestion effect after the reach display in the variation display based on the start prize of the special symbol. By displaying in a shorter time than the time of, the pseudo fluctuation display for the demo can be displayed in a time shorter than the fluctuation display time (variation time) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display. it can.

Therefore, as a selectable variation pattern, in a configuration in which a variation pattern corresponding to a variation display including a display (effect) that can suggest the degree of expectation for a transition to a special gaming state, such as a suggestion effect after reach, is prepared. Can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state included in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern by operating the pressing operation device (pushing operation) during the non-gaming state. Display (for example, suggestion effect after reach display) can be efficiently visually recognized in a time shorter than the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (that is, the fluctuation time for the fluctuation display including the display). ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), a pseudo variation for demonstration is performed. Before the start of the display, a hold display 1622 that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state by its shape is displayed. Therefore, the player pushes the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state to display the display image including the hold display 1622 having a predetermined shape before the start (at the start) of the pseudo variable display for demonstration. It can be visually recognized. As described above, since the pseudo variable display for the demo is configured to be shorter than the variable time of the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol, the special gaming state is set before the start of the pseudo variable display for the demo. By displaying a display image including a display that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to (for example, hold display 1622), the display that can suggest the degree of expectation can also be efficiently visually recognized by the player. It becomes.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the suggestion effect after the reach display is displayed in the variation display (pseudo variation display for demonstration) based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state, the suggestion effect is displayed. Two or more suggestive effects having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state according to the display contents are simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

As a result, the player can expect the transition to the special gaming state that can appear in the variable display corresponding to the same pattern (for example, super reach) by pushing the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state. Two or more suggestable displays (for example, suggestive effects after reach display) can be visually recognized at the same time. Therefore, the player can efficiently recognize the difference between two or more displays that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state that can appear in the variable display corresponding to the same pattern during the non-gaming state. Therefore, during the game, it is possible to play the game while being aware of the difference in the degree of expectation according to the difference in the display that can suggest the degree of expectation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, it is special according to the shape before the start of the pseudo fluctuation display for demonstration. Two or more types of hold displays 1622 having different expectations for the transition to the gaming state are configured to be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

As a result, the player can simultaneously visually recognize the two or more types of hold displays 1622 by pushing the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state. Therefore, during the non-game state, it is possible to efficiently recognize the difference in the shape of the hold display 1622 included in the display image before the start of the pseudo variable display for demonstration, so that the special symbol can be recognized during the game. It is possible to play the game while being aware of the difference in the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state according to the difference in the shape of the hold display 1622 included in the display image before the start of the variable display based on the start winning prize.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, within the period from the start to the end of the variation display (pseudo variation display for demonstration) based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state (that is, the variation). Suggests the degree of expectation for a transition to a special gaming state, such as a display image including a suggestion effect after reach or a display image including a hold display 1622, before the start (at the start) of the variable display (during display execution). The possible display is reduced to a smaller size than the case where the image (frame image) constituting the variable display is displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 479, such as the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol. It is displayed in the same size.

As a result, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, such as the display image of the suggestion effect after reach and the display image including the hold display 1622, which is displayed based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state. The display that can suggest that the special gaming state is unlikely to occur after the display (more specifically, after the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state). The player can be preferably recognized based on the display size.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, the variation display based on the pressing operation (pseudo variation display for demonstration) ends. The pseudo-confirmed display for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621 displayed later is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in a size smaller than the confirmed display by the decorative symbol 1621 displayed after the end of the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol. Will be done.

Therefore, also in this respect, there is a possibility that a special gaming state may occur after the fluctuation display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state (more specifically, after the display of the pseudo confirmed display for demonstration). It is possible to make the player preferably recognize that there is no such thing based on the display size of the pseudo-confirmed display for demonstration.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment, the display mode of the variable display and the definite display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when the start prize of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs. We have devised it.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to ninth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the tenth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to ninth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any of the ninth embodiments.

FIG. 26 (FIGS. 26A and 26B) is a screen view showing an example of a variable display and a definite display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as one aspect of the variation display executed when the start winning of the special symbol occurs, the gaming machine image 1701 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as shown in FIG. 26. The variation display displayed as if it were displayed on the display screen of the pachinko machine indicated by (hereinafter, the variation display is also referred to as "variation display using a game machine image") can be displayed.

The variation display using the game machine image is executed with the predetermined selection probability set for the variation display when the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display is selected when the start prize of the special symbol occurs. (Display) is selected. The selection probability may be a value greater than 0% and less than 100%, or may be 100%. The variation display using the gaming machine image is selected (displayed, executed) with a predetermined selection probability only when the variation pattern is accompanied by a specific reach display (for example, super reach). It may be.

As shown in FIG. 26, the variation display using the game machine image includes the game machine image 1701 and the player image 1702. The display control of the variation display using the game machine image including the game machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 is performed by the sub-control board 940.

The gaming machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100 in which a player plays a game). The gaming machine image 1701 preferably displays an image of the pachinko machine having the same shape as that of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the like in a reduced form. In the example shown in FIG. 26, the pachinko machine is schematically represented. It is shown in. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 26, the gaming machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to the pachinko machine viewed from the diagonally left front side. The pachinko machine shown in the game machine image 1701 does not necessarily have to be a pachinko machine viewed from an obliquely front side, and may be a front-view pachinko machine.

The variable display using the game machine image is displayed on the display screen of the display device corresponding to the decorative symbol display device 479 in the pachinko machine shown in the game machine image 1701 in the game machine image 1701. Therefore, when the gaming machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to the pachinko machine viewed from the diagonally front side (for example, the diagonally left front side) as shown in FIG. 26, the variation display using the gaming machine image is a game. The variation display is obliquely arranged in the substantially parallel quadrilateral area 1701A corresponding to the substantially rectangular display screen in the display device of the pachinko machine (display device corresponding to the decorative symbol display device 479) shown by the game machine image 1701 in the machine image 1701. It is displayed as if it were viewed from the front side.

It should be noted that the variation display that can be displayed (appearable) for the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display using the game machine image may be configured to be only the variation display using the game machine image, and the game machine. The configuration may include not only the variation display using the image but also another variation display (for example, the variation display shown in FIG. 25A) that does not display the game machine image 1701. In the following, another variation display that does not display the gaming machine image 1701 is also simply referred to as "another variation display".

The player image 1702 is an image corresponding to the player located on the front side of the pachinko machine shown in the game machine image 1701. The player image 1702 (image corresponding to the player) may be an image of a drawn character showing the player, as shown in FIG. 26, or a game in which the pachinko machine 100 is actually played. The person may be a photographed image taken by a camera or the like provided in the pachinko machine 100.

When the start prize of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs and the execution of the variable display using the gaming machine image is selected, the decoration is as shown in FIG. 26 (A). In the area 1701A (the area corresponding to the display screen of the display device included in the pachinko machine shown in the game machine image 1701) in the game machine image 1701 displayed on the symbol display device 479, the variable display using the game machine image is started. .. In the example shown in FIG. 26 (A), the state in which the decorative symbol 1621 is changing is shown.

In the variation display using the game machine image, the final display is displayed after the variation display time (variation time) for the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display has elapsed after the variation display starts. Even if the final display is configured to display a combination of decorative symbols 1621 corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery), the lottery result is displayed by the alternative display 1625. It may be configured to be used. In the example shown in FIG. 26 (B), the alternative display 1625 (specifically, the alternative display 1625 by the character in the guts pose), which is a substitute for the big hit symbol suggesting that a big hit has occurred, is a definite display. The displayed state is illustrated.

The variation display that can be displayed for the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display using the game machine image is the variation display using the game machine image and other variation displays (that is, other variations that do not display the game machine image 1701). In the case of a configuration including display), the video data corresponding to the variable display using the game machine image is diverted to the game machine without preparing the video data (image data) corresponding to the variable display. It may be configured to display a variable display using an image. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that dedicated moving image data corresponding to the variable display using the gaming machine image is prepared.

Specifically, the image (unit image) of each frame constituting the moving image data corresponding to other variable display is deformed or reduced so that the image matches the shape of the region 1701A which is a substantially parallelogram. After performing the processing of, a series of moving images (images) composed of the processed images are sequentially displayed in the area 1701A. As a result, the variation display using the game machine image can be displayed in the area 1701A without preparing the moving image data corresponding to the variation display using the game machine image. It should be noted that the above-mentioned control of processing (deformation, reduction, etc.) of the image of each frame and display control of the moving image (that is, variable display using the game machine image) composed of the processed image are performed on the sub-control board. Performed by 940.

When displaying the variable display using the game machine image by diverting the video data corresponding to the other variable display, the content of the variable display using the game machine image is the other variable display corresponding to the video data of the diversion source. Although it is the same as the content of, the variable display (including the fixed display) using the game machine image is processed such as deformation and reduction of the frame image that constitutes the video data corresponding to other variable display. Since it is composed of images, it is a variable display having a display mode different from that of other variable displays.

Therefore, by diverting and displaying the variable display using the game machine image by diverting the moving image data corresponding to the other variable display, the variable display mode (display mode) while suppressing the storage amount of the moving image data (image data). ) Variations can be increased. In addition, it is possible to easily reduce the need to develop multiple types of variable displays, that is, variable displays using game machine images and other variable displays, and suggestive effects that appear in each of these multiple types of variable displays. Development costs can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the confirmation display is performed in the variable display using the game machine image, the player image 1702 shows the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the confirmation display. The composition is suggested by the state of.

For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, when the confirmation display corresponding to the lottery result is performed, as shown in FIG. 26B, it is possible to recall the occurrence of the big hit (for example, a game). The player image 1702 corresponding to the player (the person is smiling, has a guts pose, etc.) is displayed. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost (not a big hit), it seems that the occurrence of the loss can be recalled when the confirmation display corresponding to the lottery result is performed (for example, the player is drowning). The player image 1702 corresponding to the player (such as) is displayed.

In addition to the configuration in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the finalized display is suggested by the state of the player shown in the player image 1702 when the finalized display is performed in the variable display using the game machine image. Alternatively, instead of the configuration, the degree of possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state after the end of the variation display after the reach display in the variation display using the game machine image (the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state) is determined. The configuration may be suggested by the appearance of the player shown in the player image 1702. For example, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state may be changed depending on the difference in the facial expression of the player shown in the player image 1702.

Further, for example, the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state) in the suggestion effect displayed on the pachinko machine shown in the game machine image 1701 is different depending on the state of the player shown in the player image 1702. It may be. For example, the higher the expectation level in the suggestion effect, the larger the guts pose (the height at which the hand is raised) may be displayed, and the player image 1702 corresponding to the player may be displayed. The lower the value, the larger the amount of head lowering may be, and the player image 1702 corresponding to the player may be displayed. As a result, the player image 1702 can easily suggest a highly expected effect of transitioning to the special gaming state.

Further, in the variation display in which the operation by various input operation devices 260 including the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 1261 can be input according to the movement and the state of the player shown in the player image 1702, the variation display is in progress. The configuration may be such that the operation method of the input operation device 260 in the above, the operation timing (operation timing), and the result of the operation (for example, the appearance of a character or the change in the display content) are suggested.

Further, the variation display including the game machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 displays a part of the variation display (for example, a stop symbol) executed in the variation display during the non-gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment. It may be used to display all of the variable display) or the variable display (a part including the final part of the variable display), so that the player or the player can use the variable display different from the case where the start prize of the special symbol occurs. It can be shown to the clerk of the amusement park in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the variable display including the game machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 may be displayed together with the suggested effect when displaying the suggested effect in the customer waiting effect in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment, and the variable display may be displayed. In the above, it is possible to suggest an effect that is advantageous for the player by the movement of the player in the player image 1702 in an easy-to-understand manner.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 has a game machine image 1701 and a game machine image 1701 which are images corresponding to the pachinko machine when a start prize of a special symbol occurs. The player image 1702, which is an image corresponding to the player located on the front side of the pachinko machine shown by, is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and the pachinko machine shown by the game machine image 1701 in the game machine image 1701 is provided. In the area corresponding to the display screen of the display device, the contents of other variable displays that can be displayed when a start prize of a special symbol occurs are displayed.

Therefore, the player who plays the game with the pachinko machine 100 passes through the operation and state of the player (player image 1702) who plays the game with the pachinko machine (game machine image 1701) displayed in the decorative symbol display device 479. , The magnitude of the expectation for transitioning to the special game state with respect to the current fluctuation display displayed based on the start prize of the special symbol, the emotion of the player according to the expectation indicated by the suggestion effect, and the operation method for the pachinko machine. Various information such as can be transmitted to the player.

In the tenth embodiment described above, when the start prize of the special symbol occurs, the variable display using the game machine image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but in the non-gaming state ( When the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pushed in (during standby) and the execution of the variation display using the game machine image is selected, the game is performed in the same manner as when the start prize of the special symbol occurs. The variable display using the machine image may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

By displaying the variation display using the gaming machine image (variation display including the game machine image 1701 and the player image 1702) during the non-gaming state, the player who visually recognizes the variation display can display the decorative symbol display device 479. Changes in behavior and feelings toward the game when playing a game with the pachinko machine 100 through the movement and state of the player (player image 1702) playing the game with the pachinko machine (game machine image 1701) displayed in. You can experience the above and know how to operate the pachinko machine before the game.

Further, when the sub-control board 940 displays the game machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 on the decorative symbol display device 479, at least one of the game machine image 1701 or the player image 1702 is a lottery result by a special symbol lottery. The configuration may be such that at least a part thereof is displayed differently depending on whether or not the jackpot is won. According to such a configuration, the lottery result by the special symbol lottery can be suggested to the player by the difference of at least a part in at least one of the game machine image 1701 and the player image 1702.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 displays the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in a predetermined mode (for example, a combination of three symbols) when the start prize of the special symbol occurs. The first lottery result display control is modified or reduced with respect to a combination of three symbols corresponding to the lottery result including a mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, a game machine image 1701 and a player image 1702). The lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed in a processed display mode such as, or an image having a content different from the lottery result of the predetermined mode and corresponding to the jackpot winning (for example, guts). The second lottery result display control for displaying the alternative display 1625) by the paused character is configured to be executable.

Therefore, the lottery result displayed by the second lottery result display control is different from the lottery result displayed by the first lottery result display control in the display mode or the content thereof. It is possible to increase the variation for the display, and it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the lottery result due to deformation, reduction, etc., or images having different contents. Thereby, when the lottery result is displayed, it is possible to provide the game property of paying close attention to the lottery result.

In particular, as illustrated in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine image 1701 corresponding to the pachinko machine viewed from the diagonally front side is used, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is also displayed when viewed from the diagonally front side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to preferably grasp the display of the lottery result.

Further, when the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pushed in during the non-gaming state (standby) and the execution of the variation display using the gaming machine image is selected, the start prize of the special symbol is won. In the case where the variable display using the game machine image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as in the case of occurrence, the pachinko machine 100 pays attention to the lottery result when the lottery result is displayed. It is possible to know in advance that the player has sex, such as before a game.

In the tenth embodiment, all the contents of the other variable display are displayed in the variable display using the game machine image, but all the contents of the other variable display use the game machine image. The configuration is not limited to being displayed in the variable display, and only a part of the contents of the other variable display (for example, only the suggestion effect) may be displayed in the variable display using the game machine image.

Further, when the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pushed in during the non-game state (standby), the variable display is executed by the lottery result display control using the game machine image and the player image, and the special display is performed. When the start winning of the symbol occurs, the lottery result may be displayed by the normal lottery result display control using the combination of the three symbols.

Further, when the game machine image and the player image are displayed together with the variable display image, the portion where the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed (for example, the portion where the numerical symbol is displayed) is The game machine may be displayed in the same place (appearance) in the same place as when the game machine image is not displayed without changing the direction of the symbol and deforming. Control may be performed by the sub-control board 940 so that the image is displayed in an oblique direction according to the orientation of the image.

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 27. In the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment, as a variation display (variation effect) that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a special symbol start winning is generated, a variation display configured so that operation input is possible (that is, that is). In a configuration provided with a variable display (variable display) capable of producing a predetermined effect by performing a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period, the player can suitably operate the pressing operation device. We have devised it.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to tenth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the eleventh embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to tenth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the tenth embodiments.

FIG. 27 (FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (B)) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the operable period in the variable display configured to be operable in the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment. It is a screen view which shows an example of the display content.

In FIG. 27A, for reference, the right hand 1712C is shown by a chain line as a hand touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A whose operation surface is located in the neutral position.

Here, the "operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A" is a surface corresponding to the surface that the player touches when operating the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the pressing operation device 1712A. Therefore, in the pressing operation device 1712A, which is an image corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261 capable of pressing downward, the upper side surface (upper end surface) of the pressing operation device 1712A is the operation surface.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a predetermined effect that appears by performing a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 during the operable period in the variable display configured to enable operation input. (For example, an effect image 1711 corresponding to an effect in which a predetermined change occurs according to the pressing operation), an effect image 1712 corresponding to an effect related to the movement of the pressing operation device 1261, and information related to the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261. The display information 1713 corresponding to (for example, character information by a character string such as "continuous press!" Or "PUSH!") Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

The effect image 1711 is an image (more specifically, a moving image) including each image corresponding to the character 1711A, the balloon 1711B, and the foot pump 1711C for sending air to the balloon 1711B. The effect image 1711 is a moving image corresponding to an effect in which the character 1711A steps on the foot pump 1711C in response to the pressing operation on the pressing operation device performed during the operable period, and the balloon 1711B is inflated accordingly. The moving image data corresponding to the effect image 1711 is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940, and the display control of the effect image 1711 is performed by the sub-control board 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect of the effect image 1711 is configured as a suggestion effect indicating the degree of expectation for the subsequent transition to the special gaming state depending on the size of the balloon 1711B until the gradually inflating balloon 1711B breaks. Will be done. For example, the larger the size of the balloon 1711B when the balloon 1711B breaks, the higher the expectation for the transition to the special gaming state.

The effect image 1712 is an image including each image corresponding to the pressing operation device 1712A corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261 and the hand (for example, the left hand) 1712B touching the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1712A. , Moving image).

More specifically, in the effect image 1712, the operation of the left hand 1712B (lower side) from the state where the left hand 1712B touches the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1712A in which the operation surface is located in the neutral position (see FIG. 27 (A)). After pushing the pressing operation device 1712A downward (see FIG. 27 (B)), the pressing operation device 1712A moves (rises) upward until the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A reaches the neutral position. It is a moving image corresponding to an effect in which a reciprocating motion is performed at least once (repeated a plurality of times).

When the effect image 1712 is an image corresponding to the case where the left hand 1712B pushes the pressing operation device 1712A whose operation surface is located in the neutral position downward as shown in FIG. 27 (A), "continuous pressing! The character information by the character strings "(PUSH!)" Is displayed as the display information 1713, and the effect image 1712 is in a state where the pressing operation device 1712A is pushed downward as shown in FIG. 27 (B). In the case of the corresponding image, the character information by the character strings "Continuous press!" And "(Again)" is displayed as the display information 1713.

As a result, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A is located in the neutral position, the player can refer to the character information of "(PUSH!)" In the display information 1713 to refer to the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A. When the player can recognize that the pressing device 1712A needs to be pushed downward, and then the pressing operation device 1712A is pushed downward, the player refers to the character information of "(again)" in the display information 1713. Therefore, it can be recognized that the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A needs to be pushed repeatedly many times.

Therefore, the player can recognize that it is necessary to repeatedly execute the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1712A with respect to the character information of "continuous pressing!" Displayed as the display information 1713.

When the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is output by the electric power of the motor 863 or the like, the degree of change in the operation feeling in the pushing operation is determined by the player using the button operation unit 850 in the pressing operation device 1261. If the push operation is performed so as to hold down the button operation unit 850 while touching the button operation unit 850, the player controls the difference in operation feeling by the sub-control board 940, rather than operating by hitting. It is preferable because it can be easily felt. Therefore, it is preferable to display the operation method for the pressing operation device 1261 on the screen by the display information 1713 or the like, so that the player can easily experience the effect intended by the developer. it can.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect image 1712 that touches the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A and performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1712A while the left hand 1712B moves downward is displayed as a decorative pattern. Since the control for displaying on the device 479 is performed, the player can be suggested to the player how to operate the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the pressing operation device 1712A by the content of the displayed effect image 1712.

In the effect image 1712, the left hand 1712B does not necessarily have to touch (contact) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A, and the operation surface is close to the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A so that the operation surface can be operated. It may be the configuration that is used.

Further, when the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is configured to be changeable, the left hand 1712B is the only hand touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A according to the magnitude of the reaction force. The effect image 1712 corresponding to the case and the effect image 1712 corresponding to the case where the hand touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A is both the left hand 1712B and the right hand 1712C (dashed line) may be switched. ..

For example, in a configuration in which the higher the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, the greater the reaction force, the larger the reaction force (that is, the higher the degree of expectation), the more the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1712A is touched. By increasing the number of hands (that is, increasing from only the left hand 1712B to both the left hand 1712B and the right hand 1712C), the special gaming state is entered according to the number of hands touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the transition of.

The configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above may be applied when the pressing operation device 261 is used as the pressing operation device instead of the pressing operation device 1261.

<12th Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 28. In the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment, as a variable display (variable effect) that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a special symbol start winning is generated, a variable display configured so that operation input is possible (that is, that is). Similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment described above, in a configuration in which a predetermined effect can be displayed by performing a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period). The player is devised so that the pressing operation device can be appropriately operated.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to eleventh embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the twelfth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to eleventh embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any of the eleventh embodiments.

FIG. 28 (FIGS. 28 (A) and 28 (B)) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the operable period in the variable display configured to be operable in the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment. It is a screen view which shows an example of the display content.

In addition, in FIG. 28A, for reference, the pachinko machine 100 actually has a pressing operation device for pressing the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1715A drawn as an image in the effect image 1715. The position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the operation device 1715A is illustrated by the alternate long and short dash line XA.

Here, the "operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A" is a surface corresponding to the surface that the player touches when operating the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the pressing operation device 1715A. Therefore, in the pressing operation device 1715A, which is an image corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261 capable of pressing downward, the upper side surface (upper end surface) of the pressing operation device 1715A is the operation surface.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, during the operable period in the variable display configured so that the operation can be input, the same effect image 1711 and the same effect image 1711 as the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment described above and The display information 1713 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, and the effect image 1715 corresponding to the effect related to the movement of the pressing operation device 1261 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

The effect image 1715 is an image (more specifically, a moving image) including an image corresponding to the pressing operation device 1715A corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261. More specifically, in the effect image 1715, after the pressing operation device 1715A is moved downward from the state where the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A is located in the neutral position (see FIG. 28 (A)) (FIG. 28 (B)). ), It is a moving image corresponding to an effect in which a series of reciprocating operations of moving (raising) upward until the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A reaches a neutral position is performed at least once (repeated a plurality of times). ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A drawn as an image in the effect image 1715 is located in the neutral position, the reference position Q0 (for example, the pressing operation) is started from the position Q1 of the operation surface. The distance LA to the opening R (at least a part of the peripheral edge of the opening corresponding to the opening R) accommodating the device 1261 is the pressing operation device actually provided in the pachinko machine 100, and the pressing operation device 1715A. When the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the above is located in the neutral position, the distance LB from the position Q2 of the operation surface to the reference position Q0 is set to be longer. The ratio of the distance LA to the distance LB is, for example, preferably about 1.2 times or more, preferably about 1.5 times or more, and preferably about 2 times or more.

In the configuration in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at a predetermined neutral position, the image corresponding to the pressing operation device 1715A in which the position Q1 corresponding to the neutral position (position Q2) is the neutral position of the operation surface is subordinate. A predetermined area of the ROM of the control board 940 is prepared in advance, and the sub-control board 940 executes display control of the effect image 1715 using the image.

In the configuration in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 can be positioned at a plurality of types of neutral positions, a plurality of types of pressing operation devices 1715A having different positions Q1 corresponding to each neutral position (position Q2) as neutral positions are used. It may be configured to prepare a corresponding image. In such a configuration, the sub-control board 940 determines the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 when the operation surface is located in the neutral position based on the detection result by the encoder provided in the operating mechanism 860 of the pressing operation device 1261. The display control of the effect image 1715 may be executed by detecting and using the image of the pressing operation device 1715A corresponding to the detected position.

Alternatively, the sub-control board 940 detects the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position at any time when the neutral position changes, and the position corresponding to the detected position becomes the neutral position of the operation surface. The pressing operation device 1715A may be drawn on the effect image 1715.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed when the pressing operation device 1715A (more specifically, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A) reciprocates in the vertical direction in the effect image 1715 is the pressing operation device. The actual pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the 1715A (more specifically, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261) is configured to be faster than the reciprocating speed in the case of reciprocating in the vertical direction. The ratio of the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261 is often, for example, about 1.5 or more, preferably about 2 or more, and preferably about 3 or more. Suitable.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the ratio of the reciprocating speed when the pressing operation device 1261 operates in the vertical direction under the control of the sub-control board 940 and the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261. However, a ratio larger than approximately 1 is preset, and in the sub-control board 940, the pressing operation device 1715A moves in the vertical direction at a reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261 specified in advance and a reciprocating speed corresponding to the ratio. The display control for the effect image 1715 is executed so as to reciprocate.

Alternatively, the ratio of the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261, which is larger than approximately 1, is predetermined, and the control board 940 is pushed into the pressing operation device 1261. In this case, the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261 is detected based on the detection result by the encoder provided in the operating mechanism 860 of the pressing operation device 1261, and in the effect image 1715, the pressing operation device 1715A performs the detected reciprocating speed. The display control for the effect image 1715 may be executed so as to reciprocate in the vertical direction at a reciprocating speed corresponding to the ratio specified in advance.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the effect image 1715, the player can visually recognize a part of the side surface of the pressing operation device 1715A (for example, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A is located in the neutral position). Expectation information 1715B that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is displayed on the lower end side of the region) with a predetermined probability.

The expectation degree information 1715B may be information including, for example, a character string (for example, "hot!" Or "maybe hot !?") that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state, and the special game. It may be an image that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the state (for example, an image of a character with each expression according to the degree of expectation). A plurality of types of expectation information 1715B are prepared according to the suggested high degree of expectation. In the example shown in FIG. 28 (A), the expectation degree information 1715B is composed of a character string “hot!” That can suggest that the expectation degree for the transition to the special gaming state is relatively high.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A is located at a predetermined neutral position, the operation surface is from the position (position Q1) to the reference position (position Q0). The distance LA is configured to be longer than the distance LB from the position (position Q2) of the operation surface to the reference position when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the predetermined neutral position, and the pressing operation device The reciprocating speed when the operation surface of the 1715A reciprocates in the vertical direction is configured to be faster than the reciprocating speed when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reciprocates in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the sub-control board 940 is a pressing operation device during the operationable period of the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 when a start prize of a special symbol occurs and a variation display configured to enable operation input is selected. The position of the operation surface of 1715A is different from the displacement amount of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled by the sub control board 940, or the reciprocating speed different from the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled by the sub control board 940. A moving image (effect image 1715) including at least one of the speed modes can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 in an easy-to-understand manner.

The sub-control board 940 controls the pressing operation device 1261 to change the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in the situation where the effect image 1715 (moving image) is displayed on the display unit. It may be configured to be performed. According to this configuration, during the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 in which the position of the operation surface is changed, the operation mode of the pressing operation device 1261 is made by allowing the player to visually recognize the effect image 1715 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. Can be concretely grasped.

<13th Embodiment>
Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 29. In the pachinko machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment, as a variation display (variation effect) that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a special symbol start winning is generated, a variation display configured so that operation input is possible (that is,). , A variable display capable of producing a predetermined effect by performing a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period), the player can suitably grasp the remaining amount of the operable period. We have devised ways to do it.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to twelfth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the thirteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to twelfth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the twelfth embodiments.

FIG. 29 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the remaining amount of the operable period and the state of the pressing operation device 1261 in the variable display configured so that the operation can be input. More specifically, FIG. 29A is a diagram showing the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 and the state of the pressing operation device 1261 at the start timing of the operable period, and FIG. 29B is an operable diagram. FIG. 29 (C) is a diagram showing the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 and the state of the pressing operation device 1261 at a predetermined timing within the period, and FIG. 29 (C) shows the display of the decorative symbol display device 479 at the end timing of the operable period. It is a figure which shows the content and the state of the pressing operation device 1261.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the operable period in the variable display configured so that the operation can be input, the display information 1721 that can suggest that it is the operable period and the remaining period during which the remaining amount of the operable period can be notified can be reported. The amount information 1722 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. When the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 during this operable period, an effect corresponding to the success or failure of the special symbol lottery and the expected degree of transition to the special game state is executed in synchronization with the operation.

The display information 1721 may be, for example, information including a character string (for example, "PUSH!" Or "press!") That can prompt the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261, and corresponds to the operation on the pressing operation device 1261. The information may include an image (for example, an image in which the pressing operation device corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261 is repeatedly hit). In the example shown in FIG. 29, the display information 1721 is composed of a character string "PUSH!" That can prompt a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261.

The period remaining amount information 1722 may be, for example, a progress bar indicating a decrease in the remaining amount of the operable period with the passage of time, or a numerical value that changes according to a change in the remaining amount of the operable period. Good. In the example shown in FIG. 29, the display information 1721 and the period remaining amount information 1722 are composed of a progress bar.

Specifically, at the start timing of the operable period, the progress bar as the period remaining amount information 1722 indicates that the remaining amount of the operable period is the total amount of the operable period, as shown in FIG. 29 (A). Shown. When the operable period starts, the progress bar gradually shortens as shown in FIG. 29B to show that the remaining amount of the operable period decreases with the passage of time thereafter. Then, at the end timing of the operable period, the progress bar indicates that the remaining amount of the operable period has become zero, as shown in FIG. 29 (C).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the period from the start to the end of the operable period, the pressing operation device 1261 (more specifically, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261) is lowered from the neutral position to the position below the neutral position. It is configured to descend (move) at a substantially constant speed to a predetermined end point position set on the side. The movement control of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed by the sub-control board 940.

Specifically, at the start timing of the operable period, as shown in FIG. 29 (A), the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at a predetermined neutral position (position Q11), and the operable period starts. After that, as shown in FIG. 29B, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 gradually descends at a substantially constant speed as the remaining amount of the operable period decreases with the passage of time. Then, at the end timing of the operable period, as shown in FIG. 29 (C), the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches a predetermined predetermined end point position set in advance.

The sub-control board 940 sets the speed at which the pressing operation device 1261 descends during the operable period, and the position Q11 of the operation surface and the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located in the neutral position. It is determined based on the distance between the operation surface and the position Q10 when the surface is located at the end point position and the length of the operable period.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the content (aspect) of the variation display selected by the sub-control board 940, the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 during the period of the variation display according to the mode. A specific variation display including a possible operable period is provided, and in the specific variation display, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled by the sub-control board 940 from the start to the end of the operable period. During the period, it is displaced downward from the neutral position. Therefore, the player can grasp the remaining time of the operable period through the height position of the operating surface. For example, even in a situation where the player is playing a game without visually recognizing the decorative symbol display device 479, it is necessary to grasp through the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 that the operable period has occurred and the length of the remaining time. Can be done.

The period remaining amount information 1722 does not necessarily have to be displayed and may be omitted. That is, the player may be made to recognize the length of the remaining time of the operable period only by the height of the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261.

Further, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be operated during a part of the period from the start to the end of the operable period. For example, when the remaining time is reduced to half or less, the operation is gradually performed. The control of the sub-control board 940 may be configured so that the surface moves.

Further, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 protrudes from the peripheral portion, a character (scale) corresponding to the time may be inserted in the protruding portion.

Further, the period from the start to the end of the operable period may include a period in which the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 gradually rises. For example, a period of rising from the start of the operable period to a predetermined neutral position. The player may be notified of the end of the operation period, or the player may be configured to gradually descend after ascending once, and the operable period may be indicated by a situation higher than the initial position.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the 14th embodiment, a device is provided so that the player can suitably grasp the remaining time of the variation display during execution.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to thirteenth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the 14th embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to thirteenth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the thirteenth embodiments.

FIG. 30 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the remaining time of the fluctuation display and the state of the pressing operation device 1261. As shown in FIG. 30, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 (more specifically, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261) is in the neutral position during the period from the start to the end of the variation display. It is configured to descend (move) at a substantially constant speed from to a predetermined end point position set below the neutral position. The movement control of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed by the sub-control board 940.

Specifically, at the start timing of the variable display, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at a predetermined neutral position (position Q11), and after the start of the operable period, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 The position gradually descends at a substantially constant speed as the remaining time of the variation display decreases with the passage of time. Then, at the end timing of the variation display, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches a preset predetermined end point position.

The sub-control board 940 sets the speed at which the pressing operation device 1261 descends during the fluctuation display with the position Q11 of the operation surface and the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located in the neutral position. It is determined based on the distance between the operation surface and the position Q10 when the surface is located at the end point position and the length of the operable period.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 changes on the sub-control board 940 when the start winning of the special symbol occurs and the variation display is executed. The control of gradually shifting downward from the neutral position is executed according to the progress of the fluctuation display in the period from the start of the display to the end of the fluctuation display (variation period). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a playability in which the progress of the variable display can be recognized by visually recognizing the change in the height of the operation surface or by the feeling of touching the operation surface.

Further, since the sub-control board 940 controls the operation surface so as to gradually descend at a substantially constant speed according to the decrease in the remaining time of the fluctuation display with the passage of time, the degree of progress of the fluctuation display and the remaining time can be determined. , Can be made easier for the player to understand.

The operation of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descending (moving) from the neutral position to the end point position at a substantially constant speed does not necessarily have to be set from the start to the end of the fluctuation display, and is in the reach state. It may be a later period, or it may be another period such as a period from the start of the variable display to the reach.

Further, the traveling speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 does not necessarily have to be a substantially constant speed, and may be different depending on the situation. For example, the speed until the reach state and the speed after the reach state may be different.

Further, the traveling speed of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 does not necessarily have to be a substantially constant speed, and instead of or in addition to this, a section that advances stepwise may be included. For example, it may be lowered by a certain amount (for example, 5 mm) every time a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses.

Further, the control related to the remaining time of the variable display and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be executed by a lottery at the start of the variable display, or the player may produce the variable display. When the function of the pressing operation device 1261 is selectable, the player may be able to set it as one function.

Further, as a control related to the remaining time of the fluctuation display and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, an operation of raising (moving) the operation surface of the pressing operation device from the neutral position to the end point position at a substantially constant speed is performed. You may do so.

Further, as a control related to the remaining time of the variation display and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, when a predetermined operation is performed during the above-mentioned non-gaming state (standby), a special symbol is started during the game. The pachinko machine 100 configured so that the variation display (variation effect) in the mode (contents of variation display, variation pattern) selected under the same selection conditions as when a prize is generated is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. The operation surface may operate in response to the remaining time of the variable display with respect to the variable display.

<15th Embodiment>
Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fifteenth embodiment, when the pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the fluctuation display, the pushing operation is not performed for the time required for the passage of a part of the fluctuation display. It is configured to be shorter than in the case.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to fourteenth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the fifteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to the fourteenth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any of the 14th embodiments.

FIG. 31 is a time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the fluctuation display when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the fluctuation display. More specifically, FIG. 31 (A) is a time chart of the fluctuation display when the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is not performed during the fluctuation display, and FIG. 31 (B) is a pressing operation device during the fluctuation display. It is a time chart of the fluctuation display when the pushing operation with respect to 1261 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A), when the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is not performed during the variation display (that is, the variation display ends without performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261), the time T0. The variation display started in is ended at time T1 (the confirmation display is displayed). In the variation display, the content A appears at the time T2, the content B appears at the time T3 after the time T2, and the content C appears at the time T4 after the time T3. Examples of the contents A to C include the occurrence of a reach state, the execution of an effect by the appearance of a character or a character, and the movement of the character (for example, victory or defeat after a battle).

As shown in FIG. 31 (B), in the variation display started at the time T0, when the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 is performed at the time T2 when the content A appears, the sub-control board 940 is set. Until the pushing operation is completed, the progress of the fluctuation display is advanced according to the operation amount of the pressing operation device 1261.

As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), when the pushing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with a predetermined first operation amount (displacement amount or moving speed) during the period from time T2 to time T5. The content B that appears at time T3 when the pushing operation is not performed appears at time T5 when the pushing operation is completed.

That is, when the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed by the first operation amount in the period from time T2 to time T5, it is displayed in the period from time T2 to time T3 when the pushing operation is not performed. The period from the start to the end of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, from time T2 to time T5) for the content of the variable display (that is, a series of display contents from content A to content B). It progresses in fast forward (fast forward playback) in the period).

Therefore, when the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed by the first operation amount in the period from time T2 to time T5, it is displayed in the period from time T2 to time T3 when the pushing operation is not performed. Since the content of the variable display progresses in a period shorter than the period (that is, the period from the time T2 to the time T5), the appearance timing of the content C is accelerated accordingly.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), when the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is completed at the time T5, the content C appears at the time T6 earlier than the time T4. The interval from the time T5 to the time T6 where the content C appears is equal to the interval from the time T3 to the time T4 (the difference between the time T4 and the time T3).

At time T7, when the time equal to the interval (difference between time T1 and time T4) from time T4 to time T1 has elapsed after the content C appears at time T6, the fluctuation result is displayed by the stop display, and then the fluctuation result is displayed. The stop display continues until the time T1, and the confirmation display is displayed at the time T1 (the variation display ends).

In this way, even when a part of the variation display is fast-forwarded and reproduced by the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261, the stop display displayed at the time T7 is continued until the time T1 to press during the variation display. The fluctuation display period (that is, the period from the start to the end of the fluctuation display when the pushing operation is performed on the operating device 1261 is the same as when the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is not performed during the fluctuation display. It can be a display period.

Therefore, even if a part of the variation display is fast-forwarded and reproduced by the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261, the control of the variation display of the symbol by the main control board 920 is not changed, and the symbol on the main control board 920 is not changed. The variation display and the variation display of the symbol (decorative symbol) by the sub-control board 940 can be synchronized.

On the other hand, in the period from time T2 to time T5, the pushing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 is a predetermined second operating amount different from the first operating amount (for example, a displacement amount larger than the displacement amount corresponding to the first operating amount). Or, when the operation is performed at a movement speed faster than the movement speed corresponding to the first operation amount), the content C that appears at the time T4 after the time T3 when the pushing operation is not performed is displayed. It can be made to appear at the time T5 when the pushing operation is finished.

As a result, when the pushing operation for the pressing operation device 1261 is performed with the second operation amount in the period from the time T2 to the time T5, the contents A to the contents in the variation display are operated in the period from the time T2 to the time T5. When the push operation for the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the first operation amount in the period from the time T2 to the time T5 in the series of display contents from the time B to the content C (that is, from the time T2 to the time T5). (When a series of display contents from the contents A to the contents B are displayed in the period of), the process progresses (reproduces) at a faster speed.

When a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the fluctuation display, the progress of the fluctuation display is advanced according to the operation amount of the pressing operation device 1261 until the pushing operation is completed, and then the pushing operation is performed. The progress of the fluctuation display may be returned to the timing when the fluctuation display progresses without the pressing operation being performed at the timing when the above is completed.

FIG. 32 is a time chart for explaining the configuration, and is a time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the fluctuation display when the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 is performed during the fluctuation display. More specifically, FIG. 32 (A) is a time chart of the fluctuation display when the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is not performed during the fluctuation display, and FIG. 32 (B) is a pressing operation device during the fluctuation display. It is a time chart of the fluctuation display when the pushing operation with respect to 1261 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), when the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is not performed during the variation display (that is, the variation display ends without performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261), the time T0. The variation display started in is ended at time T1 (the confirmation display is displayed). In the variation display, the content A appears at the time T2, the content B appears at the time T3 after the time T2, and the content C appears at the time T4 after the time T3.

As shown in FIG. 32 (B), in the variation display started at the time T0, when the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 is performed at the time T2 when the content A appears, the case of FIG. 31 described above. Similarly, the sub-control board 940 advances the progress of the variation display according to the operation amount of the pressing operation device 1261 until the pushing operation is completed.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), when the pushing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with a predetermined first operation amount (displacement amount or moving speed) during the period from time T2 to time T5. The content B that appears at time T3 when the pushing operation is not performed appears at time T5 when the pushing operation is completed.

As a result, when the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is not performed, the content of the variable display displayed in the period from time T2 to time T3 (that is, a series of display contents from content A to content B) is displayed. , The pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is advanced in fast forward (fast forward playback is performed) in the period from the start to the end (that is, the period from time T2 to time T5).

When the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is completed at the time T5, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the reproduction position of the variation display starts from the position corresponding to the content B (the position corresponding to the time T3 in the variation display). , It is rewound to the position corresponding to the time Tm before the time T3 in the fluctuation display. Then, the progress of the fluctuation display proceeds (reproduces) as usual from the time Tm.

Therefore, when the pushing operation with the first operation amount for the pressing operation device 1261 is completed at the time T5, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the fluctuation display proceeds as usual from the time Tm, and the time After the content B appears again at T3, the content C appears at time T4, and then the fluctuation display ends at time T1 as in the case where the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is not performed (the confirmation display is displayed). Is displayed).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated as the control of the fluctuation display executed in the decorative symbol display device 479 by the sub control board 940, the sub control board 940 By the control of, the state of the variable display, which ends after a predetermined time if the operation is not performed, is configured to advance from the state when the operation is performed according to the amount of operation by the operation. For this reason, when the player wants to advance the progress of the variable display, he / she can easily advance to the section he / she wants to advance, and provides a playability that allows the player to visually recognize the effect that was planned to be visually recognized later. be able to.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the variation display is advanced according to the operation amount of the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 has been illustrated, but a predetermined period measured during the game (for example, the operable period) has been illustrated. ) May be advanced according to the operation amount of the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261.

Further, under the control of the sub-control board 940, the progress of the variation display progresses from the timing when the operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is performed according to the speed and operation amount of the operation by the operation, and the operation is performed. When it is finished, the progress of the variation display is configured to return to the timing when the operation is not performed (see FIG. 32). Therefore, while synchronizing the control of the progress of the fluctuation display on the main control board 920 and the control of the progress of the fluctuation display on the sub control board 940, the fluctuation display can be fast-forwarded and the event that occurs later can be recognized in advance. Can be added.

When the pressing operation device 1261 is operated, the state of the event that ends after a predetermined time if the pressing operation device 1261 is not operated by the control of the sub-control board 940 is advanced by the operation. The target is when a mission (command) such as a production using a timer with a remaining time set (for example, a big hit occurs if a reach with the symbol "6" is generated within 3 minutes) occurs. In, whether or not the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises to a height corresponding to the remaining time of the command, and the player pushes the operation surface to cause reach in the fluctuation display from the next time onward. May be visible.

Further, under the control of the sub-control board 940, the progress of the variation display progresses from the timing when the operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is performed according to the speed and operation amount of the operation by the operation, and the operation is performed. When it is finished, the progress of the variation display may be configured to return to the timing when the operation is performed. For example, when a predetermined operation is performed during a non-game state (standby), a mode selected under the same selection conditions as when a start prize of a special symbol occurs during the game (contents of variation display, variation). Regarding the variable display (variable effect) executed by the pattern), the progress of the variable display may be configured to return to the timing when the operation is performed, whereby some of the effects can be performed at high speed. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player only progresses and the player misses it.

Further, as a control related to the remaining time of the fluctuation display and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, an operation of raising (moving) the operation surface of the pressing operation device from the neutral position to the end point position at a substantially constant speed is performed. By controlling the sub-control board 940, the progress of the variation display returns from the timing when the operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is performed to the front according to the speed and operation amount of the operation by the operation. The function of being rewound may be added. In this case as well, after the pushing operation is performed, the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises so as to approach the original state, and the amount of time that has progressed is restarted with the variable display progressing. Alternatively, the variable display may be started by returning to the original timing before the operation.

Further, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be returned to the original height position when there is no operation after fast-forwarding to visually recognize the fluctuation display, or a predetermined number of times (for example, 1). When the fast-forward operation is performed, the fast-forward function may not be available, and when the fast-forward function is used a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the remaining time of the variable display and the pressing operation The control associated with the operating surface of device 1261 may be terminated.

Further, in the case of fast-forwarding the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (for example, the part where the numerical symbol is displayed) can be identified without fast-forwarding. For example, the variable display of the decorative pattern may be reduced to the corner of the display screen to continue the variable display without fast-forwarding, and at the timing (time Tm) when the display returns to the original state. Control may be performed by the sub-control board 940 so that the size is restored to the original size and displayed.

<16th Embodiment>
Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. In the pachinko machine 100 of the 16th embodiment, the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is configured to be associated with the effect executed in the variable display.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to fifteenth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the 16th embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to fifteenth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the fifteenth embodiments.

33 and 34 show control in which the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to a plurality of types in which the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced from the initial position to a different height position as an opportunity for the effect to be executed in the variation display. It is a figure for demonstrating.

FIG. 33 (A) shows a case where the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced to the position Q11 which is lowered by the distance LC after rising to the height of the position Q1 as the initial position during the fluctuation display, and is lowered by the distance LD. It is a figure which illustrated the situation which was displaced to the position Q12. The displacement from the position Q1 to the downwardly lowered position may be due to the pushing operation of the player, or instead or in addition to this, the position is changed by the control of the sub-control board 940. It may be the one that controls.

33 (B) and 33 (C) are diagrams illustrating a situation in which the same effect is started when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced from position Q1 to any of position Q11 and position Q12. It illustrates a case where the execution of the same effect is determined by the sub-control board 940 in a situation where different start-up prizes are generated and different displacement displays are started.

As shown in FIG. 33 (B), during the variable display, for example, the reach state of "7" may be reached, and then the characters "PUSH!" May be displayed to prompt the player to perform the pushing operation. Yes, this indicates that an operation valid period has occurred in which the operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is valid. Here, the display of "PUSH!" May urge the player to perform an operation by placing his or her hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 and pushing it in, and "pushing", "PRESS", or "jiwa" may be displayed. It may be displayed by other expressions such as "hold down", a plurality of expressions may be switched and displayed at short intervals, or an expression indicating a plurality of operation methods may be displayed at the same time.

When the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises to the height of the position Q1 and the player pushes the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in this situation, the position corresponding to about half of the section where the pushing operation is possible. When Q11 is reached, the effect of the school of fish is displayed, and the player is shown to execute the variable display with a high expectation of transition to the special gaming state (for example, 50%).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33C, even in the variable display in which the effect of the school of fish is displayed, the effect of the school of fish may not be displayed even when the position Q11 is reached as the operation amount of the pushing operation. When the position Q11 is exceeded and the pushing operation is continued to reach the position Q12, the effect of the school of fish may be displayed, and this control is performed on the sub-control board 940. The height position at which this effect is executed is selected from a plurality of types as one of the modes of the effect for the variable display to be executed. As a result, it is difficult for the player to understand how far the pushing operation should be performed to execute the effect, and the opportunity for the same effect to be executed is provided with the playability associated with a plurality of types of operation amounts. Can be done.

When the same effect is displayed for the variable display in which the amount of the pushing operation is different, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state due to the occurrence of the effect may be the same degree of expectation. , May have different expectations.

Further, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 does not necessarily have to be displaced by the operation of the player, and instead of or in addition to this, the position of the operation surface is controlled by the control of the sub-control board 940. May be changed. That is, the player is displayed with an effect image urging the player to put his / her hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (for example, the display of the characters "PUT!" Or the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface. The image is displayed), and the fact that the player puts his / her hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is detected by the power of the pressing operation device 1261 (motor 863) and the displacement amount of the encoder, and the operation surface is detected. , By controlling the movement in the pushing direction with a predetermined operation pattern (for example, a constant speed), when the position Q11 or the position Q12 is reached, the effect whose execution has been decided is performed. May be good.

FIG. 34 illustrates a case where different effects are executed depending on the difference in the amount of displacement in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced from the initial position. FIG. 34 (A) shows the case where the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced to the position Q11 lowered by the distance LC after rising to the height of the initial position Q1 during the fluctuation display, as in the case of FIG. 33 (A). It is a figure exemplifying the situation of being displaced to the position Q12 lowered by the distance LD, and in FIGS. 34 (B) and 34 (C), the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is from the position Q1 to the position Q11 and the position Q12. It is a figure which exemplifies the situation which a different effect is started according to each displacement position when it is displaced to any one.

As shown in FIG. 34 (B), during the variable display, for example, the reach state of "7" may be reached, and then the characters "PUSH!" May be displayed to prompt the player to perform the pushing operation. Yes, this indicates that an operation valid period has occurred in which the operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is valid. At this time, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises to the height of the position Q1. In this situation, when the player pushes the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 and reaches the position Q11 corresponding to about half of the section where the pushing operation is possible, the character CA13 with a fist appears and the player becomes a player. , It is shown that the expected degree of transition to the special gaming state is a variable display of medium (for example, 10%).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34 (C), even in the variable display in which the character is displayed, the character may not yet be displayed even when the position Q11 is reached as the operation amount of the pushing operation. When the position Q11 is exceeded and the pushing operation is continued to reach the position Q12, the character CA11 holding the sword may be displayed, and this control is performed on the sub-control board 940. The combination of the height position and the character is selected from a plurality of types as one of the modes of the effect for the variable display to be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a playability that triggers the execution of different aspects of the effect depending on the amount of the pushing operation.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of types of control in the case where the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed in and then returned after the operation surface is once lowered as an effect executed in the variable display.

FIG. 35 (A) shows the case where the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by a certain amount from the initial position and then the operation feeling is lightened so that the operation can be easily performed, and the operation is performed after the same fixed amount of operation. It is a figure exemplifying the case where the feeling becomes heavy. To control this operation feeling, the sub-control board 940 detects the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 by the encoder, and controls the electric power of the pressing operation device 1261 (motor 863) according to the height position. Is done by.

By providing a section having the same operation feeling in a certain section from the initial position, the player can experience as a feeling how much force the pressing operation device 1261 should be pushed in to operate. .. It is preferable that the section having the same operation feeling is set to half or less of the total movable range. Further, after the sections having the same operation feeling, it is preferable to provide a case where the operation feeling (strength of reaction force) becomes high (heavy) and a case where the operation feeling (strength of reaction force) becomes low (lighter). It is possible to make the player more easily aware that a plurality of types of operation feelings are set.

After the progress of the operation surface in a certain section, the sub-control board 940 executes the control to make the strength of the operation feeling different according to the degree of expectation. FIG. 35 (A) illustrates a case in which the operation feeling changes more heavily in the variable display having a higher degree of expectation. This variation display with a heavy operation feeling is preferably set to appear less frequently than the variation display with a light operation feeling, whereby the chance of an excessive load being input to the pressing operation device 1261 can be reduced. .. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to increase the feeling of operation when the degree of expectation is high, and the degree of expectation may be suggested to the player by other controls. For example, the length of the section with a heavy feeling of operation may be changed, or the degree of expectation may be suggested to the player by the pattern of the feeling of operation (the number of heavy sections in the pattern in which the heavy section occurs intermittently). May be good.

FIG. 35 (B) is a diagram illustrating the return position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 after the pushing operation in FIG. 35 (A), and the left side view shows the initial position before the pushing operation and the right side. The figure in the figure illustrates the height position (return position) in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 returns after the operation.

After the pressing operation device 1261 is operated, the height at which the operation surface returns changes according to the degree of expectation. FIG. 35B illustrates a case where the return position is higher in the variable display having a higher degree of expectation. It is preferable that the variation display having a high return position is set to appear less frequently than the variation display having a low return position. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to control the return position to be high when the degree of expectation is high, and the degree of expectation may be suggested to the player by other controls. For example, the number of operations when the operation surface moves up and down after the pushing operation is changed, or the faster the speed to return to the predetermined height position (for example, the initial position) is, the higher the expectation is. You may suggest to others.

Here, the control of the operation feeling of the pushing operation shown in FIG. 35 (A) and the control of the return position shown in FIG. 35 (B) do not necessarily have to be executed in combination. In the sub-control board 940, only the operation feeling of the pushing operation is different, and the operation after the pushing operation may be controlled to be common, or the pushing operation can be performed with the same operation feeling, and the subsequent return position can be set. The degree of expectation may be suggested by making them different, or the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be projected from the lowered state without being raised to the initial height position, and the difference in the degree of expectation may be different depending on the height position. It may be suggested to the player, and even if the weight of the player's hand fluctuates due to the pressing operation device 1261, the height position according to the degree of expectation can be obtained by controlling the power of the pressing operation device 1261 (motor 863). The operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be displaced so as to be.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player performs a pushing operation on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 arranged in the raised position as a predetermined neutral position. , When a variable display accompanied by a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) is executed on the decorative symbol display device 479 by the sub-control board 940, and then the combination of symbols according to the lottery result is stopped and displayed as the result display. A predetermined effect is executed when the operation surface is displaced to a different height position. That is, the sub-control board 940 has a control that causes a predetermined effect to appear when the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced to the first position having a small amount of movement with respect to the neutral position, and the position of the operation surface. A control for displaying a predetermined effect when the displacement is made to the second position, which is different from the first position and has been moved a lot (see FIG. 33). For this reason, it is difficult for the player to understand the correspondence between the operation amount and the effect to be executed, and it is possible to provide the player with a playability in which the opportunity for the same effect to be executed is associated with a plurality of types of operation amounts. it can.

Further, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to control the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the displacement control is used to execute a variation display accompanied by a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish). In the variable display, control to display a predetermined effect when the operation surface is displaced to the first position with a small amount of movement with respect to the neutral position, and the position of the operation surface to the second position different from the first position. A control for displaying a predetermined effect when the displacement is performed is executed (see FIG. 33). In this case, the player visually recognizes the height position by visually recognizing the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, or puts his / her hand on the operation surface and executes the operation amount while feeling the change in the height position. It is difficult to understand the correspondence with the trigger of the effect, and it is possible to provide the playability in which the trigger for executing the same effect is associated with the height positions of a plurality of types of operation surfaces.

Further, the sub-control board 940 provides control for displaying a predetermined first effect when the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced to the first position having a small amount of movement with respect to the neutral position, and the operation surface. When the position is displaced to the second position, which is different from the first position and moved a lot, the control for displaying the second effect different from the predetermined first effect is executed (see FIG. 34). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a playability that is expected to execute different effects set according to the amount of operation.

Further, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to control the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and by using the displacement control, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is set with respect to the neutral position. Control to display a predetermined first effect when displaced to the first position with a small amount of movement, and display a predetermined effect when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position different from the first position. The control to be output is executed (see FIG. 34). In this case, the player visually recognizes the height position by visually recognizing the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, or puts his / her hand on the operation surface and sets each according to the operation amount while feeling the change in the height position. It is possible to provide playability that is expected to be performed in different productions.

Further, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variable display including an operable period in which the pressing operation device 1261 can be operated during the variable display period, and a start prize of a special symbol is generated. When a specific variation display is selected and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is moved downward by a certain amount during the operable period, the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the fixed amount is moved is reduced. The control to set the first magnitude of the above and the control to set the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after moving a certain amount to the second magnitude larger than the first magnitude for different fluctuation displays. Execute. For this reason, the player is allowed to experience in advance how much force the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 should be pushed to operate the operation surface, and then the degree of operation feeling different from the feeling is given to the player. You can make it feel easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the difference in the operation feeling when a plurality of types of operation feelings are provided, and to accurately convey the information to be conveyed to the player by the difference in the operation feeling such as the change in the degree of expectation. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the player performs a pushing operation on the operation surface (operated portion) of the pressing operation device 1261 arranged at the raised position, the sub-operation is performed after the operation. By controlling the control board 940, the height of the operating surface is changed according to the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state).

That is, in the sub-control board 940, after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed, the position (height) of the operating surface is opposite to the operating direction (downward in the present embodiment) of the pushing operation. Control to display a predetermined first effect (for example, a variation display or a character display showing a predetermined degree of expectation) when the position is displaced toward the first position in the direction of (that is, upward in the present embodiment). When the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position (for example, a return position higher than the first position) different from the first position in a direction opposite to the operation direction of the push operation, the first position is obtained. A control for displaying a predetermined second effect (for example, a variable display or a character display having a higher expectation than the first effect) different from the effect is executed (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is provided to the player that after the operation on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, the player is expected to execute different effects set according to the return position (return amount) of the operation surface. Can be done.

Further, it is possible to control the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to be displaced, and by using the displacement control, the position of the operation surface is the position of the pressing operation after the pressing operation with respect to the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261. Control to bring out a predetermined first effect when displaced to the first position in the direction opposite to the operation direction, and the position of the operation surface is directed in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the push operation. When the vehicle is displaced to a second position different from the first position, a control for displaying a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is executed (see FIG. 34). In this case, the player visually recognizes the return position by visually recognizing the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, or puts his / her hand on the operation surface and sets each according to the return amount while feeling the change in the return position. It is possible to provide playability that expects the execution of separate productions.

In addition, in FIG. 35B, a variation display in which the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state) is different is executed according to the difference in the return position of the operation surface after the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261. Although the case has been illustrated, there are cases where the return position of the operation surface after the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 is a predetermined first position and a second position different from the first position (for example, a return higher than the first position). In either case, a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) may be executed.

That is, in a configuration in which the sub-control board 940 executes a variable display accompanied by a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) on the decorative symbol display device 479, and then stops and displays a combination of symbols according to the lottery result as a result display. After the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed, the position (height) of the operation surface of the sub-control board 940 is opposite to the operation direction (downward in the present embodiment) of the pushing operation. Control to display a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) when displaced to the first position in the direction of (that is, upward in the present embodiment), and the position of the operation surface is the operation of the pushing operation. It may be configured to execute a control for displaying a predetermined effect when the displacement is made to a second position (for example, a return position higher than the first position) different from the first position in the direction opposite to the direction. (See, for example, FIG. 33). In this case, it is difficult for the player to understand the correspondence between the return position (return amount) of the operation surface after the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 and the effect to be executed, and the player has an opportunity to execute the same effect. It is possible to provide playability associated with a plurality of types of return positions.

Further, when the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to control the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, the sub-control board 940 uses the displacement control to operate the pressing operation device 1261. After the pushing operation on the surface, when the displacement is made to the first position in the direction opposite to the operating direction of the pushing operation, a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) is displayed, and the position of the operating surface is the relevant. It may be configured to execute a control for displaying a predetermined effect when the displacement is made to a second position different from the first position in a direction opposite to the operation direction of the pushing operation (see, for example, FIG. 33). .. In this case, the player visually recognizes the return position by visually recognizing the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, or puts his / her hand on the operation surface, and while feeling the change in the return position, the return amount and the effect to be executed. It is difficult to understand the correspondence with the trigger of the above, and it is possible to provide the playability in which the trigger for executing the same effect is associated with the return positions of a plurality of types of operation surfaces.

<17th Embodiment>
Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 41. In the pachinko machine 100 of the 17th embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 including the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20) controls the operation of the pressing operating device 1261 according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860. Is configured.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to sixteenth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the 17th embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 in combination with any one of the above-described first to 16th embodiments or a plurality of configurations. However, the pachinko machine 100 may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to sixteenth embodiments described above. Further, a case where a plurality of types of patterns shown in FIGS. 36 to 41 are set as control conditions for the operating mechanism 860 in the pachinko machine 100 of the 17th embodiment will be described, but all of these patterns will be described. It is not necessary to configure the pachinko machine 100 to include the above, and the pachinko machine 100 may provide control corresponding to any one or more of two or more patterns.

In each of FIGS. 36 to 41, the sub-control board 940 applies the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to a predetermined pattern set as a condition for controlling the operating mechanism 860 (more specifically, controlling the motor 863). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to change. Hereinafter, each figure will be specifically described.

FIG. 36A is a graph showing an example of a pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860 (hereinafter, the pattern is also referred to as a “condition pattern”). The horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. That is, the condition pattern shown in FIG. 36 (A) is defined by the relationship between the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. In the following description, a pattern for controlling the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 by defining and controlling the position of the operating surface and the operating force will be described as a position-to-operating force control pattern.

The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is an operating force acting in a direction opposite to the direction of the pressing operation (pressing direction) with respect to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, in the pressing direction with respect to the pressing operation device 1261). It includes a reaction force that opposes the force) and an operating force that acts in the same direction as the pushing operation (hereinafter, the operating force is also referred to as an “escape force”).

In the pressing operation device 1261, the reaction force is generated by driving the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 in a predetermined rotation direction. On the other hand, the relief force is generated by driving the motor 863 in the direction of rotation opposite to the case where the reaction force is generated. Therefore, the sub-control board 940 can switch the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a reaction force or an escape force by changing the rotation direction of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860.

Further, the magnitudes of the reaction force and the relief force increase as the electric power supplied to the motor 863 increases. Therefore, the sub-control board 940 can change the magnitude of the operating force (reaction force, escape force) of the pressing operation device 1261 by changing the electric power supplied to the motor 863.

Further, the magnitudes of the reaction force and the relief force increase as the electric power supplied to the motor 863 increases. Therefore, the sub-control board 940 can change the magnitude of the operating force (reaction force, escape force) of the pressing operation device 1261 by changing the electric power supplied to the motor 863.

In the graph shown in FIG. 36 (A), the vertical axis indicates a reaction force among the operating forces of the pressing operation device 1261, and a positive value larger than zero indicates a reaction force with zero (0) as the origin, and a negative value smaller than zero. Indicates the escape force of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. The larger the absolute value of the reaction force and the escape force (that is, the farther away from the origin in the positive or negative direction), the greater the reaction force and the escape force.

On the other hand, on the horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36 (A), the position Bmax is the rack on the uppermost side (the most end side in the direction of the reaction force) of the movement range of the rack 861 with respect to the pinion 862 in the operating mechanism 860. The position of the operation surface when 861 is positioned is shown. The position Bmin indicates the position of the operation surface when the rack 861 is located on the lowermost side (the most end handle on the pressing direction side by the pressing operation) in the moving range of the rack 861 with respect to the pinion 862 in the operating mechanism 860.

FIG. 36A exemplifies condition patterns JA11, JA12, JA13, and JA14 as four types of position-to-movement force control patterns. Note that these condition patterns JA11 to JA14 are merely examples of condition patterns, and condition patterns of various shapes may be applied.

Each of the plurality of condition patterns JA11 to JA14 is associated with a predetermined situation (type of effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479). When one of the situations associated with the condition patterns JA11 to JA14 occurs, the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to the situation.

For example, each of the condition patterns JA11 to JA14 is associated with an effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, and when one of the effects associated with the condition pattern is selected as an execution target, the sub-control board The 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to the effect.

In the condition pattern JA11 (solid line), the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to the reaction force Ma1 or from the reaction force Ma1 to zero at the position Bmax, and the pressing operation device 1261 in the section between the position Bmax and the position Bmin. This is a pattern in which the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at a substantially constant reaction force Ma1 and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from the reaction force Ma1 to zero or from zero to the reaction force Ma1.

In the condition pattern JA12 (single point chain line), at the position Bmax, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to the reaction force Ma1 or from the reaction force Ma1 to zero, and is below the position Bmax and the position Bmax (position Bmax side). ), The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept substantially constant by the reaction force Ma1, and in the section between the position B3 and the position B2 below the position B3, the operating force at the position B3. Is the reaction force Ma1, and the reaction force changes substantially linearly with the change in the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 so that the operating force becomes the reaction force Ma2 larger than the reaction force Ma1 at the position H2, and the position B2 In the section between the position B1 and the position B1 below the position B2, the operating force is kept substantially constant by the reaction force Ma2, and in the section between the position B1 and the position Bmin, the operating force becomes the reaction force Ma2 at the position B1. The reaction force changes substantially linearly with the change in the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 so that the operating force becomes the reaction force Ma1 at the position Bmin, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes at the position Bmin. It is a pattern that changes from reaction force Ma1 to zero, or from zero to reaction force Ma1.

In the condition pattern JA13 (one-dot chain line having a wider pitch than the condition pattern JA12), the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to reaction force Ma1 or reaction force Ma1 to zero at the position Bmax, and the position Bmax and the position B3 In the section of, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept substantially constant by the reaction force Ma1, and in the section between the position B3 and the position Bmin, the operating force becomes the reaction force Ma1 at the position B3 and the operating force at the position Bmin. This is a pattern in which the reaction force changes substantially linearly so that becomes zero.

In the condition pattern JA14 (dashed-dotted line), the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 changes from zero to the reaction force Ma1 at the position Bmax, and the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is countered in the section between the position Bmax and the position B3. It is kept substantially constant by the force Ma1, the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 changes from the reaction force Ma1 to the escape force Mb1 at the position B3, and the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 changes in the section between the position B3 and the position Bmin. It is a pattern in which the escaping force Mb1 is kept substantially constant, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from the escaping force Mb1 to zero at the position Bmin.

36 (B) to 36 (D) show that the sub-control board 940 is in a situation where the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is lowered from the initial position (neutral position) position Bmax by the operation of the player. The case where the operating force (reaction force, escape force) of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled according to the set condition pattern (condition in which the sub-control board 940 controls the operating mechanism 860) is illustrated.

FIG. 36B is a graph showing an example of the displacement pattern of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in a situation where the position of the operation surface is lowered with the passage of time. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36B shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. In the position-to-movement force control pattern, it is the player who lowers the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the displacement speed and the displacement amount differ depending on the player's intention.

The displacement pattern JB11 (solid line) shows that when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is the position Bmax, the operation surface descends at a substantially constant displacement speed from time t1. It is a pattern that reaches the position Bmin at time te. More specifically, in the displacement pattern JB11, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 starts to descend from the position Bmax at the time t1 and reaches the position B3 at the time t2, and reaches the position B2 at the time t3. It is a pattern of reaching, reaching the position B1 at the time t4, and descending at a displacement speed such that the position Bmin is reached at the time te.

The displacement pattern JB12 (two-point chain line) shows that when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is the position Bmax, the operation surface has a substantially constant displacement speed from time t1. This is a pattern in which the displacement speed of the descent increases after descending to the time t2 and reaches the position Bmin at the time t3.

FIG. 36C is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a time-dependent change in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the set condition pattern. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36C shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Specifically, the motion force pattern JC11 (solid line) is a case where the condition pattern JA11 shown in FIG. 36 (A) is set, and the player can position the position of the operation surface on the pressing operation device 1261 in FIG. 36 (A). This is an operating force pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed down in accordance with the displacement pattern JB11 (that is, the pattern of lowering from the position Bmax to the position Bmin at a substantially constant displacement speed) shown in B).

According to the operating force pattern JC11, when the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JB11, the sub-control board 940 follows the condition pattern JA11 in the period from time t0 to time t1 at time t0. From time t1 to time t1, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force MaA is generated at time t1, the reaction force Ma1 is maintained from time t1 to time te, and at time te, the pressing operation device 1261 Set the operating force to zero.

Since a force in the direction of gravity (downward) is applied to the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 due to the weight of the pressing operation device 1261, the operation surface is maintained (held) at a predetermined height. Since it is necessary to generate a reaction force commensurate with the own weight, even when the operating force with respect to the pressing operating device 1261 is zero, the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 commensurate with the operating force is not zero and is positive. Must be the value of. In the following description, in order to facilitate understanding, the weight of the pressing operation device 1261 is not considered, and the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained when the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is zero. It will be explained as being done.

The moving force pattern JC12 (dashed line) is a case where the condition pattern JA12 shown in FIG. 36 (A) is set, and the player sets the position of the operating surface on the pressing operation device 1261 in FIG. 36 (B). This is an operating force pattern when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed to lower the displacement pattern according to the shown displacement pattern JB11.

According to the operating force pattern JC12, the sub-control board 940 is in the case where the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JB11, and is pressed from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the condition pattern JA12. The operating force of the operating device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, the reaction force Ma1 is maintained from time t1 to time t2, and a pressing operation is performed from the reaction force Ma1 to the reaction force Ma2 from time t2 to time t3. The operating force of the device 1261 is increased substantially linearly, the reaction force Ma2 is maintained from time t3 to time t4, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is substantially linearly increased from the reaction force Ma2 to the reaction force Ma1 from time t4 to time te. At time te, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is reduced to zero.

The moving force pattern JC13 (one-dot chain line having a wider pitch than the moving force pattern JC12) is a case where the condition pattern JA13 shown in FIG. 36 (A) is set, and the player can perform the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261. It is a pattern of the operating force when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed to lower the position according to the displacement pattern JB11 shown in FIG. 36 (B).

According to the operating force pattern JC13, when the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JB11, the sub-control board 940 follows the condition pattern JA13 and is the pressing operation device from time t0 to time t1. The operating force of 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, the reaction force Ma1 is maintained from time t1 to time t2, and the reaction force Ma1 is reduced to zero from time t2 to time te. The operating force is reduced almost linearly.

The moving force pattern JC14 (dashed-dotted line) is a case where the condition pattern JA14 shown in FIG. 36 (A) is set, and the player can position the position of the operating surface on the pressing operation device 1261 in FIG. 36 (B). This is a pattern of the operating force when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed to lower the displacement according to the displacement pattern JB12 shown in the above.

According to the operating force pattern JC14, when the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JB12, the sub-control board 940 follows the condition pattern JA14 and is the pressing operation device from time t0 to time t1. The operating force of 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the reaction force Ma1 is maintained from time t1 to time t2.

The sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb1 at time t2. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers (displaces the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 toward the pressing direction side), and the player hands his / her hand on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261. In a lightly placed state (that is, a state in which the operating surface is pressed by the operating force MpX), the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed of displacement from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t2 to the time t3. It is the size. As a result, when the relief force Mb1 is generated at the time t2, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at the time t3 as shown in the displacement pattern JB12.

Therefore, since the escape force Mb1 is generated at the time t2, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at the time t3, so that the sub-control board 940 is set at the time 3 as shown in the operating force pattern JC14. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero.

FIG. 36 (D) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a time-dependent change in the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36 (D) shows the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JD11 (solid line) is a displacement pattern JB11 in which the player shows the position of the operating surface on the pressing operation device 1261 when the condition pattern JA11 shown in FIG. 36 (A) is set. This is an example of a time-dependent change in the operating force of the pushing operation when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated (pushing operation) so as to descend according to (that is, a pattern of descending from the position Bmax to the position Bmin at a substantially constant displacement speed). ..

In the operating force pattern JD11, the operating force in the period from time t0 to time t1 is zero, the operating force changes (increases) from zero to operating force Mp1 at time t1, and the operating force in the period from time t1 to time te. Is the operating force Mp1, which is a pattern in which the operating force becomes zero at time te.

The case where "the operating force of the player's operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is zero" is not limited to the case where the player is not touching the operation surface, and the pressing operation device 1261 is placed in the initial position (for example, the position Bmax). ) Including the case where it cannot be pushed in.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 36 (B) to 36 (D), the operating force Mp1 is a value larger than the reaction force Ma1 in absolute value. Therefore, at time t1, the operating force by the player becomes an operating force Mp1 larger than the reaction force Ma1, so that the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 begins to be displaced in the pressing direction (pushing direction).

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA11 is set, the player causes the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to be displaced according to the displacement pattern JB11 (that is, a substantially constant pressing speed (positional speed of the operating surface in the pressing direction)). When the pushing operation is performed, the player feels the operation corresponding to the change in the operating force according to the operating force pattern JD11, that is, the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 descends from the initial position Bmax. From the beginning until the position Bmin, which is the end point of the pushing operation, is reached, it is possible to feel the operation feeling of operating with a substantially constant operating force.

The operation force pattern JD12 (dashed line) is a displacement pattern in which the player indicates the position of the operation surface on the pressing operation device 1261 when the condition pattern JA12 shown in FIG. 36 (A) is set. This is an example of a time-dependent change in the operating force of the pushing operation when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated (pushing operation) so as to descend according to JB11.

In the operating force pattern JD12, the operating force in the period from time t0 to time t1 is zero, the operating force changes from zero to Mp1 at time t1, and the operating force in the period from time t1 to time t2 is maintained at Mp1. , The operating force increases substantially linearly from Mp1 to Mp2 from time t2 to time t3, the operating force during the period from time t3 to time t4 is maintained at Mp2, and the operating force increases from Mp2 to Mp1 from time t4 to time te. It is a pattern in which the operating force decreases substantially linearly to zero at time te.

The operating force Mp2 is a value larger than the reaction force Ma2 in absolute value. Therefore, the operating force in the section from time t2 to time te is larger than the reaction force at each time, whereby the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed by the player's operation (pushing operation) from time t2 to time te. It can be moved in the direction.

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA12 is set as the control condition and the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 at a substantially constant pressing speed, the player responds to the change in the operating force according to the operating force pattern JD12. Operation feeling, that is, after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 starts to descend from the initial position position Bmax, the operation can be performed with the first operation force up to a certain position, but from the first operation force at a certain position. A large second operating force is required, and while operating with the second operating force, it is possible to feel a series of operational feelings such that the operation can be performed again with the first operating force at a certain position.

In the operation force pattern JD13 (one-dot chain line having a wider pitch than the operation force pattern JD12), when the condition pattern JA13 is set as a control condition, the player lowers the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 according to the displacement pattern JB11. This is an example of a change over time in the operating force when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed in an attempt to make the pressing operation device 1261.

In the operating force pattern JD13, the operating force in the period from time t0 to time t1 is zero, the operating force changes from zero to Mp1 at time t1, and the operating force in the period from time t1 to time t2 is maintained at Mp1. This is a pattern in which the operating force decreases substantially linearly from Mp1 to zero from time t2 to time te.

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA13 is set as the control condition and the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 at a substantially constant pressing speed, the player responds to the change in the operating force according to the operating force pattern JD13. Operation feeling, that is, after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 starts to descend from the initial position Bmax, it can be operated with a predetermined operating force up to a certain position, but the pushing operation is performed from a certain position to the position Bmin. You can feel a series of operational feelings such as the operational force required for the operation gradually decreasing.

When the condition pattern JA14 is set as the control condition, the operation force pattern JD14 (dashed-dotted line) is pressed by the player in an attempt to lower the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 according to the displacement pattern JB11 until the time t2. This is an example of a change over time in the operating force when the operating device 1261 is pushed in and then changed to a state in which a hand is lightly placed on the operating surface.

In the operating force pattern JD14, the operating force in the period from time t0 to time t1 is zero, the operating force changes from zero to Mp1 at time t1, and the operating force in the period from time t1 to time t2 is maintained at Mp1. , The operating force changes (decreases) from Mp1 to MpX at time t2, and the operating force is maintained at MpX from time t2 to time te. The operating force in a state where the player lightly puts his / her hand on the operating surface is defined as MpX.

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA14 is set as the control condition, the player performs the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 in an attempt to lower the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 according to the displacement pattern JB11 until the time t2. Later, when the player is changed to a state in which his / her hand is lightly placed on the operation surface, the player feels an operation corresponding to the change in the operation force according to the operation force pattern JD13, that is, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is at the initial position. After starting to descend from a certain position Bmax, at a certain position, the descending speed is larger than the previous descending speed, so that the hand on the operation surface also suddenly moves downward with the descending. You can feel the operation feeling that the hand placed on the operation surface does not catch up with the descent of the operation surface and separates from the operation surface.

In the operation force pattern JD14, a case where the hand is on the operation surface even after the time t3 when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin is illustrated, but from the operation surface at the time t3. It may be a pattern in which the hand is released.

36 (E) and 36 (F) show a situation in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from the position Bmin which is the initial position (neutral position) (that is, the hand operating the operation surface is pushed back upward. The case where the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the set condition pattern (the condition that the sub-control board 940 controls the operating mechanism 860) is exemplified. To do.

FIG. 36 (E) is a graph showing an example of the displacement pattern of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in a situation where the position of the operation surface rises with the passage of time. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36 (E) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The displacement pattern JE11 (solid line) shows that when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is the position Bmin, the operation surface rises at a substantially constant displacement speed from time t1. It is a pattern that reaches the position Bmax at time te. More specifically, in the displacement pattern JE11, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 starts to rise from the position Bmin at the time t1, reaches the position B1 at the time t2, reaches the position B2 at the time t3, and reaches the position B2 at the time t4. It is a pattern of rising at a displacement speed that reaches the position B3 and reaches the position Bmax at time te.

FIG. 36 (F) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a time-dependent change in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, which is controlled according to a condition pattern set for the pressing operation device 1261. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36 (F) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Specifically, the operating force pattern JF11 (solid line) is a case where the condition pattern JA11 shown in FIG. 36 (A) is set, and the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is shown in FIG. 36 (E). It is a pattern of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940 when the displacement pattern JE11 (that is, the pattern of increasing from the position Bmin to the position Bmax at a substantially constant displacement speed) is increased.

According to the operating force pattern JF11, when the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JE11, the sub-control board 940 is pressed according to the condition pattern JA11 in the period from time t0 to time t1. The operating force of the device 1261 is controlled to zero, the operating force of the reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, the operating force is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 during the period from time t1 to time te, and the pressing operation is performed at time te. The operating force of the device 1261 is set to zero.

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA11 is set and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises at a substantially constant speed (displacement speed of the operation surface), place a hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261. A player who presses the operation surface with an operation force smaller than the generated reaction force is in a position where the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is in the initial position by the operation force (reaction force) generated according to the operation force pattern JF11. You can experience the feeling of being pushed back by a substantially constant reaction force from the start of rising from Bmin until the position Bmax, which is the end point of the movement destination, is reached.

The operating force pattern JF12 is a case where the condition pattern JA12 shown in FIG. 36 (A) is set, and the player indicates the position of the operation surface on the pressing operation device 1261 with the displacement pattern JE11 shown in FIG. 36 (E). This is a pattern of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940 when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed in an attempt to raise the pressure according to the above.

According to the operating force pattern JF12, the sub-control board 940 is a case where the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JE11, and in the period from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the condition pattern JA12. The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled to zero, the operating force of the reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force is increased substantially linearly from the reaction force Ma1 to the reaction force Ma2 from time t1 to time t2. The operating force is maintained at the reaction force Ma2 during the period from the time t2 to the time t3, and the operating force is decreased substantially linearly from the reaction force Ma2 to the reaction force Ma1 from the time t3 to the time t4. The operating force is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 in the period up to te, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero at time te.

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA12 is set and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises at a substantially constant speed (displacement speed of the operation surface), place a hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261. A player who presses the operation surface with an operation force smaller than the generated reaction force causes the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to be in the initial position due to a change in the operation force (reaction force) generated according to the operation force pattern JF12. After starting to rise from a certain position Bmin, a predetermined first reaction force that pushes the operation surface back to a certain position is felt, but after that, the feeling of being pushed back gradually becomes stronger, and the operation surface is larger than the first reaction force. To experience a series of changes to the feeling that the operation surface is pushed back, such as the feeling of being pushed back by a predetermined second reaction force and the feeling of being pushed back weakened again while feeling the second reaction force that pushes the operation surface back. Can be done.

The operating force pattern JF13 is a case where the condition pattern JA13 shown in FIG. 36 (A) is set, and the player indicates the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 with the displacement pattern JE11 shown in FIG. 36 (E). This is a pattern of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940 when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed in an attempt to raise the pressure according to the above.

According to the operating force pattern JF13, when the position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JE11, the sub-control board 940 is pressed according to the condition pattern JA13 in the period from time t0 to time t1. The operating force of the device 1261 is controlled to zero, the operating force is increased substantially linearly from zero to the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t4, and the operating force is changed to the reaction force Ma1 during the period from time t4 to time te. It is maintained, and at time te, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero.

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA13 is set and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises at a substantially constant speed (displacement speed of the operation surface), place a hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261. A player who presses the operation surface with an operation force smaller than the generated reaction force causes the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to be in the initial position due to a change in the operation force (reaction force) generated according to the operation force pattern JF13. After starting to rise from a certain position Bmin, the feeling of being pushed back to a certain position gradually becomes stronger, and then the feeling of being pushed back with a substantially constant pushing back force can be experienced.

FIG. 37 (A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 37 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. In the condition pattern shown in FIG. 37 (A), when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is touched by the player's hand, the direction opposite to the pressing direction (pushing direction) (hereinafter, the direction). Is also referred to as a "return direction"), and then the operation surface moves in the pressing direction. In the following description, a pattern for controlling the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 by defining and controlling the elapsed time and the position of the operation surface will be described as a time-to-position control pattern. Note that the control of moving the operation surface according to the time-to-position control pattern is not limited to the case where it is applied to the control of the device that operates the operation surface as the operated portion that can be operated by the player, and instead of this, the player As an operating unit capable of contacting a part of the body of the player, the player may apply the control of an effect device for producing an effect of operating a part of the body in contact with the operation surface through the operation surface.

FIG. 37 (A) illustrates condition patterns JA21 and JA22 as two types of time-to-position control patterns. Note that these condition patterns JA21 and JA22 are merely examples of condition patterns, and condition patterns having various shapes according to control conditions may be applied.

Each of the plurality of condition patterns JA21 and JA22 is associated with a predetermined situation (type of effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479). When one of the situations associated with the condition patterns JA21 and JA22 occurs, the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to the situation.

For example, the condition patterns JA21 and JA22 are associated with the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, respectively, and when one of the effects associated with the condition patterns is selected as the execution target, the sub-control board The 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to the effect.

In the condition pattern JA21 (solid line), when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is the position Bmin, the operation surface starts to rise from the position Bmin at time t1. It is a pattern that starts descending from the position B2 after reaching the position B2 at the time t2 and reaches the position Bmin at the time t3.

That is, in the condition pattern JA21, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is from time t1 to time t2 regardless of whether the operation surface is touched by the player's hand or not. This is a pattern in which the moving direction of the operation surface changes to the pressing direction at time t2 after being displaced in the return direction during the period.

In the condition pattern JA22 (dashed line), when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is the position Bmin, the operation surface starts to rise from the position Bmin at time t1. , It is a pattern that reaches the position B2 at the time t2, is maintained at the position B2 during the period from the time t2 to the time t3, starts descending from the position B2 at the time t3, and reaches the position Bmin at the time te.

That is, in the condition pattern JA2w, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is from time t1 to time t2 regardless of whether the operation surface is touched by the player's hand or not. This is a pattern in which the moving direction of the operating surface changes to the pressing direction at time t4 after the position of the operating surface (position B2) at time t2 is maintained for a predetermined period after being displaced in the return direction during the period.

FIG. 37B is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a time-dependent change in the operating force of the player's operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 37B shows the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB21 shown in FIG. 37 (B), the player can push the pressing operation device 1261 at the time t0, and then at the time t1, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is touched. Press with the operating force MpX corresponding to the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface, and then continue the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface until time te, from the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at time te. Release the hand. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

FIG. 37 (C) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition patterns JA21 and JA22 shown in FIG. 37 (A). The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 37C shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC21 (solid line) is a case where the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB21 shown in FIG. 37 (B) when the condition pattern JA21 shown in FIG. 37 (A) is set. It is a movement force pattern of.

According to the operating force pattern JC21, when the condition pattern JA21 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB21, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t2.

In the example shown in FIG. 37, when the reaction force Ma1 is a value larger than the operating force MpX in absolute value and the operating force with respect to the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is MpX, the operation surface is set to the time t1. The operation surface can be raised at the same ascending speed as the ascending speed that is displaced from the position Bmin to the position B2 from the time t2 to the time t2. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmin from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA21, and from the time t1 to the time t2, from the position Bmin to the position B2. Ascend to.

The sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb2 at time t2. In the example shown in FIG. 37, the escape force Mb2 starts from time t2 when the player lightly puts his / her hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the operation surface is pressed by the operation force MpX). The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed of displacement from the position B2 to the position Bmin over time t3. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t2 to the time t3 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA21.

Since the escape force Mb2 is generated at time t2, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at time t3, so that the sub-control board 940 is set at time t3 as shown in the operating force pattern JC21. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero.

In the operating force pattern JC22 (dashed line), when the condition pattern JA22 shown in FIG. 37 (A) is set, the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB21 shown in FIG. 37 (B). This is the movement force pattern of the case.

According to the operating force pattern JC21, when the condition pattern JA22 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB21, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t2. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmin from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA22, and from the time t1 to the time t2, from the position Bmin to the position B2. Ascend to.

The sub-control board 940 changes the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a reaction force MaX at time t2, and maintains the reaction force MaX from time t2 to time t3. The reaction force MaX is set to have a magnitude substantially equal to the operating force MpX. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the position B2 during the period from the time t2 to the time t3.

The sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb1 at time t2. In the example shown in FIG. 37, the clearance force Mb1 is smaller than the clearance force Mb1 in absolute value, and the player lightly puts his / her hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the operation surface is placed on the operation surface). In the state of being pressed by the operating force MpX), the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed of displacement from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t3 to the time te. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from time t3 to time te and reaches the position Bmin at time te.

FIG. 38 (A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860. The horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 38 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. The condition pattern shown in FIG. 38 (A) has an operating force so that when the position (height) of the operation surface becomes a predetermined position (height), it is maintained at that position (height). It is a pattern including a control (hereinafter, also referred to as a constant position control) for outputting the above, and is defined by the relationship between the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261.

In the condition pattern JA31 shown in FIG. 38 (A), the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force (operating force) of the pressing operation device 1261 to be zero at the position Bmax, and the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force (operating force) of the pressing operation device 1261 to be zero. The control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a predetermined reaction force MaA. The control pattern in the section between the position Bmax and the position B2 may be the control by the position vs. motion force control pattern or the control by the time vs. position control pattern, and in FIG. 38 (A), the position. A case where the control by the anti-motion force control pattern is combined will be described.

The condition pattern JA31 is a pattern in which constant position control is performed at the position B2, and the sub-control board 940 sets the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a value in the range from zero to Ma2 with respect to the pressing operation device 1261. It is controlled so that the reaction force corresponds to the operating force. This fixed position control may be terminated when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the end condition includes the passage of time held at a fixed position, the passage of progress time from the start of the effect in the variable display, and the like. Alternatively, various settings can be made, such as an operation force of a certain level or more, input of a predetermined operation pattern, or the satisfaction of any of a plurality of conditions. It should be noted that, as the constant position control, it is not always necessary to control the position so as to be maintained at a single point such as the position B2, and the reaction according to the operating force with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 so that the position is maintained within a certain range. It may be controlled to output a force.

When the end condition of the constant position control is satisfied after the constant position control is performed at the position B2 as the condition pattern JA31, the subsequent control pattern is the time vs. position even if the control by the position vs. motion force control pattern is combined. Control by a control pattern may be combined. In the following description, a case where control by the position vs. motion force control pattern is combined will be described.

Regarding the control of the reaction force when the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is the position B2 in the condition pattern JA31, more specifically, the sub-control board 940 has an operating force of zero or more with respect to the pressing operation device 1261. If it is less than Ma2, the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled to be the same magnitude as the operating force, and if the operating force with respect to the pressing operating device 1261 exceeds Ma2, the pressing is performed. The reaction force of the operating device 1261 is set to Ma2, and the operating surface is controlled to descend. This Ma2 is set as, for example, a preset allowable maximum operating force so as not to cause a failure in the pressing operation device 1261, and suppresses an increase in the reaction force when an excessive operating force is input. The fixed position control is released, and the operation surface is lowered to protect the pressing operation device 1261.

FIG. 38B is a graph showing an example of a displacement pattern showing a change over time in the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the condition pattern JA31 is set. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 38 (B) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

As shown in the displacement pattern JB31 (solid line), the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from the time t0 to the time t1, and descends from the position Bmax to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t2. .. When the operation surface reaches the position B2, the height position is maintained at the position B2 by the constant position control.

After the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position B2 and at time t4, which is the end condition of the constant position control, the sub-control board 940 uses a plurality of types of time-to-position control patterns to form the pressing operation device 1261. Move the operation surface of. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 controls to generate a reaction force so as to descend at a predetermined descending speed like the three types of displacement patterns JB31A to JB31C or ascend like the alternate long and short dash line JB31D. ..

Here, the control of the pressing operation device 1261 by the sub-control board 940 other than while the constant position control is performed (time t2 to t4) is controlled by the position-to-operating force control pattern and the time-to-position control pattern. Since the control is described with reference to 38 and FIG. 39, the description thereof will be omitted.

At time t2, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the height position B2 for performing constant position control, and from this time, the sub-control board 940 performs constant position control and operates at zero or more and less than Mp2. A reaction force of the same magnitude as the operating force is generated with respect to the force.

FIG. 38C is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a time-dependent change in the operating force (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface) of the pressing operating device 1261. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 38C shows the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operation force pattern JC31 shown in FIG. 38 (C), the player presses the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with the operation force MpA from time t0 to time t1, and then presses with the operation force MpA. Continue until time t2a. When the player continues to press the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to the time t2a with the operating force MpA even after the time t2 when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position B2, the sub-control board 940 will be pressed at the time t2 or later. The reaction force is increased so that the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 stays at the position B2.

FIG. 38 (D) shows the time course of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 generated according to the condition pattern JA31 when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JC31 shown in FIG. 38 (C). It is a graph which shows an example of the motion force pattern. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 38 (D) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

As shown in FIG. 38 (D), the sub-control board 940 increases the reaction force from the current value of the reaction force MaA to a value having the same magnitude as the operating force MpA after the time t2. As a result, even if the player presses the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with the operation force MpA during the period from the time t2 to the time t2a, the operation surface remains at the position B2.

After the lapse of the time t2a, the operating force pattern JC31 illustrates a case where the player performs the pushing operation with a force larger than the operating force MpA because the operating surface cannot be lowered by the time t2a. Specifically, the case where the operating force of each pushing at the time tA, the time tB, and the time tC increases as the operating time becomes later is illustrated.

At each time tA, tB, tC, when the player performs a pushing operation (an operation of pressing the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 for a short time and immediately releasing the hand), the sub-control board 940 controls the position to the same magnitude as the operating force. The reaction force of the sword is generated. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 cannot be lowered, and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 remains at the position B2 as shown in FIG. 38 (B).

Here, after the time t2, when the pushing operation is performed by an excessive operating force (for example, operating force Mpe) exceeding a certain operating force Mp2, the sub-control board 940 releases the constant position control. Then, the operation surface is controlled to be lowered. By this control, the pressing operation device 1261 can be protected from damage or the like.

In the condition pattern JA31, when the player stops the pushing operation (that is, the hand is released from the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261), the reaction force is applied by an operating force pattern different from the case where the pushing operation is continued. Control may be performed by the sub-control board 940 so as to generate the power. For example, at time t1, when the player starts lowering the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 but the player stops the pushing operation before descending to the position B2, the constant position control is not performed. In addition, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be configured to return to the position Bmax, or when the player stops the pushing operation before descending to the position B2, the operation surface may be returned to that position. A control for changing the height position at which the constant position control is performed may be included so that the constant position control is performed.

FIG. 38 (E) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860. The horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 38 (E) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261.

The condition pattern JA32 shown in FIG. 38 (E) is a pattern in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 operates according to the displacement pattern JB32 shown in FIG. 38 (B), from the initial position toward the position where constant position control is performed. This is a pattern in which the operation surface is controlled to rise.

In the condition pattern JA32, at the position B2, the sub-control board 940 sets the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a value in the range from zero to Ma2 and becomes a reaction force corresponding to the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261. In the section between the position B2 and the position Bmin, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a predetermined reaction force MaA.

The control of the reaction force when the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in the condition pattern JA32 is the position B2 is the same as in the case of the condition pattern JA31. That is, when the operating force on the pressing operating device 1261 is zero or more and less than Ma2, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operating device 1261 to be the same magnitude as the operating force. When the operating force on the pressing operating device 1261 is Ma2, the reaction force of the pressing operating device 1261 is controlled by Ma2.

When the condition pattern JA32 is set, the sub-control board 940 controls the position of the operation surface so that the initial position of the operation surface (the position of the operation surface at time t0) in the pressing operation device 1261 is the position Bmin. After that, when the player keeps the state where the player lightly puts his / her hand on the operation surface (for example, the state where the hand is pressed by the operation force MpX) until the time t2a, the sub-control board 940 moves from the time t0 to the time t1. The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, and a reaction force is generated in the section from time t1 to t2 to raise the position of the operation surface.

When the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position B2, the sub-control board 940 starts constant position control. Regarding the control after starting the constant position control, the same control as that of the condition pattern JA31 can be performed, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 39A is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 39 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. The condition pattern shown in FIG. 39 (A) is a predetermined time (in the example shown in FIG. 39 (A)) after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 pushes back the player's hand in contact with the operation surface. , Time t4), the operation surface automatically moves in a predetermined direction when the hand is released from the operation surface, which is an example of a time-to-position control pattern.

In the condition pattern JA41 (solid line), when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is the position Bmax, the operation surface starts to descend from the position Bmax at time t1. It is a pattern that starts descending from the position B2 after reaching the position B2 at the time t4 and reaches the position Bmin at the time te.

In the condition pattern JA42 (dashed line), when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is the position Bmax, the operation surface starts to descend from the position Bmax at the time t1 and reaches the position B2 at the time t4. It is a pattern that later starts descending from the position B2 and reaches the position Bmin at the time t4b before the time te.

In the condition pattern JA43 (dashed-dotted line), when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is the position Bmax, the operation surface starts to descend from the position Bmax at the time t1 and reaches the position B2 at the time t4. This is a pattern in which the vehicle starts to rise from the position B2 and reaches the position B3 at time te.

FIG. 39B is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a time-dependent change in the operating force (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface) with respect to the pressing operating device 1261. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 39B shows the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operation force pattern JB41 shown in FIG. 39 (B), the player operates the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at the time t1 after the pushing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 becomes possible at the time t0. Pressing (pushing) with the force Mp1 is performed, and then the pressing with the operating force Mp1 is continued until the time t4, and the hand is released from the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at the time t4. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time t4.

39 (C) shows a change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 generated according to the set condition pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB 41 shown in FIG. 39 (B). It is a graph which shows an example of the motion force pattern which shows. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 39C shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC41 (solid line) of FIG. 39 (C) is the operating force pattern JB 41 shown in FIG. 39 (B) with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 when the condition pattern JA41 shown in FIG. 39 (A) is set. It is a movement force pattern when an operation is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC41, when the condition pattern JA41 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB41, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, the reaction force Ma1 is generated at the time t1, and then the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 from the time t1 to the time t4.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the reaction force Ma1 is smaller than the operating force Mp1 in absolute value, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1, the reaction force Ma1 is applied from time t1 to time t4. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed of displacement from the position Bmax to the position B2. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the condition set as the condition pattern JA41, and from the time t1 to the time t4, from the position Bmax to the position B2. Descend to.

The sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb1 as shown in the operating force pattern JC41 when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface at the time t4, and presses the sub-control board 940 from the time t4 to the time te. The operating force of the device 1261 is maintained at the escape force Mb1.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers (displaces the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 toward the pressing direction side), and the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 with respect to the operating surface is zero. In a certain case, the operation surface can be lowered at the same descent speed as the descent speed of displacement from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t4 to the time te. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t4 to the time te when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface according to the condition set as the condition pattern JA41.

The operating force pattern JC42 (dashed line) of FIG. 39 (C) is a pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB 41 shown in FIG. 39 (B) when the condition pattern JA42 shown in FIG. 39 (A) is set. It is an operation force pattern when the operation is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC42, when the condition pattern JA41 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB41, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 for a period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced in the same manner as when the condition pattern JA41 is set, according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA42. That is, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from the time t0 to the time t1, and descends from the position Bmax to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t4.

The sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb2 as shown in the operating force pattern JC42 when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface at time t4. In the example shown in FIG. 39, the relief force Mb2 is a force for lowering the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 and is a time from time t4 when the operation force for the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is zero. The operation surface can be lowered at the same descent speed as the descent speed that is displaced from the position B2 to the position Bmin over t4b (time before the time te).

That is, the lowering speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the relief force Mb2 is set is faster than the lowering speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the relief force Mb1 is set. The greater the magnitude of the escape force generated by the control of the sub-control board 940 after the time t4, the faster the descending speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 from the time t4 to the time te.

Since the escape force Mb2 is generated at the time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at the time t4b before the time te. At time t4b, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t4 to the time t4b when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA42.

The operating force pattern JC43 (two-dot chain line) of FIG. 39 (C) is a pressing operation device with the operating force pattern JB 41 shown in FIG. 39 (B) when the condition pattern JA43 shown in FIG. 39 (A) is set. It is an operation force pattern when the operation with respect to 1261 is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC43, when the condition pattern JA41 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB41, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 for a period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced in the same manner as when the condition pattern JA41 is set according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA43. That is, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from the time t0 to the time t1, and descends from the position Bmax to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t4.

The sub-control board 940 generates a reaction force Ma1A as shown in the operating force pattern JC43 when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface at time t4. In the example shown in FIG. 39, the reaction force Ma1A rises at the same speed as the ascending speed of displacement from the position B2 to the position B3 from the time t4 to the time te when the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 with respect to the operating surface is zero. It is a size that can raise the operation surface at a speed.

Since the reaction force Ma1A is generated at time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position B3 at time te, so that the sub-control board 940 presses at time t4b as shown in the operating force pattern JC42. The operating force of the operating device 1261 is set to zero. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from the position B2 to the position B3 from the time t4 to the time te when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface according to the condition set as the condition pattern JA43.

In the same condition pattern as the condition pattern JA43, which starts to rise from the position B2 after reaching the position B2 at the time t4, various climbing speeds may be applied as the climbing speed from the time t4 to the time te. .. As a result, depending on the inclination of the line segment from time t4 to time te in the condition pattern, the magnitude of the reaction force generated in the period from time t4 to time te in the operating force pattern may be, for example, before time t4 (more detailed). May be the same Ma1 as the reaction force (the period from time t1 to time t4), or may be a value greater than 0 and smaller than Ma1. The larger the magnitude of the reaction force generated by the control of the sub-control board 940 after the time t4, the faster the ascending speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 from the time t4 to the time te.

FIG. 40A is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 40 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. The condition pattern shown in FIG. 40 (A) is a predetermined time (FIG. 40 (FIG. 40)) after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 operates in the direction of pushing back (that is, upward) the player's hand in contact with the operation surface. In the example shown in A), when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface at time t4), the operation surface automatically moves in a predetermined direction, which is a time-to-position control pattern. This is an example.

In the condition pattern JA51 (solid line), when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is the position Bmin, the operation surface starts to rise from the position Bmin at time t1. It is a pattern that starts descending from the position B2 after reaching the position B2 at the time t4 and reaches the position Bmin at the time te.

In the condition pattern JA52 (dashed line), when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is the position Bmin, the operation surface starts to rise from the position Bmin at the time t1 and reaches the position B2 at the time t4. It is a pattern that later starts descending from the position B2 and reaches the position Bmin at the time t4c before the time te.

In the condition pattern JA53 (dashed-dotted line), when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is the position Bmin, the operation surface starts to rise from the position Bmin at the time t1 and reaches the position B2 at the time t4. This is a pattern in which the vehicle starts to rise from the position B2 and reaches the position B3 at time te.

FIG. 40B is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a time-dependent change in the operating force (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface) with respect to the pressing operating device 1261. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 40B shows the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB51 shown in FIG. 40 (B), the player can push the pressing operation device 1261 at the time t0, and then at the time t1, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is touched. Press with the operating force MpX corresponding to the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface, and then the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface is continued until time t4, and at time t4, from the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261. Release the hand. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time t4.

40 (C) shows a change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 generated according to the set condition pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB51 shown in FIG. 40 (B). It is a graph which shows an example of the motion force pattern which shows. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 40 (C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC51 (solid line) of FIG. 40 (C) is the operating force pattern JB 51 shown in FIG. 40 (B) with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 when the condition pattern JA51 shown in FIG. 40 (A) is set. It is a movement force pattern when an operation is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC41, when the condition pattern JA51 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB51, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, and the reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, when the reaction force Ma1 is a value larger than the operating force MpX in absolute value and the operating force with respect to the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is MpX, the operation surface is set to the time t1. The operation surface can be raised at the same ascending speed as the ascending speed that is displaced from the position Bmin to the position B2 from the time t4 to the time t4. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmin from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA51, and from the time t1 to the time t4, from the position Bmin to the position B2. Ascend to.

The sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb1 as shown in the operating force pattern JC51 when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface at the time t4, and the period from the time t4 to the time te. The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the escape force Mb1.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers (displaces the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 toward the pressing direction side), and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 with respect to the operation surface is zero. In a certain case, the operation surface can be lowered at the same descent speed as the descent speed of displacement from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t4 to the time te. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t4 to the time te when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface according to the condition set as the condition pattern JA51.

The operating force pattern JC52 (dashed line) of FIG. 40 (C) is a pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB 51 shown in FIG. 40 (B) when the condition pattern JA52 shown in FIG. 40 (A) is set. It is an operation force pattern when the operation is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC52, when the condition pattern JA52 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB51, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 for a period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced in the same manner as when the condition pattern JA51 is set according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA52. That is, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmin from the time t0 to the time t1, and rises from the position Bmin to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t4.

The sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb2 as shown in the operating force pattern JC52 when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface at time t4. In the example shown in FIG. 40, the relief force Mb2 is a force for lowering the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, which is larger than the relief force Mb1 in absolute value and with respect to the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261. When the operating force is zero, the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed of displacement from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t4 to the time t4c (time before the time te). is there. That is, the lowering speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the relief force Mb2 is set is faster than the lowering speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the relief force Mb1 is set.

Since the escape force Mb2 is generated at the time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at the time t4b before the time te. At time t4c, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t4 to the time t4c when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA42.

The operating force pattern JC53 (two-dot chain line) of FIG. 40 (C) is a pressing operation device with the operating force pattern JB 51 shown in FIG. 40 (B) when the condition pattern JA53 shown in FIG. 40 (A) is set. It is an operation force pattern when the operation with respect to 1261 is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC53, when the condition pattern JA53 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB51, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 for a period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced in the same manner as when the condition pattern JA51 is set according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA53. That is, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmin from the time t0 to the time t1, and rises from the position Bmin to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t4.

The sub-control board 940 generates a reaction force Ma1A as shown in the operating force pattern JC53 when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface at time t4. In the example shown in FIG. 40, the reaction force Ma1A rises at the same speed as the ascending speed of displacement from the position B2 to the position B3 from the time t4 to the time te when the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 with respect to the operating surface is zero. It is a size that can raise the operation surface at a speed.

Since the reaction force Ma1A is generated at time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position B3 at time te, so that the sub-control board 940 presses at time t4c as shown in the operating force pattern JC52. The operating force of the operating device 1261 is set to zero. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from the position B2 to the position B3 from the time t4 to the time te when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface according to the condition set as the condition pattern JA53.

In the same condition pattern as the condition pattern JA53, which starts to rise from the position B2 after reaching the position B2 at the time t4, various climbing speeds may be applied as the climbing speed from the time t4 to the time te. .. As a result, depending on the inclination of the line segment from time t4 to time te in the condition pattern, the magnitude of the reaction force generated in the period from time t4 to time te in the operating force pattern may be, for example, before time t4 (more detailed). May be the same Ma1 as the reaction force (the period from time t1 to time t4), or may be a value greater than 0 and smaller than Ma1. The larger the magnitude of the reaction force generated by the control of the sub-control board 940 after the time t4, the faster the ascending speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 from the time t4 to the time te.

FIG. 41 (A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 41 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

In the condition pattern JA61 (solid line), when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is the position Bmax, the operation surface descends substantially from time t1 to time te. It is a pattern that descends at a speed and reaches the position Bmin at time te, which is an example of a time-to-position control pattern.

In the condition pattern JA62 (dashed line), when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 is the position Bmax, the operation surface descends at a substantially constant descending speed from the time t1 to the time t3, and then the time t3. From time to time te, the pattern descends at a substantially constant descent speed different from the descent speed in the period from time t1 to time t3, and reaches the position Bmin at time te.

FIG. 41 (B) is a graph showing an example of an operation force pattern showing a time-dependent change in the operation force (that is, the pressing force on the operation surface) with respect to the pressing operation device 1261. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 41 (B) shows the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operation force pattern JB61 (solid line), the player presses the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with the operation force Mp1 at the time t1 after the pushing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 becomes possible at the time t0. After that, the pressing force with the operating force Mp1 is continued until the time te, and the hand is released from the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 at the time te. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operation force pattern JB62 (dashed-dotted line), the player can push the pressing operation device 1261 at the time t0, and then at the time t1, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is changed to the operation surface. Press with the operating force MpX corresponding to the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface, and then the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface is continued until time te, and at time te, the hand is pressed from the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261. Release. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operation force pattern JB63 (one-point chain line), the player can push the pressing operation device 1261 at the time t0, and then at the time t1, the maximum operating force is a substantially isosceles triangle shape of Mp1A. After performing the pushing operation of the time width Wp1 (the pushing operation corresponding to the pressing pattern FA1) with respect to the pressing operation device 1261, the hand is temporarily released from the operation surface, and the maximum operating force is exerted at time t2. A substantially rectangular pushing operation of Mp0A, in which a pushing operation having a time width Wp2 (a pushing operation corresponding to the pressing pattern FA2) is performed on the pressing operation device 1261, the hand is temporarily released from the operation surface, and at time t3, The operation surface of the hand is operated after the pressing operation having a time width Wp3 (the pushing operation corresponding to the pressing pattern FA3) is performed on the pressing operation device 1261, which is a pushing operation having a substantially equal leg trap shape in which the maximum operating force is Mp1A. At time t4, a trapezoidal pushing operation in which the maximum operating force was Mp2 and a pushing operation having a time width Wp3 (a pushing operation corresponding to the pressing pattern FA4) was performed on the pressing operation device 1261. Later, release your hand from the operation surface.

FIG. 41 (C) shows the condition when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by any of the operating force patterns JB61, JB62, and JB63 shown in FIG. 41 (B) when the condition pattern JA61 is set. It is a graph which shows an example of the operation force pattern which shows the time-dependent change of the operation force of the pressing operation device 1261 generated according to the pattern JA61. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 41 (C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC61 (solid line) shown in FIG. 41 (C) is the pressing operation device 1261 in the operating force pattern JB 61 shown in FIG. 41 (B) when the condition pattern JA61 shown in FIG. 41 (A) is set. It is an operation force pattern when the operation is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC61, when the condition pattern JA61 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB61, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, the reaction force Ma1 is generated at the time t1, and then the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 from the time t1 to the time te. The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma1 is smaller than the operating force Mp1 in absolute value, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1, the reaction force Ma1 is applied from time t1 to time t3. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed of displacement from the position Bmax to the position B2. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61, and from the time t1 to the time te, the position Bmax to the position Bmin. Descend to.

The operating force pattern JC62 (dashed line) shown in FIG. 41 (C) is pressed by the operating force pattern JB 62 shown in FIG. 41 (B) when the condition pattern JA61 shown in FIG. 41 (A) is set. This is an operating force pattern when an operation is performed on the device 1261.

According to the operating force pattern JC62, when the condition pattern JA61 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB62, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, the escape force Mb1 is generated at the time t1, and then the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is kept at the escape force Mb1 from the time t1 to the time te. The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers (displaces the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 toward the pressing direction side) and when the operating force with respect to the operation surface is MpX. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed of displacement from the position Bmax to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t3.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61, and from the time t1 to the time t3, from the position Bmax to the position B2. Then, from time t3 to time te, it descends from position B2 to position Bmin.

The operating force pattern JC63 (dashed line) shown in FIG. 41 (C) is a pressing operation device according to the operating force pattern JB63 shown in FIG. 41 (B) when the condition pattern JA61 shown in FIG. 41 (A) is set. It is an operation force pattern when the operation with respect to 1261 is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC63, when the condition pattern JA61 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB63, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero. Therefore, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61.

The sub-control board 940 generates the operating force of the pattern (reaction force pattern FB1) corresponding to the pressing pattern FA1 in which the maximum reaction force is Ma1A and the time width is Wp1 after the escape force Mb0A is generated at time t1. The relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept at Mb0A in the period from the time when the occurrence occurs and the time width Wp1 elapses from the time t1 to the time t2.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb0A is a force that lowers (displaces the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 to the pressing direction side), and the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 with respect to the operating surface is zero. In a certain case, the operation surface can be lowered at the same descent speed as the descent speed of displacement from the position Bmax to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t3. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma1A descends at the same descending speed as the displacement from the position Bmax to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t3 when the operating force with respect to the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is Mp1A. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at a speed.

Since the pressing pattern FA1 and the reaction force pattern FB1 have shapes corresponding to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is from the position Bmax to the position B3 from the time t1 to the time t2 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61. Descend.

The sub-control board 940 generates an operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FB2) having a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA2 in which the maximum reaction force is Ma0A and the time width is Wp2 at time t2, and from time t2. The relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0A in the period from the time when the time width Wp2 has elapsed to the time t3.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma0A descends at the same descending speed as the displacement from the position Bmax to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t3 when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is Mp0A. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at a speed. Since the pressing pattern FA2 and the reaction force pattern FB2 have shapes corresponding to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is from the position B3 to the position B2 from the time t2 to the time t3 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61. Descend.

The sub-control board 940 generates an operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FB3) having a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA3, which has a maximum reaction force of Ma1A and a time width of Wp3 at time t3, and starts from time t3. The relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0A in the period from the time when the time width Wp3 has elapsed to the time t4. Since the pressing pattern FA3 and the reaction force pattern FB3 have shapes corresponding to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is from position B2 to position B1 from time t3 to time t4 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61. Descend.

The sub-control board 940 generates an operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FB4) having a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA4 in which the maximum reaction force is Ma2 and the time width is Wp4 at time t4, and from time t4. In the period from the time when the time width Wp4 has elapsed to the time te, the escape force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0A, and then the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero at the time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, when the reaction force Ma2 is smaller than the operating force Mp2 in absolute value and the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp2, the reaction force Ma2 is applied from time t1 to time t3. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed of displacement from the position Bmax to the position B2. Since the pressing pattern FA4 and the reaction force pattern FB4 have shapes corresponding to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t4 to the time te according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61. Descend.

FIG. 41 (D) shows the case where the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by any of the operating force patterns JB61, JB62, and JB63 shown in FIG. 41 (B) when the condition pattern JA62 is set. It is a graph which shows an example of the operation force pattern which shows the time-dependent change of the operation force of the pressing operation device 1261 generated according to the condition pattern JA62. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 41 (D) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JD61 (solid line) shown in FIG. 41 (D) is the pressing operation device 1261 in the operating force pattern JB 61 shown in FIG. 41 (B) when the condition pattern JA62 shown in FIG. 41 (A) is set. It is an operation force pattern when the operation is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JD61, when the condition pattern JA62 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB61, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. After setting the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero and generating the reaction force Ma1 at the time t1, the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is kept at the reaction force Ma1 from the time t1 to the time t3, and at the time t3, After changing the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to the reaction force Ma0B, the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma0B from time t3 to time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma0B is smaller than the operating force Mp1 in absolute value, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is the operating force Mp1, the time is from time t3. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed of displacement from the position B2 to the position Bmin over t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62, and from the time t1 to the time t3, from the position Bmax to the position B2. Then, from time t3 to time t4, it descends from position B2 to position Bmin. In the operating force pattern JD61, the position of the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at time t4, so that the sub-control board 940 reduces the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 to zero at time t4. To.

The operating force pattern JD62 (dashed line) shown in FIG. 41 (D) is pressed by the operating force pattern JB 62 shown in FIG. 41 (B) when the condition pattern JA62 shown in FIG. 41 (A) is set. This is an operating force pattern when an operation is performed on the device 1261.

According to the operating force pattern JD62, when the condition pattern JA62 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB62, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. After the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero and the escape force Mb1 is generated at the time t1, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept at the escape force Mb1 from the time t1 to the time t3, and at the time t3, After changing the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to an escape force Mb1A, the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is maintained at the escape force Mb1A from time t3 to time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb1A is a force that lowers (displaces the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 toward the pressing direction side) and when the operating force with respect to the operation surface is MpX. The operation surface can be lowered at the same descent speed as the descent speed of displacement from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t3 to the time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62, and from the time t1 to the time t3, from the position Bmax to the position B2. Then, from time t3 to time 4, it descends from position B2 to position Bmin. In the operating force pattern JD61, the position of the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at time t4, so that the sub-control board 940 reduces the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 to zero at time t4. To.

The operating force pattern JD63 (dashed line) shown in FIG. 41 (D) is a pressing operation device in the operating force pattern JB63 shown in FIG. 41 (B) when the condition pattern JA62 shown in FIG. 41 (A) is set. It is an operation force pattern when the operation with respect to 1261 is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JD63, when the condition pattern JA62 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB63, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero. Therefore, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62.

After generating the relief force Mb0B at time t1, the sub-control board 940 operates a pattern (reaction force pattern FC1) having a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA1 in which the maximum reaction force is Ma1B and the time width is Wp1. A force is generated, and the relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept at Mb0B in the period from the time when the time width Wp1 elapses from the time t1 to the time t2.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the relief force Mb0B is a force for lowering the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and when the operation force for the operation surface is MpX, the position B2 is from time t3 to time t4. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed of displacement from the position to the position Bmin. Since the pressing pattern FA1 and the reaction force pattern FC1 have shapes corresponding to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is from the position Bmax to the position B3 from the time t1 to the time t2 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62. Descend.

The sub-control board 940 generates a reaction force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FC2) having a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA2, which has a maximum reaction force of Ma0C and a time width of Wp2 at time t2, and starts from time t2. The relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0B during the period from the time when the time width Wp2 has elapsed to the time t3.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb0B is a force that lowers (displaces the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 toward the pressing direction side), and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 with respect to the operation surface is zero. In a certain case, the operation surface can be lowered at the same descent speed as the descent speed of displacement from the position Bmax to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t3.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma1A descends at the same descending speed as the displacement from the position Bmax to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t3 when the operating force with respect to the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is Mp1A. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at a speed. Since the pressing pattern FA2 and the reaction force pattern FC2 have shapes corresponding to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is from the position B3 to the position B2 from the time t2 to the time t3 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62. Descend.

The sub-control board 940 has a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA3 in which the maximum reaction force is Ma1B and the time width is Wp3 after changing the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to an escape force Mb0C at time t3. The reaction force of the pattern (reaction force pattern FC3) is generated, and the escape force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0B during the period from the time when the time width Wp3 elapses from the time t3 to the time t4.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb0C is a force that lowers (displaces the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 toward the pressing direction side) and when the operating force on the operating surface is zero. The operation surface can be lowered at the same descent speed as the descent speed of displacement from the position B2 to the position Bmin from the time t3 to the time t4.

Since the pressing pattern FA3 and the reaction force pattern FC3 have shapes corresponding to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is from the position B2 to the position B1 from the time t3 to the time t4 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62. Descend. In the operating force pattern JD63, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at the time t4, so that the sub-control board 940 reduces the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at the time t4. To.

FIG. 42 (A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 42 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

In the condition pattern JA71 (solid line), when the initial position of the operation surface in the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is the position Bmin, the operation surface rises substantially constant from time t1 to time te. It is a pattern that rises at a speed and reaches the position Bmax at time te, which is an example of a time-to-position control pattern.

FIG. 42B is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a time-dependent change in the operating force (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface) with respect to the pressing operation device 1261. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 42B shows the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operation force pattern JB71 (solid line), the player hands the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to the operation surface at the time t1 after the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 becomes possible at the time t0. Is pressed with the operating force MpX corresponding to the lightly placed state, and then the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface (that is, the pressing with the operating force MpX) is continued until time te, and the operating surface is pressed at time te. Let go of. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operation force pattern JB72 (dashed line), the player can push the pressing operation device 1261 at the time t0, and then at the time t1, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 becomes the operation surface. The operation force corresponding to the state in which the hand is lightly placed is pressed by MpX, and then the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface is continued until time t3, and the operation force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is applied to Ma1 at time t3. After that, the pressing force with the operating force Mp1 is continued until the time te, and the hand is released from the operating surface at the time te. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operation force pattern JB73 (two-point chain line), the player can push the pressing operation device 1261 at the time t0, and then at the time t1, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is changed to the operation surface. Press with the operating force MpX corresponding to the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface, and then the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface is continued until time t2, and the pressure on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is strengthened at time t2. From time t2 to time te, the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 is increased substantially linearly from MpX to Mp1, and the hand is released from the operating surface at time te. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

FIG. 42 (C) shows the case where the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by any of the operating force patterns JB71, JB72, and JB73 shown in FIG. 42 (B) when the condition pattern JA71 is set. It is a graph which shows an example of the operation force pattern which shows the time-dependent change of the operation force of the pressing operation device 1261 generated according to the condition pattern JA71. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 42C shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC71 (solid line) shown in FIG. 42 (C) is the pressing operation device 1261 in the operating force pattern JB 71 shown in FIG. 42 (B) when the condition pattern JA71 shown in FIG. 42 (A) is set. It is an operation force pattern when the operation is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC71, when the condition pattern JA71 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB71, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, and after the reaction force MaX is generated at the time t1, the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force MaX from the time t1 to the time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 42, when the reaction force MaX is a value larger than the operating force MpX in absolute value and the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is MpX, the reaction force MaX is applied from time t1 to time te. The size is such that the operating surface can be raised at the same ascending speed as the ascending speed that is displaced from the position Bmin to the position Bmax. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmin from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71, and from the time t1 to the time te, the position Bmin to the position Bmax. Ascend to.

The operating force pattern JC72 (dashed line) shown in FIG. 42 (C) is a pressing operation device according to the operating force pattern JB72 shown in FIG. 42 (B) when the condition pattern JA71 shown in FIG. 42 (A) is set. It is an operation force pattern when the operation with respect to 1261 is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC72, when the condition pattern JA71 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB72, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero. Therefore, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmin from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

The sub-control board 940 generates the reaction force MaX at the time t1, and then keeps the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at the reaction force MaX from the time t1 to the time t3. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from the position Bmin to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t3 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

The sub-control board 940 changes the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to Ma1 at time t3, and then keeps the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 at the reaction force Ma1 from time t3 to time te. In the example shown in FIG. 42, when the reaction force Ma1 is larger than the operating force Mp1 in absolute value and the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1, the reaction force Ma1 is applied from time t1 to time te. The size is such that the operating surface can be raised at the same ascending speed as the ascending speed that is displaced from the position Bmin to the position Bmax. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from the position B2 to the position Bmax from the time t3 to the time te according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

The operating force pattern JC73 (dashed line) shown in FIG. 42 (C) is pressed by the operating force pattern JB73 shown in FIG. 42 (B) when the condition pattern JA71 shown in FIG. 42 (A) is set. This is an operating force pattern when an operation is performed on the device 1261.

According to the operating force pattern JC73, when the condition pattern JA71 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated by the operating force pattern JB73, the sub-control board 940 is operated from time t0 to time t1. , The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero. Therefore, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmin from the time t0 to the time t1 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

The sub-control board 940 generates the reaction force MaX at the time t1, and then keeps the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at the reaction force MaX from the time t1 to the time t2. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from the position Bmin to the position B2 from the time t1 to the time t2 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

The sub-control board 940 increases the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 from MpX to Ma1 substantially linearly from time t2 to time te. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from the position B2 to the position Bmax from the time t2 to the time te according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36 (A) to 36 (D), the sub-control board 940 is placed on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 by the player. On the other hand, in a pushing operation (pressing) situation, when the operation surface can be moved downward, which is the direction of the pushing operation, the reaction force in the pressing operation direction is a predetermined first condition (for example, a condition). The control controlled based on the pattern JA11) and the reaction force of a part of the section (for example, the section from the position B3 to the position Bmin) are controlled with respect to the first control when the control is set as the first control. The pushing operation direction (for example, the pushing operation direction (for example, the condition pattern JA12) is based on a predetermined second condition (for example, the condition pattern JA12) including a control section (for example, a section from the position Bmax to the position B3) that is common to the first control and is different from the first control. A control in which the reaction force in the pressing operation direction) is controlled (for example, a second control different from the first control) is configured to be at least feasible.

Here, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variation display including an operable period in which the pressing operation device 1261 can be operated during the period of the variation display, and in the specific variation display. When the pressing operation device 1261 is operated during the operable period, a plurality of effects having different expectations (expected degree of transition to the special gaming state) can be displayed, and each of the plurality of effects having different expectations. The condition patterns JA11 to JA14 are associated with the condition pattern JA11 to JA14, and the sub-control board 940 executes the first control among the plurality of effects having different expectations when the first effect is executed. May be configured to execute the second control when the second effect having different expectations is executed.

According to such a configuration, when the first effect or the second effect is executed in a specific variable display, the push-in is performed in at least a part of the sections in each effect (that is, the sections in which the conditions for controlling the reaction force are common). Since the player can feel the same reaction force as the reaction force in the operation direction, the player can feel the reaction force and determine whether the effect being executed is the first effect or the first effect. Is difficult to determine whether it is the second production with different expectations. For this reason, it is possible to provide playability in which the expectation of the effect executed in a specific variable display including a plurality of effects having different expectations is expected.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36 (A), 36 (E), and 36 (F), the sub-control board 940 is formed by the player pressing the operation device 1261. In a situation where the operation surface is pressed (pressed) downward, or when the player's hand (part of the body) is in contact with the operation surface, the direction opposite to the direction of the pushing operation (that is, , Upward), the reaction force of at least a part of the section in the opposite direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition (for example, condition pattern JA11). The condition for controlling the reaction force of a part of the section (for example, the section from the position B3 to the position Bmin) with respect to the first control is common to the control and the first control. The control is a control controlled based on a predetermined second condition (for example, the condition pattern JA12) in which the reaction force of the part of the section is different (for example, a second control different from the first control). At least configured to be viable.

Here, the condition patterns JA11 to JA14 are associated with each of the plurality of effects having different expectations, and the sub-control board 940 executes the first effect among the plurality of effects having different expectations. In some cases, the first control may be executed, and the second control may be executed when the second effect having a different degree of expectation from the first effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, in the first effect and the second effect that can be performed in a specific variation display, the reaction force is different in at least a part section in the opposite direction (direction opposite to the direction of the pushing operation). Since it is configured, in a situation where the player's hand (a part of the body) is in contact with the moving portion, or when the player is pressing the operation surface in the direction of the pushing operation, the said one. In the section of the section, it is difficult for the player to determine from the feeling of the reaction force whether the effect being executed is the first effect or the second effect having a different degree of expectation from the first effect. For this reason, it is possible to provide playability in which the expectation of the effect executed in a specific variable display including a plurality of effects having different expectations is expected.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36 (A) to 36 (D), the sub-control board 940 allows the player to press the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in a predetermined direction. When a pushing operation (moving operation) is performed along a certain downward direction, a reaction force acting in a direction opposite to the direction of the pushing operation (reaction force resisting the pressing operation device 1261) is generated according to the condition pattern JA14. A control in which the operation surface advances along the downward direction, and a direction in which the operation surface advances in the downward direction (direction in which the movement operation is performed) after the first control is performed when the control is set as the first control. ) Is configured to at least be able to execute a control for controlling the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 (for example, a second control different from the first control).

Therefore, the player feels a reaction force that resists the pushing operation while advancing the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 downward by the pushing operation (moving operation), and then the operating surface is controlled by the second control. By operating downward, which is the direction side of the pushing operation, it seems that the reaction force has become smaller, and in some cases, the operation surface (moving downward in the pushing operation direction) moves downward on the operation surface. The moving speed may be too fast, which may cause the hand performing the pushing operation on the operating surface to move away from the operating surface. As a result, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 by the player with respect to the operation surface, and it is possible to provide various game features using the pressing operation device 1261.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the sub-control board 940 is in a situation where a hand, which is a part of the player's body, is in contact with the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261. In the control (for example, from time t1 to time t2 performed according to the condition pattern JA21), a control for generating a reaction force capable of moving the operation surface in the upward direction, which is the direction opposite to the direction of the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261. Control of the section) and the direction in which the operation surface advances in the direction side (that is, downward) of the pushing operation after the first control is performed when the control is set to the first control. The control for controlling the operation (for example, the second control different from the first control, which is the control in the section from the time t2 to the time t3 performed according to the condition pattern JA21) is configured to be at least executable.

Therefore, the player can move the operation surface upward (in the direction opposite to the direction of the pushing operation) in a situation where a part of his / her body is in contact with the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261. After feeling the reaction force, the operation surface moved to the direction side of the pushing operation by the control by the second control, so that the reaction force felt smaller, and in some cases, the operation (direction of the pushing operation). The downward movement speed of the operation surface due to (movement to the side) may be too fast, so that a hand (a part of the player's body) in contact with the operation surface may be separated from the operation surface. As a result, it is possible to give a surprising feeling to the player from the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 which can move upward in the direction opposite to the direction of the pushing operation when the player's hands are in contact with each other. , Various playability can be provided by using the pressing operation device 1261.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (D), the sub-control board 940 allows the player to press the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in a predetermined direction. When a pushing operation (moving operation) is performed along a certain downward direction, a reaction force acting in the direction opposite to the pushing operation direction (reaction force resisting the pressing operation device 1261) is generated and along the downward direction. The control that the operation surface advances (for example, the control of the section from the position Bmax to the position B2 that is performed according to the condition pattern JA31) and the operation surface after the first control is performed when the control is the first control. Controls the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 so as to generate a reaction force held at a fixed position (for example, position B2) in the downward direction (the side in which the pushing operation is performed) (for example, the first control). It is configured to be at least feasible with a different second control (control at position B2 performed according to the condition pattern JA31).

Therefore, the player feels a reaction force that resists the pushing operation while advancing the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 downward by the pushing operation, and then the reaction force generated by the control by the second control causes the player to feel the reaction force. Since the operating surface is held at a fixed position in the downward direction (the side in which the pushing operation is performed), it is felt that the operating surface that has been advanced in a predetermined direction by its own pushing operation suddenly does not move. As a result, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the movement operation of the pressing operation device 1261 by the player with respect to the operation surface, and it is possible to provide various game features using the pressing operation device 1261.

In the condition pattern JA31 shown in FIG. 38 (A), in the second control performed after the sub-control board 940 performs the first control, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to a fixed position in the downward direction. The operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled so as to generate a held reaction force. However, in the second control, the reaction force in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is held within a certain range in the downward direction. The operation of the pressing operation device 1261 may be controlled so as to generate the above. According to such a configuration, the player can perform the pushing operation by his / her own pushing operation because the operation surface is held within a certain range in the downward direction by the reaction force generated by the control by the second control. Since it is felt that the movement of the operation surface that has been advanced in the downward direction, which is the direction, suddenly deteriorates, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the movement operation of the pressing operation device 1261 by the player with respect to the operation surface.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the sub-control board 940, the player's hand (a part of the body) comes into contact with the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261. In this situation, the operation surface is controlled to generate a reaction force that can move the operation surface upward (in the direction opposite to the direction of the pushing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261) (for example, according to the condition pattern JA31). Control of the section from position Bmin to position B2 to be performed) and the operation surface is held at a predetermined position (for example, position B2) after the first control is performed when the control is set to the first control. At least control that controls the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 so as to generate a reaction force (for example, a second control different from the first control and a control at the position B2 performed according to the condition pattern JA32) can be executed. It is composed of.

Therefore, the player feels a reaction force capable of moving the operation surface upward in a situation where a part of his / her body is in contact with the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and then the second control is performed. It is felt that the operation surface suddenly stopped moving because the operation surface was held in a predetermined position by the reaction force generated by the control by the above. As a result, it is surprising that the player feels from the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 that can move upward (in the direction opposite to the pushing operation direction) when a part of the player's body is in contact with the player. It is possible to impart sexuality and provide various playability using the pressing operation device 1261.

In the condition pattern JA32 shown in FIG. 38 (D), the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is held at a predetermined position in the second control performed after the sub-control board 940 performs the first control. The operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled so as to generate a reaction force, but in the second control, a reaction force is generated so that the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is held within a predetermined range. It may be configured to control the operation of the pressing operation device 1261. According to such a configuration, the player is in a situation where the player's hands are in contact with each other because the operation surface is held within a predetermined range by the reaction force generated by the control by the second control. It is possible to give a surprising feeling to the player from the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 which can move upward in the direction opposite to the direction of the pushing operation.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the sub-control board 940 is a pressing operation device 1261 in which a player's hand (a part of the body) and the pressing operation are performed by the hand. Operation control for operating the operation surface in the first embodiment when a predetermined movement operation in which the hand is separated from the operation surface is performed after the operation surface moves downward, which is the direction of the push operation (the operation surface). For example, control of the section from time t4 to time te performed according to the condition pattern JA41) and an operation of operating the operation surface in a second mode different from the first mode when the predetermined movement operation is performed. The control (for example, the control of the section from the time t4 to the time t4 performed according to the condition pattern JA42) is configured to be at least executable.

Therefore, depending on whether the former motion control (for example, the first motion control) is performed or the latter motion control (for example, the second motion control) is performed, the pushing operation is performed by the player's hand and the hand. When a predetermined situation occurs in which the player's hand is separated from the operation surface after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is moved downward, the operation mode of the operation surface can be changed. ..

For example, when a predetermined situation occurs in which the player's hand separates from the operation surface after the player's hand and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 performed by the hand move downward. , Condition pattern JA41 and condition pattern JA43, the operation surface can be moved to different positions (for example, different positions in the height direction such as position Bmin or position B3), or condition pattern JA41 and condition. As in the pattern JA43, the moving speed of the operation surface can be changed. As a result, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the movement operation of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 by the player, and it is possible to provide various playability using the pressing operation device 1261.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the sub-control board 940 is the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in which the player's hand (a part of the body) is in contact with the hand. In the first embodiment, when a predetermined situation occurs in which the hand is separated from the operation surface after being displaced upward, which is the direction opposite to the direction of the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261. The operation surface to be operated (for example, control of the section from time t4 to time te performed according to the condition pattern JA51) and the operation surface in a second aspect different from the first aspect when the predetermined situation occurs. (For example, the control of the section from the time t4 to the time t4c performed according to the condition pattern JA52) and the operation control for operating the above are configured to be at least feasible.

Therefore, the player's hand comes into contact with the player's hand when the former motion control (for example, the first motion control) is performed and when the latter motion control (for example, the second motion control) is performed. When a predetermined situation occurs in which the player's hand is separated from the operation surface after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced upward (the direction opposite to the direction of the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261). The mode of operation of the operation surface can be changed.

For example, when a predetermined situation occurs in which the player's hand separates from the operation surface after the player's hand and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in contact with the hand move upward, the condition pattern Like JA51 and condition pattern JA53, the operation surface can be moved to different positions (for example, different positions in the height direction such as position Bmin or position B3), or condition pattern JA51 and condition pattern JA53 can be used. As described above, the moving speed of the operation surface can be changed. As a result, it is surprising that the player feels from the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 that can move upward (in the direction opposite to the pushing operation direction) when a part of the player's body is in contact with the player. It is possible to impart sexuality and provide various playability using the pressing operation device 1261.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the sub-control board 940 corresponds to the sub-control board 940 when the operating force of the player with respect to the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is a predetermined magnitude. A predetermined reaction force that operates in a predetermined movement operation pattern (for example, a condition pattern JA61 that is a combination of a movement speed and a movement amount) is generated so that the operation surface moves downward, which is the direction of the push operation. When the operating force of the player with respect to the operating surface is different from the magnitude, the operating surface operates in the pattern of the moving motion, or the operation of the operating surface approaches the pattern of the moving motion. The control to generate a reaction force having a magnitude different from the predetermined reaction force is configured to be at least feasible.

Therefore, even when the player operates the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with an operation force of a predetermined size, when the operation surface is operated with an operation force of a size different from the predetermined size. Even if there is, the operation surface is directed downward (in the direction of the pushing operation) with a predetermined movement operation pattern (for example, condition pattern JA61) or a pattern similar to or substantially the same as the movement operation pattern. Can be operated. As a result, even if the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 with respect to the operating surface varies due to individual differences of the players, each player has the same or similar (substantially the same) pattern as the predetermined movement operation pattern. Since the operation surface can be operated downward, it is possible to provide any player with the playability of operating the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in the same or substantially the same pattern.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the sub-control board 940 is a player's hand (body) with respect to the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in the downward direction (predetermined direction). When the contact force with which (a part of) contacts is a predetermined magnitude, or when the operating force with respect to the operating surface in the downward direction is a predetermined magnitude, the operating surface is upward (predetermined). A predetermined reaction force that operates in a predetermined movement operation pattern (for example, a condition pattern JA71 that is a combination of a movement speed and a movement amount) is generated in a direction opposite to the direction of When the size is different from the above-mentioned size, the operation surface operates in the pattern of the movement operation, or the operation of the operation surface approaches the pattern of the movement movement, or the operation force is different from the above-mentioned size. Control to generate a reaction force having a magnitude different from the predetermined reaction force so that the operation surface operates in the pattern of the movement operation or the operation of the operation surface approaches the pattern of the movement operation. Is configured to be at least feasible.

Therefore, even if the contact force with respect to the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 by the player or the operation force with respect to the operation surface has a predetermined size or a size different from the predetermined size, the operation surface can be pressed. , A predetermined movement operation pattern (for example, condition pattern JA71), or an operation that is similar to or substantially the same as the movement operation pattern and is operated in the upward direction (direction opposite to a predetermined direction). it can. As a result, even if the contact force and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 with respect to the operating surface vary depending on the individual differences of the players, each player has the same or similar to the predetermined movement operation pattern (substantially the same). ) Since the operation surface can be operated upward with a pattern, it is possible to provide any player with the playability of operating the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with the same or substantially the same pattern.

The sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variation display including an operable period in which the pressing operation device 1261 can be operated during the period of the variation display, and an operation in the specific variation display. The sub-control board 940 is a specific sub-control board 940 when a plurality of effects having different expectations (expectations for transition to a special gaming state) are configured to appear when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated in a possible period. When a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the variable display, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 can move downward (direction corresponding to the pushing operation) at a predetermined moving speed. When the control for controlling the operation and the second effect having a different expectation from the first effect are executed as the effect in the specific variation display, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is different from the predetermined moving speed. The control that controls the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 so as to be able to operate downward at different speeds may be configured to be at least executable.

According to such a configuration, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 that operates downward (the direction corresponding to the pushing operation) depending on whether the first effect is executed or the second effect is executed in a specific variation display. Since the moving speeds of the above can be made different, it is possible to provide a playability that allows the player to estimate the expected degree of the effect executed in a specific variable display based on the moving speed of the operation surface.

Further, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variation display including an operable period in which the pressing operation device 1261 can be operated during the period of the variation display, and an operation in the specific variation display. The sub-control board 940 is a specific sub-control board 940 when a plurality of effects having different expectations (expectations for transition to a special gaming state) are configured to appear when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated in a possible period. When a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the variable display, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 can move upward (the direction corresponding to the direction opposite to the pushing operation) at a predetermined moving speed. When the control for controlling the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 and the second effect having a different expectation degree from the first effect are executed as the effect in the specific variation display, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to the predetermined value. The control for controlling the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 so as to be able to operate upward at a speed different from the moving speed of the above may be configured to be at least feasible.

According to such a configuration, the pressing operation that operates in the upward direction (the direction corresponding to the direction opposite to the pushing operation) in the case where the first effect is executed and the case where the second effect is executed in a specific variation display. Since the moving speed of the operation surface of the device 1261 can be made different, it is possible to provide a game property that allows the player to estimate the degree of expectation of the effect to be executed in a specific variation display based on the moving speed of the operation surface.

Next, as the control of the sub-control board 940 described above, a control example in which the control for the pressing operation device 1261 and the control for the decorative symbol display device 479 are combined will be described. Each of the controls described below may be combined with one or more of the controls described in each of the above embodiments, and of all controls in combination with each of the controls described below and the controls described in the above embodiments. , Any one of them may be set to the pachinko machine 100, or all the controls may be set to the pachinko machine 100.

First, as the control of the sub-control board 940, it may be configured to include a control in which the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261 is made different according to the gaming states set in a plurality of types.

Specifically, the operating force (anti-reverse) of the pressing operation device 1261 for the same display effect in the normal gaming state and the gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state (for example, the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state). The force) may be configured to be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 33, even if the operating force required when the "fish school" is displayed is controlled to be low in the normal gaming state, high in the time-saving gaming state, and even higher in the probabilistic gaming state. Good.

Further, the control of the sub-control board 940 may be configured to include a control in which the symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 and the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 operate in relation to each other. ..

For example, as shown in FIG. 7, when the decorative symbol display device 479 is composed of three rows of reels, the left and right symbols are the same symbol (reach symbol) except for the central symbol row during the variable display. In the reach state, the central symbol row that finally stops and the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be operated in relation to each other. In this case, in the reach state, the reach symbols may move up and down near the positions where the left and right symbols are lined up, and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may move up and down in synchronization with the movement. When the player pushes down the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in a situation where the reach symbols move up and down near the positions where the left and right symbols are lined up, the pressing operation is synchronized with (or interlocked with) the pressing operation. The reach symbol may be controlled to move downward.

Further, instead of the pressing operation device 1261 or in addition to the pressing operation device 1261, an operation unit capable of transmitting a reaction force to the player can be operated in the rotational direction, and the reach symbols are left and right. In a situation where the player moves up and down near the position where the symbols are lined up, when the player rotates the operation unit, the reach symbol may be controlled to move up and down in synchronization with the rotation operation.

Further, as a condition for making the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261 different (operation amount different condition), the sub-control board 940 may be configured to perform control including other conditions. Another condition for different operating powers may be the number of executions of the non-winning variable display executed from the winning of the lottery (big hit winning) related to the previous special symbol, or when the lottery related to the special symbol is won. It may be the magnitude of the game value given to the player (for example, the number of rounds in the special game state set in a plurality of types).

Further, as the operating force different condition, the operating force may be different depending on the types of symbols set to a plurality of types used for the variable display (for example, the numbers from "1" to "9"), or the operating force is an odd number. The operating force may be different depending on the type such as whether it is an even number or an even number. Further, as the operating force difference condition, the operating force may be different depending on the type of the character set to a plurality of types displayed along with the variable display and the belongings of the character.

Further, as the control of the sub-control board 940, instead of or in addition to the control of making the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operating device 1261 different, the operation (operation) of the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is performed. It may be configured to include controls for different speeds (operating speeds), operating amounts (operating amounts), operational availability (operation presence / absence), etc.). For example, when the effect of displaying a character imitating an adult male is executed along with the variable display, a large hand is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 together with the reach symbol, and the reach symbol is moved. When it is possible to operate and the effect of displaying a character imitating a girl is executed along with the variable display, a small hand is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 together with the reach symbol. The reaction force may be controlled to be large so that the reach symbol cannot be moved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

(1) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the First Embodiment In the first embodiment, the configuration according to the first embodiment is applied to the symbol sheet 601. However, the configuration according to the first embodiment is applied. May be applied to the resin product. For example, a transparent resin plate, a layer containing a predetermined pattern or pattern corresponding to a decorative pattern 621 having a coating film formed or arranged on one side (back side) of the transparent resin plate, and the transparent resin. A resin product comprising a layer corresponding to a decorative portion 622, which is on the other surface side (front surface side) of the plate and has a coating film formed or arranged on the peripheral side of the predetermined pattern or the pattern, relates to the first embodiment. It may be a resin product to which the structure is applied.

In the first embodiment, the design sheet 601 has a configuration in which the decorative portion 622 does not overlap the peripheral edge of the decorative symbol 621 in the front view, but the decorative portion 622 overlaps the peripheral edge side of the decorative symbol 621 in the front view. There may be.

In the first embodiment, the design sheet 601 is configured to form the decorative portion 622 in almost all the regions except the region where the decorative symbol 621 is formed on the surface side of the base material 611, but it is not always the case. It is not necessary to form the decorative portion 622 in almost all areas. For example, it may be configured to form a band-shaped decorative portion 622 along the whole or a part of the periphery of the decorative pattern 621.

In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the symbol sheet 601 has the decorative symbol 621 using the decorative portion 622 has been described, but the decoration by the decorative portion 622 is not limited to the symbol, and the character or model name used in the model is used. It may be used for decoration for other patterns such as display, and the decorative portion 622 may be formed not only by a thin plate-shaped sheet but also by a resin part having a thickness and being moldable by a mold. Further, the decorative portion 622 is configured by using ink that can be visually recognized in the predetermined situation described in the second embodiment, and the peripheral side of the pattern reflects light in the predetermined situation. It may be configured to be easy to use.

In the first embodiment, in the symbol sheet 601, only the decorative symbol 621 (main symbol 621A, sub symbol 621B) is formed as a coating film on the back surface side of the base material 611, but not only the decorative symbol 621 but also the decorative symbol 621. A coating film may be formed on the back surface side of the base material 611 including the background portion of the decorative pattern 621.

(2) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the Second Embodiment In the above second embodiment, a pattern (for example, a pattern 701) that can be visually recognized under a predetermined light such as a flash light and heating. Alternatively, a pattern (for example, a pattern 721A) that can be visually recognized under warmed conditions is provided on the design sheet 601. However, even if one of the patterns is provided on the design sheet 601. Good.

Further, in the third embodiment, either a pattern that can be visually recognized under a predetermined light such as a flash light or a pattern that can be visually recognized under a heated or heated condition is illustrated. The symbol sheet 601 may be provided with a pattern that can be visually recognized under the condition of being irradiated with black light. In addition, a pattern that can be visually recognized under a predetermined light such as a flash light, a pattern that can be visually recognized under a heated or heated condition, and a pattern that can be visually recognized under a black light irradiation condition can be visually recognized. The design may be provided on the design sheet 601.

In the second embodiment, the pattern becomes visible (that is, changes from an invisible mode to a visible mode) under a condition of being exposed to a predetermined light such as a flash light or under a heated or heated condition. Is provided on the design sheet 601. However, under the condition of shining a predetermined light such as flash light or under the condition of being heated or heated, the design of the mode (for example, color or reflectivity) corresponding to the situation is given. May be visible. For example, in a situation where a pattern is formed using ink that changes from a first color (for example, blue) to a second color (for example, red) when heated or heated, and heated or heated. It may be configured so that the pattern of the mode (that is, the second color) corresponding to the situation can be visually recognized.

In the second embodiment, a pattern (for example, a pattern 701) that becomes visible under a condition in which a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied to the surface side of the base material 611, or a state in which the base material 611 is heated or heated. Although the configuration is such that the patterns (for example, the pattern 721A) that can be visually recognized below are formed, these patterns may be formed on the back surface side of the base material 611. When these patterns are formed on the back surface side of the base material 611, the pattern may be formed on the back surface side of the base material 611, and then the decorative pattern 621 may be formed on the pattern.

In the second embodiment, the configuration according to the second embodiment is applied to the design sheet 601 in which the decorative portion 622 is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611, but the surface side of the base material 611 is decorated. The configuration according to the second embodiment may be applied to the symbol sheet 601 on which the portion 622 is formed. When the configuration according to the second embodiment is applied to the design sheet 601 in which the decorative portion 622 is formed on the surface side of the base material 611, after the decorative portion 622 is formed on the surface side of the base material 611, the decorative portion 622 is formed. On top of this, a pattern that can be seen under a predetermined light such as flash light (for example, picture 701) or a picture that can be seen under heating or heating (for example, picture 721A, etc.) ) May be formed.

In the second embodiment, the case where a pattern (for example, a pattern 701) that becomes visible under a predetermined situation is applied to the design sheet 601 has been described, but the central structure attached to the game board 400 has been described. It may be applied to other parts such as a decorative part such as 420, or to other parts constituting the front part of the pachinko machine 100 such as at least a part of the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. It may be applied. That is, as a mode changing portion that makes the mode of the predetermined surface portion visible in different modes depending on the situation, a pattern that becomes visible when the predetermined situation is reached may be added. Further, it is not always necessary to directly add a pattern (for example, a pattern 701) that can be visually recognized under a predetermined situation to the symbol sheet 601, and another member overlapping the front side of the symbol sheet 601. A pattern (for example, a pattern 701) that becomes visible when a predetermined situation is reached may be added to the object, and for example, a slightly larger cylindrical shape is formed on the outside of each reel constituting the pattern sheet 601. The rotating body of the above is molded from a transparent resin and placed on the outside of each reel, a pattern 701 or the like is added to the rotating body, and a mechanism for rotating the rotating body by a sub-control board 940 is provided. The arrangement position of the design 701 or the like may be changed with respect to the design displayed in.

(3) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the Third Embodiment In the above third embodiment, among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1, the number corresponding to the numerical value "7". A symbol 741A is provided around the main symbol 621A containing information, and among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the right symbol row Z2, the periphery of the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9". 741B is provided in the main symbol 741B, and among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the middle symbol row Z3, the symbol 741C is provided around the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8". , The game mode currently set by the combination of the specific main symbols 621A can be suggested.

Instead of this, a pattern similar to the pattern 741A or the like is provided around a predetermined sub-symbol 621B provided on each symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, whereby the sub-symbol corresponding to the symbol is provided. The configuration may be such that the game mode currently set by the combination of the symbols 621B can be suggested.

In the third embodiment, the game mode currently set by the combination of the specific main symbols 621A can be suggested, but instead of or in addition to this, heating or heating is performed. By forming predetermined characters and symbols on the symbol sheet 601 as patterns that can be visually recognized under the circumstances, and displaying the characters and symbols according to the set game mode so as to be visible by heating or heating. A configuration capable of suggesting a set game mode may be adopted.

In the third embodiment, the game mode currently set is suggested by using a pattern that can be visually recognized in a heated or heated situation, but instead of this, a predetermined flash light or the like is used. It may be configured to suggest a game mode currently set by using a pattern that can be visually recognized under the condition of being exposed to the light of the above, or a pattern that can be visually recognized under the condition of irradiating the black light. Alternatively, a pattern that becomes visible under heating or heating, a pattern that becomes visible under a predetermined light such as a flash light, or a pattern that becomes visible under a black light irradiation. Two or three of these patterns may be used to suggest the currently set game mode.

(4) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the Fourth Embodiment In the above fourth embodiment, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is provided over the entire circumference of the peripheral side (outer side) of the decorative lens portion 786. However, if the peripheral decorative portion 788 is provided on one side of the decorative lens portion 786, the peripheral decorative portion 788 is not necessarily provided over the entire circumference of the decorative lens portion 786 on the peripheral side. It is not necessary, and for example, it may be provided in a partial section (for example, the lower half) on the peripheral side of the decorative lens portion 786.

In the fourth embodiment, the protruding portion 787 is provided between the exposed portion of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view, but the protruding portion 787 is not provided. Therefore, in front view, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 may be adjacent to each other.

In the fourth embodiment, the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2 are adjacent to each other, but the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2 are close to each other, that is, direct light. There may be a configuration in which a region does not pass between the transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2, neither the direct light from the light emitting body 782 nor the specific reflected light by the reflection film portion 790B.

In the fourth embodiment, a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 does not enter the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and is outward from the peripheral side decorative portion 788 (that is, the reflected light). The configuration is such that the light travels as light that is directly visible to the player in the transmission region X2 (outside the transmission region X2), but the specific reflected light does not travel outward from the peripheral decorative portion 788 (that is, the player directly travels). The reflective component 790 may be provided so that the light does not travel as visible light).

In the fourth embodiment, the reflective component 790 is arranged so that a part of the reflective component 790 does not overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 in the front view (that is, the non-overlapping region X3 exists). , The reflective parts 790 may be arranged so that all of them overlap the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view (that is, arranged so that the non-overlapping region X3 does not exist). Alternatively, the entire reflective film portion 790B may be provided so as to overlap the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view.

In the fourth embodiment, the light passing through the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 is the light (direct light or specific reflected light) corresponding to the light output from the light emitter 782. However, the light passing through the reflected light transmission region X2 corresponds to the light output from a light source different from the light directly passing through the light transmission region X1 (for example, a light source such as a full-color LED similar to the light emitter 782). It may be light. For example, a light emitting means different from the light emitting body 782, on the upper side of the reflective film portion 790B, a position where the output light can be reflected by the reflective film portion 790B and the reflected light can pass at least through the reflected light transmitting region X2. It may be provided in.

In the fourth embodiment, after being output from the light emitting body 782, the light is reflected on the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788, and then the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 passes through the reflected light transmitting region X2. Although it is configured to pass through, the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 and passing through the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 without entering the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is passed through the reflective film portion 790B. A reflective portion that can be reflected toward the surface may be provided, and the reflected light from the reflective portion may be reflected by the reflective film portion 790B and enter the reflected light transmitting region X2 to pass therethrough.

(5) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the Fifth Embodiment In the above fifth embodiment, when a predetermined reach display (specifically, a reach display consisting of an odd number) is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621. Is a reach that cannot appear in the predetermined reach display, while the first suggestion effect in which a character capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state appears can be executed (selectable) with a predetermined probability. When the display (specifically, the reach display consisting of even numerical values) is displayed, it corresponds to (corresponds to) a cut-out image including a part of the character cut out from the moving image data of the first suggestion effect. The configuration in which the second suggestion effect in which the image appears can be executed (selectable) with a predetermined probability is illustrated.

As a suggestive effect that can be executed when a predetermined reach display (for example, a reach display consisting of an odd number) is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621 in place of or in addition to the configuration, the special gaming state is entered. After the appearance of an image containing a part of the character that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition of, the effect develops and finally the whole image of the character appears. Any of the suggestion effects in which the overall image of the character appears without appearing may be selected according to the selection probability preset for each suggestion effect.

Even in such a modified example, the moving image data corresponding to the suggestion effect in which the entire image of the character appears without the image including a part of the character appear is diverted to suggest the character to be developed in the suggestion effect. Since an image that can be used as an image (that is, an image that includes a part of the character) can be generated, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion effect while suppressing the cost for developing an image that suggests the character to be developed. ..

In addition, when the right of the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is reserved in place of or in addition to the above configuration, a lottery of the special symbol for the reservation is reserved. Based on the result, an effect of pre-reading and notifying a specific game state (for example, a special game state) that occurs after one or more variable display is executed (hereinafter, the effect is also referred to as "pre-read effect"). In the configuration, an image including a part of a character that can appear in the variable display to be read ahead and can suggest the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a specific gaming state may be displayed. Also in such a modified example, the image used for the look-ahead effect (that is, the character) by diverting the video data corresponding to the effect (suggestion effect) in which the character capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a specific gaming state appears. Since it is possible to generate an image including a part of the above, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect while suppressing the cost for developing the image for the look-ahead effect.

In the fifth embodiment, the image generated based on the image cut out from the moving image data of the first suggestion effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol appears in the second suggestion effect. The image to appear in the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be generated based on the moving image data of the effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol as in the first suggestion effect. For example, a big hit effect in which an image to appear in an effect such as a second suggestion effect is displayed during a special gaming state, or a so-called demo displayed when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player. The configuration may be such that it is generated based on an image cut out from the moving image data of the effect or the moving image that is displayed other than the variable display of the special symbol such as the moving image on the screen.

In addition, based on an image generated based on a cut-out image from the video data of the first suggestion effect, an effect displayed other than the variable display of a special symbol such as a big hit effect, or a cut-out image from the video data of the video. It is not always necessary to make the generated image appear in the effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol such as the second suggestion effect. For example, it may appear on the demo screen or a special effect such as a big hit effect. It may be configured to appear in an effect displayed other than the variable display of the symbol.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, a plurality of cut-out images (for example, each part of the regions AR1, AR2, AR3) cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect are cut out. Although the image corresponding to the image) is displayed, the number of images cut out from the frame image in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be a plurality, and may be one.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, an image (for example, images 821, 822, 823) corresponding to an image cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect appears. Although it is configured, the cutout image used for the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be an image cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect, and the cutout image of a plurality of frames in the moving image data. It may be an image cut out from each image. In such a case, in the second suggestion effect, an image corresponding to an image cut out from an image of a different frame may appear at the same time.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, an image (for example, images 821, 822) including a part of the characters that can appear in the first suggestion effect generated from the moving image data of the first suggestion effect. , 823), but the background data common to the second suggestion effect is prepared regardless of the type of character, and the background data includes an image containing a part of the character. May be good.

In the fifth embodiment, an image generated based on a cutout image from the moving image data of the first suggestion effect is displayed in the second suggestion effect, but an image corresponding to the cutout image is prepared in advance. The configuration may be such that the data is stored in the sub-control board 940. Even in such a modified example, it is easy to reduce the need to develop the moving image data used for the second suggestion effect, and the development cost can be suppressed accordingly.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, an image (for example, images 821, 822, 823) corresponding to an image cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect appears. Although it is configured, the cutout image used for the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be an image cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect, and the cutout image of a plurality of frames in the moving image data. It may be an image cut out from each image. In such a case, in the second suggestion effect, an image corresponding to an image cut out from an image of a different frame may appear at the same time.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, all the images (for example, images 821, 822, 823) corresponding to the image cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect are simultaneously displayed. Although the configuration is set to appear, it is not always necessary to display the images corresponding to all the cropped images at the same time. For example, there may be a configuration in which images corresponding to a plurality of cropped images are sequentially displayed one or a plurality at a time, or a configuration in which these images are divided into a plurality of groups and each group is sequentially switched and displayed. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the cutout image is generated from the image of the frame constituting the moving image data of the first suggestion effect, but the cutout image is generated from the still image data used for the first suggestion effect. There may be.

In the fifth embodiment, each region to be cut out in the image of the frame constituting the moving image data of the first suggestion effect has the same position regardless of the character type (for example, characters CA1, CA2, CA3). Although the configuration is set to the same size, the position and size of the area to be cut out in the frame image may be different for each type of character.

In the fifth embodiment, the image appearing in the second suggestion effect (an image including a part of the character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state) is 1 in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect. An example is shown in the case where the image cut out from the image of the frame is an image (for example, images 821, 822, 823) that has been subjected to processing such as deformation and enlargement / reduction. The image that appears in the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be a processed cut-out image, and is cut out from an unprocessed cut-out image (that is, an image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect). Image) may be used. Further, the image displayed in the second suggestion effect may have a configuration in which an unprocessed cutout image and a processed cutout image are mixed.

In the fifth embodiment, the deformation and enlargement / reduction of the image are exemplified as the processing to be applied to the cut-out image, but the cut-out image may be processed to give a predetermined effect such as blurring or mosaic. In addition, when a cut-out image to which a predetermined effect is given appears in the second suggestion effect, the effect diminishes with the passage of time (that is, it returns to the original cut-out image). You may.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, when a plurality of processed cutout images (images corresponding to the cutout images) are simultaneously configured in the second suggestion effect, the processed cutout image of 1 is used. An example is illustrated in which the other processed cutout image of 1 partially overlaps (for example, a part of the image 822 and a part of the image 821 overlap). The configuration may be such that a plurality of processed cutout images of the above are overlapped. Further, at least one of the plurality of processed cutout images may be completely invisible due to overlapping with other images.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the character appearing in the first suggestion effect suggests the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is illustrated, but the content suggested by the character is not necessarily the special gaming state. It does not have to be the degree of expectation for the transition of, but may be the degree of expectation for the transition to another gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state).

In the fifth embodiment, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as an image display device capable of variablely displaying the decorative symbol 1621 which is an image. In the configuration in which the variation display of the above is performed by the reel device, an image display device may be separately provided, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be displayed on the image display device.

(6) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the Sixth Embodiment In the sixth embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 capable of pushing downward is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment. , The configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to a pressing operation device capable of pushing operation in a direction other than the downward direction. For example, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment is applied to a pressing operation device capable of an upward pushing operation or a pressing operation device capable of a substantially horizontal pushing operation such as a right direction. The position of the operation unit in the horizontal direction may be controlled, or the reaction force against the movement operation to the operation unit may be controlled.

In the sixth embodiment, the button operating portion 850 in which the operated portion 852 is supported by the base 851 via the spring member 853, and the operating mechanism 860 that enables the button operating portion 850 to move in the vertical direction are provided. Although the provided pressing operation device 1261 is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment, it is not limited to the input operating device capable of pushing operation such as the pressing operating device 1261, and an input operation different from the pushing operation is possible. The configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to the input operating device.

For example, an input operation device such as a joystick provided with an operation lever (rod-shaped body) capable of input operations such as pushing and pulling with respect to a predetermined fulcrum, and a dial device that can rotate around a substantially center. The input operating device may be configured to apply the characteristic configuration according to the sixth embodiment. That is, when the lever is moved from the initial position in a predetermined direction (for example, the operating direction of the lever centered on the fulcrum, the circumferential direction around the axis, etc.), it can be restored to the initial position by the restoring force of the elastic body. The configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to the input operating device. Further, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment is applied to an operating device including an operating unit capable of moving in a plurality of directions (for example, moving downward and rotating around the moving direction). You may.

In the sixth embodiment, the coil spring is exemplified as the spring member 853, but it does not necessarily have to be a coil spring and may be a leaf spring or the like. Further, an elastic body (for example, rubber) other than the spring member may be interposed between the base 851 and the operated portion 852 to support the operated portion 852 with respect to the base 851.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated portion 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is a component of the button operating portion 850 that can be moved in the vertical direction by the operating mechanism 860, and the button operating portion 850 is based on the spring member 853. Although the configuration is such that it can move (vibrate) in the vertical direction with respect to the 851, the operated portion similar to the operated portion 852 may be provided on the upper end side of the rack 861 of the operating mechanism 860. That is, the stroke amount of the pressing operation device 1261 may be the same stroke amount as the stroke amount S2 by the operating mechanism 860. Even in such a configuration, the stroke amount by the pushing operation can be variably configured as in the pressing operation device 1261 in which the operated portion 852 includes the button operating portion 850 as illustrated in the sixth embodiment.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the operated portion 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is movable with respect to the substrate 851 via the spring member 853 has been illustrated, but the spring member 853 is omitted and the operated portion is omitted. The position and reaction force may be controlled by the operating mechanism 860 in a state where the 852 and the base 851 are integrated.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated portion 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is operated via the operation cover member 870, but the operated portion 852 and the operation cover member 870 are integrated. The player may directly operate the operated portion 852.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the button operation unit 850 is moved in the vertical direction by the operating mechanism 860 to generate a reaction force has been illustrated, but another mechanism for moving the button operation unit 850 and generating the reaction force is different. A mechanism may be used. For example, the substrate of the button operation unit 850 is provided with a cylindrical portion having a central axis along the moving direction, a spiral groove is formed around the cylindrical portion, and the groove is fitted into the groove to be constant. A rotatable engaging portion is provided by the motor 863 at the height position of the above, and the cylindrical portion is moved up and down by the rotation of the engaging portion to move the button operation portion 850 in the vertical direction. Or you may try to generate a reaction force.

In the sixth embodiment, the height of the neutral position (neutral position of the button operation unit 850) of the pressing operation device 1261 is changed according to the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held. The condition for changing the neutral position of the device 1261 does not necessarily have to be when the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held changes. For example, when the number of operations of the pressing operation device 1261 (operated portion 852) operated during a predetermined effect (for example, an effect executed in a variable display of a decorative symbol) reaches a predetermined number of times, the pressing operation device 1261 The neutral position may change. That is, the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 may change according to the number of operations of the pressing operation device 1261 operated during a predetermined effect.

In the sixth embodiment, the detection sensor 854 capable of detecting that the operated portion 852 has reached the maximum pressing position and the button operating portion 850 have reached the position at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860. A detection sensor 890 that can be detected is provided, and the sub-control board 840 determines whether or not there is an operation on the pressing operation device 1261 based on each detection signal from the detection sensors 854 and 890.

Instead of this, the lowermost position where the lower end of the operation cover member 870 that moves constantly with the operated portion 852 can be reached (that is, the button operation portion 850 is located at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860). Further, a detection sensor capable of detecting (the position of the lower end of the operation cover member 870 that can be reached when the operated portion 852 is located at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853) is provided, and based on the detection signal from the detection sensor. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence of an operation on the pressing operation device 1261.

In the sixth embodiment, the button operating portion 850 in which the operated portion 852 is supported by the base 851 via the spring member 853, and the operating mechanism 860 that enables the button operating portion 850 to move in the vertical direction are provided. Although the provided pressing operation device 1261 is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to an accessory device or the like that does not have an operation function. For example, the sixth aspect of the accessory device is provided with an accessory component in which the accessory is supported by the substrate via a spring member and an operating mechanism that enables the accessory component to move in the vertical direction. The configuration according to the embodiment may be applied.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the hold count display unit 870A is provided on the surface of the operation cover member 870 has been illustrated. It is possible to display an object whose display is switched according to the expected degree of transition of. For example, if the letter "V" is printed under the number "8" on the hold count display unit 870A and the button operation unit 850 in a raised state according to the hold number is pressed, the player wins. If there is a unit game, the operation cover member 870 rises for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) until the character "V" is visible to the player, and then returns to the original position and wins. If there is no unit game, the character "V" may be returned to the original position without being visible.

Further, the height position of the button operation unit 850 does not necessarily change according to the number of holds. For example, the number "8" can be seen by the player regardless of the number of holds. When the button operation unit 850 is arranged, the right of the unit game is reserved, and the player pushes in the situation where there is a variable display waiting for execution, the winning or expectation is high based on the result of the winning / losing lottery. The reaction force is increased at the height position according to the number of times of the fluctuation display until the time when the fluctuation display is performed (for example, the height position lowered by one scale in the case of the next fluctuation display), and the reaction force is generated. Depending on the height position to be performed, it may be possible to suggest to the player the execution time of the variation display that can hold the correctness or the degree of expectation, or the magnitude of the reaction force may be set to a plurality of types to have a high degree of expectation. It may be configured to suggest this to the player.

Further, the height position of the button operation unit 850 does not necessarily change according to the number of holds. For example, during the change display, the result of the winning / failing lottery during the change display or the hold waiting for the execution of the change display. Based on the result of the winning / failing lottery, the button operation unit 850 rises to one of the heights (neutral position) set according to the winning or expectation, and the reaction force when pushing it in. It may be configured to suggest to the player that the larger the size of is, the higher the expected effect is executed in the variable display.

(7) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the 7th Embodiment In the 7th embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 is in a neutral position, and the operating surface 870B is vertically (pressing operation) with the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893. The position is substantially equal to the moving direction of the device 1261), but the pressing operation device 1261 is positioned so that the operation surface 870B is recessed in the vertical direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 in the neutral position. It may be a positioned configuration. Also in the configuration of the modified example, as in the configuration illustrated in the seventh embodiment, the pushing operation with momentum such as hitting the operation surface 870B by the player who performs the pushing operation on the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed. Instead, it is possible to perform a pushing operation of slowly pushing the operation surface 870B against the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860.

In the seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 that pushes the operation surface 870B downward is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment, but the direction other than the downward direction with respect to the operation surface is illustrated. (For example, the characteristic configuration according to the seventh embodiment may be applied to a pressing operation device similar to the pressing operation device 1261 that performs a pushing operation in the forward direction, left or right direction).

That is, for example, in a pressing operation device that performs a pushing operation in the forward direction with respect to the operating surface, the operating surface is the opening surface of the opening accommodating the pressing operation device and the front and rear directions of movement of the pressing operation device. The position may be substantially equal to the direction. Further, in such a pressing operation device, the operation surface may be configured to be recessed in the front-rear direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening accommodating the pressing operation device.

In the seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 in which the operation surface 870B is located at a position substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction is exemplified as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment, but is neutral. As the position, a plurality of types of neutral positions are taken, including at least a position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction, or a position where the operation surface 870B is recessed in the vertical direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening R. A configuration may be used in which the characteristic configuration according to the seventh embodiment is applied to the pressing operation device 1261 to be obtained.

In the seventh embodiment, as an example in FIG. 24 (FIGS. 24 (A) and 24 (B)), a part of the wrist side of the player's hand (a part of the hand excluding a part of the finger side). ) And a part of the wrist side of the forearm portion can be supported (placeable) on the hand rest 895, but the hand rest 895 is not necessarily a part of the wrist side of the player's hand. It is not necessary to have a configuration that can support both a part of the forearm portion on the wrist side, and the player can operate the operated portion 852 by hand so that the player can operate the part of the hand and the hand continuously. It suffices as long as it can support at least a part of the forearm portion.

Therefore, for example, the hand rest 895 may have a configuration in which only a part of the wrist side of the player's hand operably supports the operated portion with the finger side of the hand, or the forearm portion of the player. A part or all of the above may be configured to operably support the operated portion on the finger side of the hand corresponding to the forearm portion.

In the seventh embodiment, the hand rest 895 has a substantially flat upper surface capable of supporting a part of the wrist side of the player's hand and a part of the wrist side of the forearm from below. However, the form of the hand rest 895 does not necessarily have to be the form of a stand having a substantially flat upper surface in the horizontal direction, for example, a shape that rises according to the shape of the hand or forearm. It may be. Further, for example, the forearm portion may be supported from the lower side in a substantially U-shaped cuff shape, or the forearm portion may be suspended from the upper side.

In the seventh embodiment, the upper surface of the hand rest 895 is located at a position substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 and the vertical direction which is the moving direction of the pressing operation device 1261 (moving direction of the operated portion 852). However, the upper surface of the hand rest 895 is located above the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893, and the upper surface of the hand stand 895 and the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893. May be configured to be a step in the vertical direction.

In the seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 capable of pushing downward is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment, but an input operation such as pushing or pulling with respect to a predetermined fulcrum is performed. The characteristic of the seventh embodiment is that the input operation device such as a joystick provided with an operation lever (rod-shaped body) capable of being operated and the input operation device such as a dial device that can rotate about a substantially center as an axis. It may be a configuration to which the configuration is applied.

That is, for example, with respect to an input operation device such as a joystick or an input operation device such as a dial device, a portion of the player's hand excluding a part of the finger side that operates the operated portion of the input operation device. A support portion such as a hand rest 895 that allows the player to operate the operated portion by hand at least a part of the forearm portion continuous with the hand is provided to the player by the input operating device. It may be configured to be provided on the near side.

(8) Modification Example of the Pachinko Machine 100 of the 8th Embodiment In the 8th embodiment, the customer waiting effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the non-gaming state of waiting for the player to execute the game is An example is shown in which a moving image or an image obtained by diverting the moving image data (image data) prepared in advance for various effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display is illustrated, but the customer waiting effect is not always obtained. It is not necessary that all of the above are composed of videos or images diverted from video data prepared in advance for various productions, and at least a part of the customer waiting production is composed of videos or images diverted from the video data. It may be a configuration. For example, a video or image dedicated to the customer waiting effect is prepared, and the customer waiting effect is composed of a video or image dedicated to the customer waiting effect and a video or image obtained by diverting the video data prepared in advance for various effects. It may be configured.

In the eighth embodiment, the customer waiting effect is configured from the moving image or image cut out from the suggestion effect, but the moving image or image constituting the customer waiting effect does not necessarily have to be the moving image or image cut out from the suggestion effect. For example, a moving image or an image cut out from an effect other than the suggestion effect (variable effect) displayed during the variable display may be used as a part of the customer waiting effect.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as a pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-gaming state, a special symbol (first special symbol, second) is performed during the game. The variation display (variation effect) selected under the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol) is displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but the variation display is displayed during the non-game state. The trigger does not necessarily have to be an operation on the pressing operation device (specifically, a pushing operation), and an operation other than the pushing operation on the input operating device other than the pressing operation device is an opportunity to display the fluctuation display. It may be configured as follows. For example, a predetermined rotation operation (for example, one rotation operation clockwise or 200 rpm or more) is performed on a rotation operation device capable of rotation operation such as the rotation operation device 262 (see FIG. 1) during a non-gaming state. When the rotation operation by the number of rotations) is performed, the variation display selected under the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol occurs during the game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. May be good.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, the same selection conditions as when a special symbol start winning is generated during the game. The selected variation display (variation effect) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but the selection conditions for the variation display do not necessarily have to be the same as when the start prize of the special symbol occurs, and the non-game When the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the state, the variable display selected under substantially the same selection conditions as the case where the start prize of the special symbol occurs is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. You may.

For example, the probability of selecting a demo pseudo jackpot by the demo pseudo-winning random number counter included in the sub-control board 940 does not necessarily have to be the same as the jackpot winning probability by the winning random number counter related to the special symbol provided in the main control board 920. However, for example, the probability of selecting the demo pseudo jackpot by the demo pseudo-winning random number counter may be higher than the probability of winning the jackpot by the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. According to such a configuration, the variable display (variable effect) displayed only when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery can be pushed into the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state (more specifically, during the non-gaming state). When it is done), it can be made easier to appear than during the game. As a result, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 100 appear in the non-gaming state, which is difficult to appear due to the winning probability of the big hit during the game, and to easily appeal the pachinko machine 100 to the player. Further, the probability of winning a big hit against the variable display executed during the non-game state is set to 100%, and only the variable display (variable effect) executed when the big hit occurs is executed during the non-game state. In this case, the demo pseudo-winning random number counter may be omitted.

Alternatively, various selection probabilities in the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, or the first demo pseudo variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo variation type counter provided in the sub-control board 940. However, the configuration may be different from the various selection probabilities of the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, or the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter provided in the main control board 920.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, the same selection conditions as when a special symbol start winning is generated during the game. The selected variation display (variation effect) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-game state, the game is in progress. From the variable display that can be selected when the start prize of the special symbol occurs in, the selection condition for exclusive use in the non-gaming state (for example, for demonstration), which is different from the selection condition when the start prize of the special symbol occurs. It may be configured to select the variable display to be displayed in the non-game state by the selection probability of the demonstration pseudo jackpot by the pseudo-winning random number counter.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, the same selection conditions as when a special symbol start winning is generated during the game. The selected variation display (variation effect) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, regardless of whether the display is in a non-game state or in a game, the input operation device such as the pressing operation device is used. Provide a period during which a predetermined operation (for example, a pushing operation) for displaying the fluctuation display can be input, and press during the period (a state in which a predetermined operation can be input to the input operation device). When a predetermined operation is performed (input) on the operation device or input operation device, the variable display selected under the same or substantially the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol occurs is the decorative symbol. It may be configured to be displayed on the display device 479.

(9) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the 9th Embodiment In the 9th embodiment, in the variation display based on the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state (that is, the pseudo variation display for demonstration). Although four suggestive effects having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state depending on the display content are simultaneously displayed in the divided display areas 479D to 479G in the decorative symbol display device 479, the configuration has been illustrated. Instead of or in addition to this, two or more display images (eg,) each including any of a plurality of types of suggestion displays 1623 having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state due to differences in the content of the comments (eg, The four display images including the suggestion display 1623 of different types) may be simultaneously displayed in each display area (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) in which the decorative symbol display device 479 is divided into a plurality of parts.

In the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state (that is, a pseudo variable display for demonstration), two or more display images including each of the different types of suggestion display 1623 are decorative symbol display devices. In the configuration in which the 479 is simultaneously displayed in each display area divided into a plurality of parts, the period from the start of the variable display based on the pressing operation to the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state to the appearance of the display image including the suggestion display 1623. In the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol, the variable display may be displayed at a higher speed than the corresponding period.

As a result, the time from the start of the variation display based on the push operation to the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state to the appearance of the suggestion effect after the reach display as described above is the variation based on the start prize of the special symbol. Similar to the case where the time is shorter than the corresponding time in the display, the time from the start to the end in the pseudo-variation display for demonstration can be set to be shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display. it can.

In the ninth embodiment, a display image including a plurality of types of suggestive effects having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state depending on the display content, and expectations for the transition to the special gaming state according to the shape thereof. A display image including a plurality of types of hold display 1622 having different degrees is simultaneously displayed in a plurality of divided display areas (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) in the decorative symbol display device 479.

On the other hand, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, it is not always necessary to display a display image including a plurality of types of suggestive effects and a display image including a plurality of types of hold display 1622 at the same time. During the period in which the display image of is displayed, the display image is sequentially displayed each time a predetermined operation is performed on an input operation device (for example, selection operation device 263) different from the press operation device such as the press operation device 261. It may be configured to switch.

In the ninth embodiment, a display image including a plurality of types of suggestive effects and a display image including a plurality of types of hold display 1622 are divided into a plurality of display areas (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) in the decorative symbol display device 479. ), So that the images (frame images) that make up the variable display, such as the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol, are displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 479. It was configured to be displayed in a smaller size than when it was displayed in.

Instead of this, the display image including the suggestion effect and the display image including the hold display 1622 are displayed one by one, and the image constituting the variable display such as the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol is the decorative symbol display device 479. It may be configured to be displayed in a smaller size than when it is displayed on the entire display area.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of alternative display 1625, a display image including each of the different types of alternative display 1625 may be simultaneously displayed in each display area divided into a plurality of decorative symbol display devices 479. Even in such a configuration, the display image including each of the alternative display 1625 can be displayed in a smaller and reduced size as compared with the case where the display image including each of the alternative display 1625 is displayed after the end of the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol.

(10) The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, the pachinko machine may be implemented so that the expected big hit value can be increased until the big hit state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times or three times) including the big hit. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be put into a special gaming state on the condition that the ball wins a prize in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as an arrange ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or may be applied to gaming machines such as parrots in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing issues, effects, and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like. In addition, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as meanings and examples of terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A translucent light-transmitting member (base material 611) having a front surface and a back surface which is a back surface with respect to the front surface.
A pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the translucent member and including a pattern (decorative pattern 621) that can be visually recognized from the front surface side via the transmissive member.
A gaming machine including a decorative portion (decorative portion 622) provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the translucent member on the front surface side of the translucent member. ,
The decorative portion is a gaming machine characterized in that the decorative portion is colored with a color configured to easily reflect light as compared with at least a part of the colors that color the pattern.

<Feature 11>
A translucent light-transmitting member (base material 611) having a front surface and a back surface which is a back surface with respect to the front surface.
A pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the translucent member and including a pattern (decorative pattern 621) that can be visually recognized from the front surface side via the transmissive member.
A gaming machine including a decorative portion (decorative portion 622) provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the translucent member on the front surface side of the translucent member. ,
The decorative portion protrudes toward the surface side from the portion where the pattern portion is provided on the surface side, and is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the colors that color the pattern. A featured game machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 10 or the feature 11 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, a pattern portion including a pattern is provided on the back surface side of the translucent translucent member. The pattern of the pattern portion can be visually recognized from the surface side of the translucent member through the translucent member. On the other hand, a decorative portion is provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the translucent member on the front surface side of the translucent member. Therefore, while the pattern portion is provided on the back surface side of the translucent member, the decorative portion is provided on the front surface side of the translucent member, so that the decorative portion can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the pattern portion. Thereby, the decorative feeling by the decorative portion can be improved.

In particular, the decorative portion provided three-dimensionally with respect to the pattern portion is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the colors for coloring the pattern of the pattern portion. Glittering and gorgeousness is added to the color, which makes it possible to more preferably improve the decorative feeling of the decorative portion.

By improving the decorative feeling of the decorative portion, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the pattern (the pattern of the pattern portion) provided on the peripheral side of the decorative portion, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game machine. Can be done.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 11, as "at least a part of the colors that color the pattern", for example, a main color that colors each pattern (for example, a color that colors the largest area in each pattern). It may be the color that most easily reflects light (for example, the color that has the highest brightness), or it may be the color that most easily reflects light among the colors that color all the patterns. Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature 11, the "color configured to easily reflect light" may be defined by, for example, the presence or absence of brilliance, and is defined by the brightness of the color. There may be.

<Feature 12>
The gaming machine according to feature 10 or feature 11.
Equipped with a cylindrical reel part (reel body) that can rotate in the circumferential direction,
The design portion includes a design (decorative design 621) as the design, and a coating film is formed on the back surface side of the translucent member.
The decorative portion is formed with a coating film on the surface side of the translucent member.
The translucent member is a gaming machine characterized in that the back surface side on which the pattern portion is formed is directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the reel portion and is attached to the outer peripheral surface.

In the game machine according to the feature 12, since the translucent member is attached to the outer peripheral surface with the back surface side on which the pattern portion is formed facing the outer peripheral surface of the reel portion, the symbol included in the symbol portion is reeled. It is possible to make a variable display or a stop display (confirmed display) by rotating the unit. Since a decorative portion is formed on the surface side of the translucent member, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the variable display and the stop display (confirmed display) of the design.

<Feature 20>
It is provided with a mode changing portion that enables the mode of a predetermined surface portion to be visually recognized in a different mode depending on the situation.
Depending on the presence or absence of light (flash) radiated from the surface side to the surface portion or the color of the light (black light), the mode changing portion determines the color or display target or the combination of the color and the display target according to the situation. A gaming machine characterized in that it is made visible to the player in a mode.

<Feature 21>
Equipped with a pattern part provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down
The pattern portion is different from the first pattern (picture 701, picture 702, picture 703) that becomes visible in a predetermined first situation in a mode corresponding to the first situation. A gaming machine comprising a second pattern (pictures 721A, 721B) that can be visually recognized in a mode corresponding to the second situation in a predetermined second situation.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 20 or the feature 21 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

Further, in the game machine according to the feature 21, the pattern portion provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down can be visually recognized in a predetermined first situation in a mode corresponding to the first situation. The first situation includes a first picture that is visible and a second picture that becomes visible in a predetermined second situation different from the first situation in a manner corresponding to the second situation. It is possible to visually display different patterns (first pattern or second pattern) in the second situation and the second situation. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the gaming machine by different patterns that can be visually recognized depending on the situation.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 20 or feature 21.
Equipped with a cylindrical reel part (reel body) that can rotate in the circumferential direction,
The pattern portion is formed with a coating film on one surface side of a sheet-like translucent member.
The translucent member is a gaming machine characterized in that the back surface side is attached to the reel portion.

In the game machine according to the feature 22, a sheet-like translucent member having a coating film formed on one surface of the pattern portion is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel portion, so that the degree of attention to the reel portion is improved. Can be done. Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which the symbol is fluctuated or stopped (confirmed) displayed by the rotation of the reel portion, the first symbol can be visually displayed in the first situation, or in the second situation. By visually displaying the second pattern, the degree of attention to the reel portion can be suitably improved.

<Feature 23>
The gaming machine according to any one of feature 20 to feature 22.
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying identification information, and
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entry port as a condition for satisfying a predetermined start condition, and a lottery means (main control board 920).
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the identification information in a variable manner, and then the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. Means (sub-control board 940) and
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the variable execution means, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state, which is a game state.
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined Setting storage means (main control) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. Input means (rear surface) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the board 920 RAM) and the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Setting switch 905, initialization switch 907),
A setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means is provided.
The first pattern and at least one of the second patterns have different modes depending on the first situation or the situation within the fluctuation range in the second situation, which can be changed in a predetermined fluctuation range. It is made visible at
At least one of the first situation and the second situation so that the pattern can be visually recognized in a manner corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine comprising a situation generating means (sub-control board 940) for generating a situation within the fluctuation range.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 23, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit by the variable execution means, and then the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is displayed. The corresponding identification information is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is generated by the game control means after the stop display is displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. To do.

The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability in which the first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability in which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, the probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery is stored. In the input means, the operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting changing means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the situation generating means makes it possible to visually recognize at least one of the first pattern and the second pattern in a manner corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. , At least one of the first situation and the second situation occurs within the fluctuation range of each situation (first situation, second situation).

Thereby, it corresponds to the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability in which the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability in which the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery. The information to be used can be suggested to the player based on the difference in the mode of at least one of the first pattern and the second pattern. Therefore, the player can add the game property of estimating the probability information about the game machine being played according to the difference in the mode of at least one of the first pattern and the second pattern. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine by considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability of the game machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Feature 30>
A first decorative portion (decorative lens portion 786) provided at a predetermined position and
A second decorative portion (peripheral side decorative portion 788) provided on one side of the first decorative portion, and
A light emitting means (light emitting body 782) that is provided on a side away from the player from the second decorative portion and outputs light is provided.
The second decorative part is
A first transmitting portion (direct light transmitting region X1) capable of transmitting a part of the light output from the light emitting means, and
With a reflecting means (reflecting film portion 790B) that is a part of the light output from the light emitting means and can reflect the light that has returned to the light emitting means side without entering the inside of the first transmitting portion to the player side. A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

<Feature 31>
A first decorative portion (decorative lens portion 786) provided at a predetermined position and
A second decorative portion (peripheral side decorative portion 788) provided on one side of the first decorative portion, and
A light emitting means (light emitting body 782) that is provided on a side away from the player from the second decorative portion and outputs light, and
A reflecting means (reflecting film portion 790B) capable of reflecting light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means is provided.
The second decorative part is
A first transmitting portion (direct light transmitting region X1) capable of directly transmitting the light output from the light emitting means, and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transmitting portion (reflected light transmitting region X2) capable of transmitting light reflected by the reflecting means adjacent to or close to the first transmitting portion.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 30 or the feature 31 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the first decorative portion is provided at a predetermined position, and the second decorative portion is provided on one side of the first decorative portion. The second decorative portion includes a first transmissive portion and a second transmissive portion adjacent to or adjacent to the first transmissive portion. The first transmitting portion is configured to be able to directly transmit the light output from the light emitting means, whereas the second transmitting portion is formed by a reflecting means capable of reflecting the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means. It is configured to be able to transmit the reflected light. Therefore, the appearance of light visually recognized by the player (for example, brightness, color, etc.) can be different between the first transmissive portion and the second transmissive portion. As a result, in the second decorative portion, the way of shining can be made different between the first transmitting portion and the second transmitting portion, so that the decorativeness by the light transmitted through the second decorative portion can be improved.

Further, since the intensity of the reflected light is generally smaller than the intensity of the incident light, the intensity of the light transmitted through the second transmitting portion can be weakened as compared with the intensity of the light transmitted through the first transmitting portion. .. As a result, in the second decorative portion, the second transmissive portion can appear to shine weaker than the first transmissive portion. Therefore, since it is possible to change the way in which the second decorative portion shines, it is possible to improve the decorativeness of the light transmitted through the second decorative portion in this respect as well.

As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the feature 30 or the feature 31, the second decorative portion and the second decorative portion are on one side due to the improvement of the decorativeness by the light transmitted through the second decorative portion. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the first decorative portion provided on the side, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game machine.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 31, the "light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means" that can be reflected by the reflecting means is the direct light that directly reaches the reflecting means after being output from the light emitting means. It may be indirect light reflected by one or a plurality of planes different from the reflecting means between the time when it is output from the light emitting means and the time when it reaches the reflecting means.

<Feature 32>
The gaming machine according to feature 30 or feature 31.
The second transparent portion is arranged on the end side of the second decorative portion, which is adjacent to or close to the first transparent portion and away from the first decorative portion.
The reflecting means is provided below the second transmitting portion, and reflects the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means toward the upper side and the side away from the first decorative portion. A part of the light reflected by the reflecting means passes through the second transmitting portion, and the other part does not pass through the second transmitting portion and is directly visible to the player on the outer side of the second decorative portion. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to travel as possible light.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 32, the second transparent portion in the second decorative portion is arranged on the end side of the second decorative portion which is adjacent to or close to the first transparent portion and away from the first decorative portion in the second decorative portion. .. The reflecting means provided below the second transmitting portion reflects the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means toward the upper side and the side away from the first decorative portion, and is reflected by the reflecting means. A part of the reflected light passes through the second transmitting portion, and the other part travels outside the second decorative portion as light that can be directly seen by the player without passing through the second transmitting portion. Is configured. How the light is seen by the player depending on whether the light reflected by the reflecting means passes through the second transmitting portion or travels on the outer side of the second transmitting portion as light that the player can directly see. Since (for example, brightness, brilliance, etc.) can be changed, the decorativeness of the light reflected by the reflecting means is improved.

<Feature 33>
The gaming machine according to feature 32.
The game machine is characterized in that a part of the reflecting means is exposed on the outer side of the second transmitting portion without overlapping the second transmitting portion when the reflecting means is viewed from the front. ..

In the game machine according to the feature 33, a part of the reflecting means is exposed on the outer side of the second transmitting portion without overlapping the second transmitting portion when the reflecting means is viewed from the front. Therefore, the player has a mixture of light reflected by the reflecting means and light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means by the reflecting means on the outer side of the second transmitting portion. Can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to give an impression that the light that can be visually recognized by the player is different from the case where the reflecting means is only the light that reflects the natural light.

<Feature 34>
The gaming machine according to feature 32 or feature 33.
The light emitting means is provided on the lower side with respect to the second decorative portion, and is configured to be capable of outputting light toward the second decorative portion.
When the light output from the light emitting means arrives, the second decorative portion is configured such that a part thereof passes through the first transmitting portion and the other part is reflected toward the reflecting means. A game machine characterized by being played.

In the game machine according to the feature 34, when the light output from the light emitting means provided on the lower side with respect to the second decorative portion toward the second decorative portion reaches the second decorative portion, the light emitting means thereof. Since a part is configured to pass through the first transmitting portion and the other part is reflected toward the reflecting means, light is transmitted to the first transmitting portion and the second transmitting portion by a common light emitting means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the arrangement of the light emitting means from becoming complicated, and it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost by standardizing the light emitting means for transmitting light to the first transmitting portion and the second transmitting portion.

<Feature 35>
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features 30 to 34,
The first decorative portion has translucency and is transparent.
A protrusion (protruding portion 787) provided along the peripheral edge on the peripheral edge side of the surface to be the front surface side of the first decorative portion on the side where the second decorative portion is provided,
A decorative member (decorative sheet 789) provided on the back surface side of the first decorative portion, which is a back surface with respect to the front surface, and includes contents that can be visually recognized from the front surface side via the first decorative portion. Prepare
A portion (end face 787A) visible from at least the front side of the protruding portion is processed so as to look like a color that easily reflects light as compared with at least a part of the colors contained in the decorative member. Game machine.

In the game machine according to the feature 35, on the back surface side of the first decorative portion having translucency, the contents that can be visually recognized from the front surface side of the first decorative portion via the first decorative portion. Decorative members including are provided. On the other hand, on the peripheral edge side of the surface of the first decorative portion on the side where the second decorative portion is provided, a protruding portion is provided along the peripheral edge. Therefore, while the decorative member is provided on the back surface side of the first decorative portion, the protruding portion is provided on the front surface side of the first decorative portion, so that the protruding portion can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative member. it can. Thereby, the decorative feeling by the protruding portion can be improved.

In particular, the projecting portion provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative member is processed so as to look like a color that reflects light more easily than at least a part of the colors contained in the decorative member. Can be improved more preferably.

<Feature 40>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores an effect image (moving image data) used for a predetermined first effect (first suggestion effect) as an effect that can be displayed on the display unit.
The effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit, and
As an image used for a predetermined second effect different from the first effect, a display control means (secondary) for displaying an image of at least one region cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit on the display unit. With a control board 940)
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that an image of at least one region cut out from the effect image is displayed on the display unit in a deformed state or a processed state.

<Feature 41>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores an effect image (moving image data) used for a predetermined first effect (first suggestion effect) among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.
The effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit, and
When a predetermined second effect (second suggestion effect) different from the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, an image of at least one region cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit. Is provided with a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the image on the display unit.
When the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means displays the effect image on the display unit without a predetermined deformation or a predetermined process. When the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, an image of at least one region cut out from the effect image is displayed on the display unit in a state of being subjected to the predetermined deformation or the predetermined processing. A game machine characterized by that.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 40 or the feature 41 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means, the display unit can display the effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores an effect image used for a predetermined first effect among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, at least one area cut out from the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit by the display control means. The image of is displayed on the display unit in a state of being subjected to a predetermined deformation or a predetermined process. Therefore, since the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit is diverted in the second effect, the storage amount of the effect image can be suppressed, and the first effect and the second effect can be suppressed, respectively. It is easy to reduce the need to develop a production image, and the development cost can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, since the image of the region cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed in the second effect, an event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed is used for the first effect. Similarly, it can be suggested when the second effect using the image cut out from the image is displayed. As a result, for example, when the first effect is an effect that can suggest the degree of ease of transition to the special game state (expectation, reliability), the ease of transition to the special game state can be determined. The degree can also be suggested by the display of the second effect. Further, since the suggestion of the event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed and the suggestion of the event that can be expected when the second effect is displayed are realized with different appearances, the suggestion of the event can be realized with different appearances. It is possible to increase the variation of the production while suppressing the cost for developing the production image.

Here, in the second effect, since the image of the region cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed, the effect image of the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect is displayed. It can be difficult to guess. As a result, it is possible to make the difficulty of estimating the expected event after the display of the first effect or the second effect different between the case where the first effect is displayed and the case where the second effect is displayed. It is possible to improve the playability of estimating an event that can be expected after the 1st effect or the 2nd effect is displayed (for example, the degree of ease of transition to the special gaming state), thereby, to the gaming machine. The degree of attention can be improved.

In particular, since the image of the region cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed in a state of being deformed or processed in the second effect, the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect is displayed. It is possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the effect image of.

<Feature 42>
The gaming machine according to feature 40 or feature 41.
When the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means fronts at least a part of the images of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in a deformed or processed state so that it looks in substantially the same direction different from the direction.

In the game machine described in feature 42, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, it is cut out from the effect image (effect image used for the first effect) stored in the storage unit by the display control means. At least a part of the images of the plurality of regions is displayed in a deformed or processed state so that the images can be seen facing substantially the same direction different from the front direction. As a result, it is possible to give an orderly impression as compared with the case where the images of the plurality of regions are displayed so as to be viewed in different directions.

<Feature 43>
The gaming machine according to feature 42.
The display control means is an image of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, and is in a deformed or processed state. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one image of the above images is displayed so as to be overlapped with another image.

In the game machine described in feature 43, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, it is cut out from the effect image (effect image used for the first effect) stored in the storage unit by the display control means. Since at least one of the images in a plurality of regions that have been deformed or processed is displayed so as to overlap with the other images, the content of the superimposed image is displayed to the player. It can be difficult to recognize. In this respect as well, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the effect image corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the playability of estimating an event that can be expected after the first effect or the second effect is displayed (for example, the ease of transition to the special gaming state). , It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine.

<Feature 50>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores an effect image (moving image data) used for a predetermined first effect (first suggestion effect) as an effect that can be displayed on the display unit.
The effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit, and
As an image used for a predetermined second effect (second suggestion effect) different from the first effect, at least an image corresponding to an image of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine including a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a part of images on the display unit at the same time.

<Feature 51>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores an effect image (moving image data) used for a predetermined first effect (first suggestion effect) among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.
The effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit, and
When a predetermined second effect (second suggestion effect) different from the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, the image of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed. A gaming machine including a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying at least a part of the corresponding images on the display unit at the same time.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 50 or the feature 51 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means, the display unit can display the effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores an effect image used for a predetermined first effect among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit by the display control means. At least a part of the images corresponding to the images is displayed on the display unit at the same time. Therefore, since the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit is diverted in the second effect, the storage amount of the effect image can be suppressed, and the first effect and the second effect can be suppressed, respectively. It is easy to reduce the need to develop a production image, and the development cost can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, since the image corresponding to the image of the region cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed in the second effect, the event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed is the first. The same can be suggested when a second effect using an image cut out from the effect image used for the effect is displayed. As a result, for example, when the first effect is an effect that can suggest the degree of ease of transition to the special game state (expectation, reliability), the ease of transition to the special game state can be determined. The degree can also be suggested by the display of the second effect. Further, since the suggestion of the event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed and the suggestion of the event that can be expected when the second effect is displayed are realized with different appearances, the suggestion of the event can be realized with different appearances. It is possible to increase the variation of the production while suppressing the cost for developing the production image.

Here, in the second effect, since the image corresponding to the image of the region cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed, the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to guess the production image of. As a result, it is possible to make the difficulty of estimating the expected event after the display of the first effect or the second effect different between the case where the first effect is displayed and the case where the second effect is displayed. It is possible to improve the playability of estimating an event that can be expected after the 1st effect or the 2nd effect is displayed (for example, the degree of ease of transition to the special gaming state), thereby, to the gaming machine. The degree of attention can be improved.

In particular, since at least a part of the images corresponding to the images of the plurality of regions cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed at the same time, for example, the image corresponding to the images of the plurality of regions is displayed. Compared with the case where one of the images is displayed alone, it is easier to guess which effect image in the first effect corresponds to the image displayed in the second effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent it from becoming too difficult to infer the effect image of the first effect corresponding to the image from the image displayed in the second effect.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 51, the "image corresponding to the image of the plurality of regions cut out from the effect image" has the same appearance as the image of the plurality of regions cut out from the effect image. It may be an image, it may be a substantially same image, it may be an image that displays an image cut out from a production image with the same appearance, or it may be an image that displays the cut out image. It may be a deformed or processed image.

<Feature 52>
The gaming machine according to feature 50 or feature 51.
When the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means makes it possible for at least one image among the images corresponding to the images of the cut out plurality of regions to appear to overlap with the other images. A game machine characterized by displaying.

In the game machine described in feature 52, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means cuts out the effect image stored in the storage unit in association with the first effect. Since at least one of the images corresponding to the images in the plurality of areas is displayed so as to overlap with the other images, it is difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the superimposed images. it can. This makes it possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the effect image of the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect.

<Feature 60>
It is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and can be arranged at a neutral position set at a plurality of locations in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Therefore, in each neutral position, when the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction while deforming the elastic body (the operating means ( Button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870),
The operating means can be held in any of the neutral positions in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the operating means can be moved so that the position of the operating means can be moved without the player's operation on the operated portion. Acting means to operate (acting mechanism 860) and
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least is provided.
The motion control means is a gaming machine including at least a control for moving the operation means at a speed at which an inertial force having a magnitude that deforms the elastic body is generated.

<Feature 61>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by a player's operation is provided. It is an operating means located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operating portion is not operated, and when the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is deformed by the elastic body to cause the operated portion to be the substrate. With respect to the operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the above.
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be set to the predetermined direction or the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. Is an actuating means (acting mechanism 860) that moves in the opposite direction and
A gaming machine including an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 60 or the feature 61 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, in the operating means including the operated portion, since the operated portion is supported by the substrate via the elastic body, the elastic body is deformed when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction. This is configured so that the operated portion can be moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

The operating means is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means in a predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Therefore, for example, the operating means is operated by the control by the motion controlling means, and the operating means stopped at the predetermined first position (that is, the operated portion is not operated) is moved to the first position. When moving from (for example, a neutral position) to a predetermined second position in a predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction and then stopping at the second position, the vehicle stops at the second position. In the operating means, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body can be moved along a predetermined direction by the inertial force received by the operated portion, and can be moved in a predetermined direction and the predetermined direction. It is also possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating in the direction opposite to the direction.

Alternatively, for example, when the operating means operates in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position with respect to the operated portion, the operating means from the neutral position to the predetermined direction. When the operation with respect to the operated portion is completed after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion. In the case of the configuration of moving to the neutral position side, the operation means supported by the substrate via the elastic body in the operation means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force is completed. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, the portion can be made to reciprocate in a predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (reciprocating motion).

As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the feature 60 or the feature 61, the operating means including the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is operated by the operating means controlled by the motion controlling means. Since the position of is configured to be at least changeable, vibration of the operated portion of the operating means reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction due to the inertial force received by the operated portion. It can be exercised (reciprocating motion).

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, it is possible to increase the interest in the operating means, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game machine. Further, even with simple movement control of the operating means, the operation of the operated portion can be complicated, and the tactile sensation when the player touches the operated portion can be changed.

<Feature 62>
The gaming machine according to feature 60 or feature 61.
When the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position with respect to the operated portion, the operating means moves from the neutral position to the predetermined direction. The operation means can be moved, and after the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force on the operated portion, the operation on the operated portion is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means is moved to the neutral position side when finished.

In the game machine according to the feature 62, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is in the neutral position. The operating means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated portion. Later, when the operation on the operated portion is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Therefore, since the position of the operating means can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operating means, the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated portion by the player's operation from the neutral position to the predetermined direction is the deformation of the elastic body. It is possible to increase the amount of movement of the operated portion, which is possible by the above method. This makes it possible to diversify the feeling of operation when the player operates the operated portion as compared with the case where the amount of movement of the operated portion is limited to a certain range based on the deformation of the elastic body.

Further, when the motion control means is configured to control the actuating means so as to be able to change the holding force, the force by which the player operates the operated portion is variable in the area where the operating means is moved by the actuating means. Therefore, even in such a case, it is possible to diversify the operation feeling when the player operates the operated portion.

<Feature 70>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable execution means (main control board 920) that displays the symbol in a variable manner on a predetermined display unit and then stops and displays the symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means as a stop symbol.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, a game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state after the stop display by the variable execution means. )When,
When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation executing means, a predetermined storage unit (mainly) holds information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means up to a predetermined number. A gaming machine including a hold storage means (main control board 920) that is stored in the RAM of the control board 920) and holds the execution of the fluctuation display corresponding to the information by the fluctuation execution means.
An operation that includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so as to be able to change at least one of the position of the operation means and the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operation means is provided.
The operation control means controls the operation of the operation means so as to have an aspect according to at least one of the number of hold information (number of holds) stored in the hold storage means or the contents of the hold information. A gaming machine characterized by containing at least.

<Feature 71>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable execution means (main control board 920) that displays the symbol in a variable manner on a predetermined display unit and then stops and displays the symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means as a stop symbol.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, a game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state after the stop display by the variable execution means. )When,
When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation executing means, a predetermined storage unit (mainly) holds information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means up to a predetermined number. A gaming machine including a hold storage means (main control board 920) that is stored in the RAM of the control board 920) and holds the execution of the fluctuation display corresponding to the information by the fluctuation execution means.
An operation that includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. It is an operating means that can be moved to the above, and when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is moved from the neutral position to the above. The operation means can be moved in a predetermined direction, and the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion, and then the operation is performed. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the unit is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least is provided.
In the operation control means, the operation means is moved to the neutral position determined in advance according to the number of hold information (the number of hold times) stored in the hold storage means, or the player wears the control means. A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means is controlled so that the movement mode of the operating means when the operating unit is operated is a mode corresponding to the content of the holding information stored in the holding storage means.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 70 or the feature 71 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, the operating means including the operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means operates in a predetermined direction from the neutral position. In addition to being movable to, the operated unit is operated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated unit. When the operation is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, in the gaming machine according to the feature 70 or the feature 71, if a predetermined start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation execution means, the lottery result by the lottery means is performed by the hold storage means. The information corresponding to is stored in a predetermined storage unit as hold information up to a predetermined number, and is stored in the hold storage means in a configuration in which the execution of the variation display corresponding to the information by the variation execution means is suspended. The operation means is moved to a neutral position determined in advance according to the number of hold information, or the movement mode of the operation means when the operated portion is operated by the player is stored in the hold storage means. The operating means is controlled by the motion controlling means so that the mode corresponds to the content of the information.

By changing the neutral position of the operating means, it is possible to change the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated portion by the player's operation from the neutral position to a predetermined direction, thereby giving the operating feeling of the operating means. Can be diversified. Further, it is possible to diversify the operation feeling when the player operates the operated portion by changing the movement mode of the operating means when the player operates the operated portion. By diversifying the operability of the operating means, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

Examples of the content of the pending information include the success or failure of the lottery result, the content of the effect selected based on the lottery result, and the like.

<Feature 72>
In the gaming machine according to feature 70 or feature 71,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and the player is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that when a portion is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 72, the operating means is elastic when the operated portion is operated in a predetermined direction because the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body. The deformed body allows the operated portion to move in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is supported by the substrate. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, it is possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature 80>
An operation that includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least
The motion control means satisfies a predetermined condition based on the game situation (for example, the number of holdings, the time of the game, the number of executions of a predetermined effect (for example, display of a specific character)) or the lottery result of a predetermined lottery. A gaming machine characterized in that the operation of the operating means is controlled so that the operating means moves to a neutral position corresponding to the established condition among a plurality of predetermined neutral positions.

<Feature 81>
An operation that includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. It is an operating means that can be moved to the above, and when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is moved from the neutral position to the above. The operation means can be moved in a predetermined direction, and the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion, and then the operation is performed. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the unit is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least is provided.
The operation control means controls the operation means so that the operation means moves to a neutral position corresponding to the satisfied condition among a plurality of predetermined neutral positions when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine featuring.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 80 or the feature 81 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, the operating means including the operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means operates in a predetermined direction from the neutral position. In addition to being movable to, the operated unit is operated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated unit. When the operation is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operating means is controlled by the operation controlling means so that the operating means moves to the neutral position corresponding to the satisfied condition among the plurality of predetermined neutral positions. .. By changing the neutral position of the operating means, it is possible to change the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated portion by the player's operation from the neutral position in a predetermined direction, whereby the player can change the operated portion. It is possible to diversify the feeling of operation when operating. By diversifying the operability of the operating means, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

The "predetermined condition" described in the feature 81 includes, for example, when the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held changes, or during a predetermined effect (for example, an effect executed in a variable display of a decorative symbol). This may be the case when the number of operations of the operated unit that has been operated in the above reaches a predetermined number of times.

<Feature 82>
In the gaming machine according to feature 80 or feature 81,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and the player is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that when a portion is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 82, since the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body, the operating means is elastic when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction. The deformed body allows the operated portion to move in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is supported by the substrate. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, it is possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature 90>
An operation that includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
An operating means (acting mechanism 860) that holds the operating means in the neutral position and enables the operating means to move from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when the player operates in the predetermined direction. ,
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so as to be able to change at least one of the position of the operation means and the reaction force to the movement operation of the operation means is provided.
The operation control means controls the operation means so that when the player operates the operation unit in the predetermined direction, the reaction force against the movement operation of the operation means changes. A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of types of patterns of changes in the reaction force are set according to a lottery result or an expectation degree of a predetermined lottery.

<Feature 91>
An operation that includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. It is an operating means that can be moved to the above, and when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is moved from the neutral position to the above. The operation means can be moved in a predetermined direction, and the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion, and then the operation is performed. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the unit is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means and the holding force can be changed at least is provided.
The motion control means is said to be at a first position away from the neutral position in the predetermined direction when the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force. A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means is controlled so that a reaction force with respect to a moving operation of the operating means is changed.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 90 or the feature 91 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, the operating means including the operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means operates in a predetermined direction from the neutral position. In addition to being movable to, the operated unit is operated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated unit. When the operation is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force, the holding force changes at the first position away from the neutral position in the predetermined direction. The operating means is controlled by the motion controlling means. As a result, when the player operates the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force, the operation feeling of the operation means changes at the first position during the operation, so that the operation feeling by the operation means becomes monotonous. However, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine. For example, as the operation feeling of the operation means, in addition to the control of the operation feeling against a certain reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operation means, the control of the operation feeling in which the reaction force changes discontinuously is set. The reaction force to the movement operation of the operating means at one position can be changed.

<Feature 92>
In the gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and the player is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that when a portion is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 92, the operating means is elastic when the operated portion is operated in a predetermined direction because the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body. The deformed body allows the operated portion to move in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is supported by the substrate. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, it is possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature A0>
It is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is maintained in a predetermined neutral state in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870),
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the position of the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least.
With a detecting means (encoder, sub-control board 940) capable of detecting at least one of the moving amount of the operating means or the moving speed of the operated portion when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction. ,
When at least one of the movement amount and the movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value, or becomes a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range, a predetermined display is provided. A unit (decorative symbol display device 479) is provided with an operation executing means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined display or operating a predetermined movable portion.
A gaming machine characterized in that two or more kinds of values corresponding to a lottery result of a predetermined lottery are set as the predetermined target value, the predetermined value, or the value within the predetermined range.

<Feature A1>
An operation that includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. It is an operating means that can be moved to the above, and when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is moved from the neutral position to the above. The operation means can be moved in a predetermined direction, and the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion, and then the operation is performed. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the unit is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least.
A detecting means capable of detecting at least one of the moving amount of the operating means or the moving speed of the operated portion when the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force (the detecting means). Encoder, sub-control board 940),
When at least one of the movement amount and the movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value, or becomes a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range, a predetermined display is performed. A gaming machine comprising: an operation executing means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined display on a unit (decorative symbol display device 479) or operating a predetermined movable unit.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature A0 or the feature A1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, the operating means including the operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means operates in a predetermined direction from the neutral position. In addition to being movable to, the operated unit is operated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated unit. When the operation is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, in the gaming machine according to the feature A0 or the feature A1, the amount of movement of the operating means or the operated portion when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force. A detecting means capable of detecting the moving speed of the vehicle is provided. When the movement amount or movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value, a predetermined display is displayed on a predetermined display unit or a predetermined display is displayed by the operation execution means. The moving parts are operated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property that allows the player to operate the operating means according to a predetermined target value, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game machine.

<Feature A2>
In the gaming machine according to feature A0 or feature A1,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and the player is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that when a portion is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to the feature A2, since the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body, the operating means is elastic when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction. The deformed body allows the operated portion to move in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is supported by the substrate. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, it is possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature B0>
A moving portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) having a contact surface (pressing surface) that the player can contact and can move in a predetermined direction (downward direction) is provided, and at least a part of the operating portion. The operating means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870), which are housed and attached to a predetermined opening, and
An actuating means (acting mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in a predetermined neutral position and moving the position of the operating means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least is provided.
As the neutral position of the operating means, a position where the contact surface is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening (or at least a part of the peripheral edge of the opening) in the moving direction of the operating means, or the contact surface is the opening. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a position recessed in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to a surface (or at least a part of the peripheral edge of the opening).

<Feature B1>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in the pressing direction (downward direction) by a player's pressing operation on a predetermined pressing surface (operation surface 870B) is provided, and the pressing surface is played. An operating means that is housed and mounted in a predetermined opening while facing a person, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not pressed (button operating portion 850, operation cover member 870). When,
The operating means can be held in the neutral position when the operated portion is not pressed, and the position of the operating means is at least opposite to the pressing direction without the player pressing the operated portion. It is an operating means that can move in the direction of the above, and when the player presses the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the pressing is performed from the neutral position. The operating means can be moved in the direction of the above, and the operating means is moved from the neutral position in the pressing direction by a pressing operation with a force exceeding the holding force on the operated portion, and then the operated means is operated. An actuating means (acting mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the pressing operation on the portion is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least is provided.
As the neutral position of the operating means, a position where the pressing surface is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening and the moving direction of the operating means, or the pressing surface is in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to the opening surface. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a recessed position.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to feature B0 or feature B1, providing a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operating means that the player can contact or an operating means that the player can operate. Can be done. For example, an operating means including an operated portion that can be moved in the pressing direction by a player's pressing operation on a predetermined pressing surface can be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not pressed. It is composed of. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not pressed.

Further, when the operating means presses the operated portion in a predetermined direction (more specifically, the pressing direction) with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position by the operating means. The operating means is configured to be movable from the neutral position to the pressing direction, and the operating means is operated by the pressing operation (pressing operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) on the operated portion. Is configured to move to the neutral position side when the pressing operation on the operated portion is completed after moving from the neutral position in the pressing direction.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means at least in the direction opposite to the pressing direction without the player pressing the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, in the operating means mounted so as to be housed in a predetermined opening while facing the pressing surface (the surface on which the pressing operation is performed by the player) of the operated portion, the neutral position of the operating means is the pressing. The configuration includes at least a position where the surface is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening in the moving direction of the operating means, or a position where the pressing surface is recessed in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to the opening surface. Therefore, the position where the pressing surface of the operated portion is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening and the moving direction of the operating means, or the position recessed in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to the opening surface is the neutral position of the operating means. In this case, the force of hitting the pressing surface is higher than that of the pressing surface protruding from the opening surface (more specifically, projecting in the direction opposite to the pressing direction). It is possible to make it difficult to perform a certain pressing operation.

As a result, the position where the pressing surface of the operated portion is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening and the moving direction of the operating means, or the position recessed in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to the opening surface is neutral of the operating means. By setting the position, the player who operates the operating means (pressing the operated portion) does not have a strong pressing operation such as hitting the pressing surface, but a holding force (the operating means is set to the neutral position). It is possible to perform a pressing operation of pushing the pressing surface against the holding force).

Therefore, in a gaming machine provided with an operating means that enables the operating means to move from the neutral position to the pressing direction when the pressing operation is performed on the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force, the pressing operation is vigorous. Then, since it is difficult for the player to experience the operation feeling of pressing due to the momentum, the player can appropriately experience the operation feeling of pressing, so that the degree of attention to the game machine provided with the operating means can be improved.

<Feature B2>
In the gaming machine according to feature B0 or feature B1,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in the direction of the pressing by a player's pressing operation on the pressing surface. A gaming machine characterized in that when a player operates the pressing surface in the pressing direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body. ..

In the gaming machine according to the feature B2, in the operating means, since the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body, the player presses the pressing surface in a predetermined direction (more specifically, the pressing direction). ), The deformed elastic body allows the operated portion to move in the direction of the pressing with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the pressing operation on the pressing surface with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the object supported by the substrate via the elastic body. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, the operating portion can be made to reciprocate (reciprocating motion) between the pressing direction and the direction opposite to the pressing direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to perform a pressing operation, but also as a means capable of providing an effect utilizing the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature C0>
A moving portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) having a contact surface (pressing surface) that the player can contact and can move in a predetermined direction (downward direction) is provided, and at least a part of the operating portion. The operating means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870), which are housed and attached to a predetermined opening, and
An actuating means (acting mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in a predetermined neutral position and moving the position of the operating means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least.
It is provided closer to the player than the moving means and supports at least a part of the player's hand except for a part of the finger side that comes into contact with the moving part and a forearm part continuous with the hand. A support portion (hand rest 895) provided at a position where the player can contact the moving portion on the finger side of the supported portion in a state where at least a portion thereof is supported is possible. A game machine characterized by being equipped.

<Feature C1>
It is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by being operated by a player by hand, and is in a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) located in
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. It is an operating means that can be moved to the above, and when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is moved from the neutral position to the above. The operation means can be moved in a predetermined direction, and the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion, and then the operation is performed. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the unit is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least.
At least a part of the part of the player's hand that is closer to the player than the operating means, excluding the part of the finger side that operates the operated part, and the forearm part that is continuous with the hand. With a support portion (hand rest 895) that is supportable and that allows the player to operate the operated portion by hand on the finger side of the supported portion in a state where at least a part thereof is supported. A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to feature C0 or feature C1, providing a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operating means that the player can contact or an operating means that the player can operate. Can be done. For example, an operating means including an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by a player's manual operation is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. .. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means operates in a predetermined direction from the neutral position. In addition to being movable to, the operated unit is operated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated unit. When the operation is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means in a direction opposite to at least a predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, on the side closer to the player than the operating means, at least a part of the portion of the player's hand excluding the finger side that operates the operated portion and the forearm portion continuous with the hand is the player. Is provided with a support portion that operably supports the operated portion by hand. Therefore, when the player operates the operated portion by hand, he / she supports at least a part of the portion of the hand excluding the part on the finger side that operates the operated portion and the forearm portion continuous with the hand. Since it can be supported by the portion, the hand can be stabilized and the player can be prevented from operating an inappropriate position on the operated portion.

Further, since at least a part of the player's hand except for a part on the finger side that operates the operated part and at least a part of the forearm part continuous with the hand can be supported by the support part, the hand and the forearm part can be supported. It is possible to suppress the strength of the operation on the operated portion as compared with the case where the is freely moving. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who operates the operated portion (operates the operating means) to perform a vigorous operation (for example, hitting the operated portion) on the operated portion.

Therefore, in a gaming machine provided with an operating means that enables the operating means to move from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when the operated portion is operated in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force, the momentum is increased. Since it is difficult for a player to experience the operation feeling of the operation with respect to the operation means in a certain operation, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine provided with the operation means.

In the gaming machines of features C0 and C1, the "hand" may be a part on the tip side of the wrist and is composed of a palm and a finger, and the "forearm part" is a part continuous with the hand. It may be the part from the wrist to the elbow.

<Feature C2>
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2.
A translucent light-transmitting member (front plate) provided on the front side of the game area in which the game ball flows down so that the player can visually recognize the game area from the front side and partition the game area from the player. 222)
The operating means is provided on the front side of the translucent member.
The support portion is provided so that at least a part thereof is on the front side of the operating means.
The length in the front-rear direction from the front end of the operated portion to the rear end of the supported portion in the region including the operated portion and the supporting portion from the length in the front-rear direction in the region on the front side of the translucent member. The game machine is characterized in that the length excluding the above-mentioned portion is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction of the operated portion.

In the game machine described in the feature C2, the operating means is provided on the front side of the translucent member that partitions between the player and the game area in which the game ball flows down, and at least a part of the support portion thereof is provided. In the configuration provided so as to be on the front side of the operating means, the front end of the operating means in the region including the operated portion and the supporting portion of the operating means from the length in the front-rear direction in the region on the front side of the translucent member. The length excluding the length from the to the rear end of the support portion in the front-rear direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction of the operated portion. That is, the region including the operated portion and the supporting portion in the operating means occupies a relatively large region in the front-rear direction in the region on the front side of the light-transmitting member.

In such a configuration, the size of the operated portion is relatively large in the region on the front side of the translucent member (for example, the size occupies approximately half in the front-rear direction in the region on the front side, or a plurality of players are present. It can be configured with a size that can be operated with a finger, etc.). In this way, even when the size of the operated portion is relatively large in the region on the front side of the translucent member, a support portion is provided so that at least a part of the operated portion is on the front side of the operating means. This enables a suitable operation on the operated portion (that is, an operated portion having a relatively large structure), and allows the player to experience the operation feeling of the operation on the operating means including the operated portion. be able to.

<Feature C3>
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C0 to C2,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and the player is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that when a portion is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body.

In the game machine described in the feature C3, the operating means is elastic when the operated portion is operated in a predetermined direction because the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body. The deformed body allows the operated portion to move in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is supported by the substrate. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, it is possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature D1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can at least display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (moving image data) that can be used for the plurality of types of the effect (variable display, suggestion effect) that can be displayed on the display unit.
An effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display unit from the plurality of types of effects, and
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit, and when the effect is selected by the effect selection means, the storage unit before displaying the lottery result. A display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the effect using the effect image stored in the display unit on the display unit is provided.
The display control means targets at least a part of the plurality of types of effects during a non-gaming state in which the variable display, which is executed before the lottery result is displayed, is not performed. At least one unit image (frame image, still image) constituting one or more of the effect images used for the effect of the unit, or at least one unit image constituting the one or more effect images, respectively. A gaming machine characterized in that a non-game in-game image (customer waiting effect) including an image of at least one cut-out area is displayed on the display unit.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature D1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means, at least the effect corresponding to the lottery result can be displayed before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for the plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit, and the effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the effect selection means. In this case, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.

Further, during the non-gaming state in which the player waits for the execution of the game, one or a plurality of effects used for at least a part of the plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit by the display control means. A non-gaming image composed of at least one unit image constituting an image or an image of at least one region cut out from at least one unit image constituting the one or a plurality of effect images is displayed. It is displayed in the section.

As a result, the non-game image is displayed during the non-game state waiting for the player to execute the game. Therefore, the player can display the non-game image on the display unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. (More specifically, it is possible to recognize or guess what kind of effect (at least a part of the plurality of types of effects) is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the effect displayed on the display unit, and thereby it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine.

In particular, the non-gaming image is composed of a part of the effect image stored in the storage unit (more specifically, a unit image constituting the effect image or an image of a region cut out from the unit image). Since it is an image that is not played, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated image for the non-game image, the amount of storage can be suppressed by that amount, and the effect displayed on the display unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied ( It is possible to display a non-gaming image with the same high resolution as the effect image). Moreover, since it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated image for the non-game image, the development cost can be suppressed accordingly.

The non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature D1 may be a non-gaming state in which the player waits for the execution of the game, or instead of the description of the non-gaming state, a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation unit is performed. It may be in an operable state.

<Feature E1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can at least display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (moving image data) that can be used for the plurality of types of the effect (variable display, suggestion effect) that can be displayed on the display unit.
A first effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display unit from the plurality of types of effects when the predetermined start condition is satisfied.
An operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
The same as the first effect selection means or the first effect selection means when the player operates the operation unit during the non-game state in which the variation display, which is executed before the lottery result is displayed, is not performed. The second effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit from the plurality of types of effects based on substantially the same selection conditions as above.
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit, and when the effect is selected by the first effect selection means, the lottery result is displayed before the lottery result is displayed. A display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit on the display unit is provided.
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state, the display control means causes the display unit to display a display corresponding to the lottery result, and the second effect selection means. When the effect is selected by the above, the game is characterized in that the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature E1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means, at least the effect corresponding to the lottery result can be displayed before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for the plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the first effect selection means selects an effect to be displayed on the display unit according to the lottery result by the lottery means from among a plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit. To. On the other hand, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state waiting for the player to execute the game, a plurality of types that can be displayed on the display unit by the second effect selection means. The effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected based on the same selection conditions as the first effect selection means or substantially the same as the first effect selection means.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit, and the effect displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the first effect selection means. When selected, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before displaying the lottery result.

Further, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-gaming state, the display control means displays a display on the display unit corresponding to the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined result. When the effect to be displayed and displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the second effect selection means, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit corresponds to the lottery result. It is displayed on the display before displaying the display.

Therefore, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit during the non-gaming state, the effect selected under the same or substantially the same selection conditions as when the predetermined start condition is satisfied is displayed. The variable display that appears when the starting condition is satisfied can be displayed at the same frequency (probability) as when the starting condition is satisfied during the non-gaming state. As a result, the player can experience the effect displayed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied during the non-gaming state in a simulated manner with the same or substantially the same frequency as when the starting condition is satisfied. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the playability brought about by the effect displayed when the starting condition is satisfied, which can improve the degree of attention to the game machine.

The non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in the feature E1 may be a non-gaming state in which the player waits for the execution of the game, or instead of the description of the non-gaming state, a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation unit is performed. It may be in an operable state.

<Feature F1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can at least display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (moving image data) that can be used for the plurality of types of the effect (variable display, suggestion effect) that can be displayed on the display unit.
An effect selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects an effect to be displayed on the display unit from the plurality of types of effects in response to the lottery result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied.
An operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
It is a display control means for displaying the effect selected by the effect selection means on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display executed before the lottery result is displayed is performed. Display control means (sub-control) for displaying an effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit on the display unit when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during a non-gaming state. Board 940) and
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-gaming state, the operation is executed between the time when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means. A part of the effect to be performed is provided with an effect non-execution means (sub-control board 940) that is not executed between the time when the predetermined operation is performed and the time when the effect selected by the effect selection means is completed. A game machine characterized by being.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature F1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating a controlled portion that can be operated by a player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means, at least the effect corresponding to the lottery result can be displayed before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for the plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit, and the effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the effect selection means. If so, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.

Further, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state waiting for the player to execute the game, the effect is selected by the effect selection means and is stored in the storage unit. The effect using the effect image is displayed.

Here, when the player operates the operation unit during the non-gaming state, one of the functions executed between the establishment of the predetermined start condition and the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means. The unit is non-executed from the time when the operation unit is operated by the effect non-execution means until the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means.

Therefore, the period from when a predetermined operation to the operation unit is performed in the non-gaming state to the end of the effect displayed on the display unit (that is, the effect selected by the effect selection means) and the predetermined start condition are set. In the period from the establishment to the end of the effect displayed on the display unit (that is, the effect selected by the effect selection means), a part of the effect executed in the latter period is not executed in the former period. There is a difference in appearance in terms of points.

As a result, the effect displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state is different from the effect displayed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and is special after the end of the effect. Based on the difference, it is possible to make the player preferably recognize that the effect is a pseudo effect in which the gaming state is unlikely to occur.

Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-gaming state, the player performs a special game after the effect with respect to the effect displayed on the display unit based on, for example, the predetermined operation. It is possible to suppress misidentification of an event that is impossible in a pseudo-effect such as the occurrence of a state. As a result, the player mistakenly recognizes the effect displayed on the display unit by operating the operation unit during the non-game state, and as a result, the player expects the occurrence of a special gaming state that should not occur. The occurrence of unfavorable situations can be suitably suppressed.

The non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in the feature F1 may be a non-gaming state in which the player waits for the execution of the game, or a predetermined operation on the operation unit can be performed instead of the description of the non-gaming state. It may be in an operable state.

Further, instead of the description of the effect non-execution means in the game machine described in the feature F1, the player sends the operation unit to the operation unit during the non-game state in which the variation display that is executed before the lottery result is displayed is not performed. When a predetermined operation is performed, some of the functions executed between the establishment of the predetermined start condition and the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means are produced after the predetermined operation is performed. It may be a function stop means that stops until the effect selected by the selection means is completed.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature F1, the effect that is not executed by the effect non-execution means may be an effect associated with the input operation of the input means that can be input by the player during the variable display. , An effect in which an operating body (accessory) driven by a driving means such as a motor or a solenoid performs a predetermined operation may be used.

<Feature F2>
Feature The gaming machine described in F1.
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit after the variable display of the symbol and the variable display of the symbol, and also by the first effect selection means. When the effect is selected, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.
When the player operates the operation unit during the non-gaming state, the effect non-execution means executes the variable display of the symbol, and displays the display corresponding to the lottery result after the operation unit is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that it is not executed until it is displayed on the display unit.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F2, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit after the variable display of the symbol, while the player is in the non-gaming state. When the operation unit is operated, the effect non-execution means does not execute the variable display of the symbol between the time when the operation unit is operated and the time when the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, since the player does not recognize the variable display of the symbol between the time when the operation unit is operated and the time when the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, the player operates during the non-game state. It is possible to preferably suppress misrecognition of the effect displayed on the display unit due to the operation of the unit.

<Feature F3>
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.
An operating member (accessory) that operates by a predetermined driving means,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the operation control means (secondary) for operating the operation member by driving the drive means before the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit. With a control board 940)
When the player performs the predetermined operation during the non-gaming state, the effect non-execution means responds to the lottery result after the predetermined operation is performed on the operation of the operation member by the operation control means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is not executed until the display is displayed on the display unit.

In the game machine described in the feature F3, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the operating member operates before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit, while the game is played during the non-game state. When a person operates the operation unit, the operation of the operating member is not executed by the effect non-execution means from the operation of the operation unit to the display of the display corresponding to the lottery result on the display unit. It is said that. Therefore, since the player does not recognize the operation of the operating member between the time when the operation unit is operated and the time when the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, the player operates during the non-gaming state. It is possible to preferably suppress misrecognition of the effect displayed on the display unit due to the operation of the unit.

<Feature G1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
An operating means (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player, and
It is a display selection means for selecting a mode of variable display (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and is executed before the lottery result is displayed. When the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state in which the variable display is not performed, the variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit can be selected when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting the mode, and
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means at the variation time corresponding to the variation display. A control means (sub-control board 940) is provided.
The display control means is a corresponding display composed of at least a part of variable displays according to the mode selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state. At least one of the first display (suggestion effect) that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition to the special gaming state, or the second display including the predetermined display (holding display 1622, suggestion display 1623) that can suggest the degree of expectation. A gaming machine characterized in that a corresponding display including a corresponding display (pseudo fluctuation display for demonstration) is displayed on the display unit in a time shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation display according to the selected mode.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature G1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, at least the predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode (specific content) to be displayed on the display unit. When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the variation display selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit at the variation time corresponding to the variation display. Will be done.

On the other hand, the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state (during the non-gaming state waiting for the player to execute the game) in which the variable display that is executed before the lottery result by the lottery means is not displayed. In this case, the display selection means can select the variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and can be selected when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The mode of variable display is selected.

Then, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means is a corresponding display composed of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means, which is special. A first display that can suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the gaming state (the degree of expectation that indicates the degree of ease of transition to the special gaming state), or a second display that includes a predetermined display that can suggest the degree of expectation. The corresponding display including at least one of the above is displayed on the display unit in a time shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected variation display mode.

As a result, the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state and displays the corresponding display, which is the display corresponding to the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means, thereby satisfying the predetermined starting condition. What kind of display (first display or predetermined display included in the second display) can suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state even if it is not (even if the predetermined starting condition is not satisfied). It is possible to visually recognize whether it is a display. Therefore, in a configuration in which the variation display displayed when the start condition is satisfied includes the first display and the second display, which are displays that can suggest the degree of expectation, an event that can be expected after the variation display (for example, special). It is possible to improve the playability of estimating the degree of ease of transition to the game state) from the content of the variation display, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game machine.

In particular, the corresponding display displayed when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state is displayed on the display unit in a time shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the variation display mode selected by the display selection means. Therefore, the display that can suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state (the first display or the predetermined display included in the second display) is efficiently visually recognized within a time shorter than the fluctuation time. Can be done.

It should be noted that the non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature G1 may be in the non-gaming state in which the variation display, which is executed before the lottery result is displayed, is not performed, and the player executes the game. It may be in a non-gaming state of waiting, or instead of the description of the non-gaming state, it may be in an operable state in which a predetermined operation can be performed on a predetermined operating means or a predetermined operating unit.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature G1, the "variation display selected (by the display selection means)" may be from the start to the end of the variation display, or from the start to the end of the variation display. In addition, it may include the state before or at the start of the variation display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature G1, the "corresponding display" may be the variation display itself selected by the display selection means, or may be a variation display in which a part of the variation display is omitted. Good.

<Feature G2>
The gaming machine described in Feature G1.
As a mode that can be selected by the display selection means, a plurality of types including at least one of the first display or the second display as a plurality of different display effects that can be executed at the same timing after the start of the variable display. Is set,
The display control means is a mode that can be selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, and can be executed at the same timing. Among them, two or more display effects are displayed on the display unit at the same time in a smaller size than the case where the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. A game machine to be.

In the game machine described in the feature G2, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, a plurality of different types preset for the variable display mode selected by the display selection means are different. The first display (a display included in the variable display that can suggest the expected degree of transition to the special gaming state) or the second display (a display included in the variable display and the expected degree) as a display effect. At least one of the display including the predetermined display that can suggest) is smaller in size than the case where the display control means displays the variable display selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. , At the same time, it is displayed on the display.

That is, since two or more first displays or two or more second displays can be simultaneously displayed on the display unit at the same timing after the start of the variable display, the player can display the two or more first displays at the same time during the non-gaming state. , A display (first display or a predetermined display included in the second display) that can suggest a degree of expectation of 2 or more that can appear in different variable displays executed by satisfying a plurality of start conditions. At the same time, they can be visually recognized together. Therefore, the player can efficiently recognize the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation degree of 2 or more in the non-gaming state, so that the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation degree is changed during the game. It is possible to facilitate the game while recognizing the difference in the degree of expectation according to the difference.

Further, the two or more first displays or the two or more second displays displayed at the same time are displayed in a smaller size than the case where the variable display selected by the display selection means is displayed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to preferably make the player recognize that the first display and the second display are displays in which a special gaming state is unlikely to occur after the display, based on the display size. ..

<Feature H1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
An operating means (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player, and
It is a display selection means for selecting a mode of variable display (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and is executed before the lottery result is displayed. When the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state in which the variable display is not performed, the variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit can be selected when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting the mode, and
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit is provided. ,
When the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, the display control means is a corresponding display (pseudo for demonstration) composed of at least a part of the variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. (Fluctuating display) and the display corresponding to the lottery result for the corresponding display are displayed on the display unit, and at least a part of the corresponding display or at least one of the displays corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. A game characterized in that when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display unit is displayed in a smaller size than when a variable display according to a mode selected by the display selection means or a lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. Demonstration.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature H1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, at least the predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode (specific content) to be displayed on the display unit. Further, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit.

On the other hand, the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state (during the non-gaming state waiting for the player to execute the game) in which the variable display that is executed before the lottery result by the lottery means is not displayed. In this case, the display selection means can select the variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and can be selected when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. A variable display is selected. Then, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means provides a corresponding display composed of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means, and the corresponding display. The display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit.

As a result, the player can visually recognize at least a part of the variable display that can be displayed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied as the corresponding display by operating the operating means during the non-gaming state. Therefore, since at least a part of the variable display that can be displayed when the starting condition is satisfied can be displayed in the non-game state, the game brought about by the variable display displayed when the starting condition is satisfied. It is possible to increase the player's interest in sex, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game machine.

In particular, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means causes at least a part of the corresponding display (at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means), or , At least one of the displays corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a smaller size than the case where the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means or the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. It is displayed in the section.

As a result, a part or all of the corresponding display (at least a part of the variable display) displayed on the display unit after a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means during the non-game state, or a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. , Unlike the variable display and lottery result displayed based on the fulfillment of the predetermined start conditions, the display is such that there is no possibility that a special gaming state will occur after the corresponding display ends or after the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. It is possible to make the player preferably recognize that there is something based on the display size.

Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means during the non-gaming state, the special gaming state occurs after the corresponding display displayed on the display unit based on the predetermined operation, for example. It is possible to suppress misidentification of an event that is impossible in a non-gaming state, such as. As a result, the player mistakenly recognizes the corresponding display displayed on the display unit and the display corresponding to the lottery result by operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, and thereby a special gaming state that should not occur. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of situations that are unfavorable to the player or the clerk of the amusement park, such as expectations for the occurrence of

It should be noted that the non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature H1 may be in the non-gaming state in which the variation display, which is executed before the lottery result is displayed, is not performed, and the player executes the game. It may be in a non-gaming state of waiting, or instead of the description of the non-gaming state, it may be in an operable state in which a predetermined operation can be performed on a predetermined operating means or a predetermined operating unit.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature H1, the "variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means" may be from the start to the end of the variation display, or from the start to the end of the variation display. In addition, it may include the state before or at the start of the variation display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature H1, the "corresponding display" may be the variation display itself selected by the display selection means, or may be a variation display in which a part of the variation display is omitted. Good.

<Feature H2>
Feature The gaming machine described in H1.
As a mode that can be selected by the display selection means, a mode including a plurality of different display effects that can be executed at the same timing after the start of the variable display is set.
The display control means is a mode that can be selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, and can be executed at the same timing. Among them, two or more display effects are displayed on the display unit at the same time in a smaller size than the case where the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. A game machine to be.

In the game machine described in the feature H2, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, one of a plurality of types of variable displays prepared in advance for the mode selected by the display selection means. Two or more corresponding displays corresponding to two or more variable displays in part or all are displayed targets, and at least a part of each corresponding display in the two or more corresponding displays targeted for display is display control. When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied by the means, the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed on the display unit at the same time in a smaller size than when the variable display is displayed.

That is, when there are two or more corresponding displays to be displayed, at least a part of each of the two or more corresponding displays can be displayed on the display unit at the same time, so that the player can display the same in the non-gaming state. The display effects that can be executed at the timing can be visually recognized at the same time.

Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which a variable display including a display effect capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of transitioning to the special gaming state is prepared, the player executes the operation means at the same timing by operating the operating means during the non-gaming state. It is possible to efficiently recognize the difference between two or more possible display effects that can suggest the degree of expectation by visually recognizing the variable display after the effect. As a result, the player can easily play the game while recognizing the difference in the degree of expectation according to the difference in the display that can suggest the degree of expectation during the game.

<Feature H3>
Feature The gaming machine described in H2.
The display effect is a display included in the variation display selected by the display selection means, and is a first display (suggestion effect) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state, or the display selection means. It is configured to include at least one of the second displays including the predetermined display (hold display 1622, suggestion display 1623) which is included in the variation display selected by the above and can suggest the degree of expectation.
When the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display controlling means includes the first display or the second display included in the two or more corresponding displays targeted for display, respectively. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of them is simultaneously displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than the case where a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. ..

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature H3, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the first display (to the special gaming state) included in each of the two or more corresponding displays targeted for display. At least one of the display (display that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition) and the second display (display including a predetermined display that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition to the special gaming state) is displayed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. It is displayed on the display unit at the same time in a smaller size than the case where the variable display according to the mode selected by the selection means is displayed.

That is, since two or more first displays or two or more second displays can be simultaneously displayed on the display unit at the same timing after the start of the variable display, the player can display the two or more first displays at the same time during the non-gaming state. , A display (first display or a predetermined display included in the second display) that can suggest a degree of expectation of 2 or more that can appear in different variable displays executed by satisfying a plurality of start conditions. At the same time, they can be visually recognized together. Therefore, the player can efficiently recognize the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation degree of 2 or more in the non-gaming state, so that the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation degree is changed during the game. It is possible to facilitate the game while recognizing the difference in the degree of expectation according to the difference.

<Feature J1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
An operation means that can be operated by the player and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operated portion An operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) located at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operated state, and
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be set to the predetermined direction or the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. With an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that can move in the opposite direction,
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the movement of the position of the operation means by the operation means, and
It is a display selection means for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and is executed before the lottery result is displayed. When the player operates the operating means located in the neutral position during the non-technical state in which the variable display is not performed, the predetermined starting condition is satisfied as the mode of the variable display displayed on the display unit. Display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode that can be selected in the case of
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means for displaying the variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means on the display unit and displaying the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, the display control means (sub-control board 940) causes at least the display unit to display the variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. ) And,
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variation display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variation display according to the mode.
In the display control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the player can operate the operation means. Is operated from the neutral position in the predetermined direction, a predetermined effect prepared so as to appear in the specific variation display is displayed on the display unit.
The motion control means is used during a period during which the operating means can be operated when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state and the specific variable display is selected by the display selecting means. After moving the operated portion from the neutral position in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is moved in the opposite direction to the neutral position.
In the display control means, when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state and the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means, the operation control means controls the operated portion. The gaming machine is characterized in that when is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction, a predetermined effect prepared so as to appear in the specific variation display is displayed on the display unit.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature J1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, at least the predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode (specific content) to be displayed on the display unit. Further, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. The operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation with respect to the operated portion by the control by the operating means.

When the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state (during the non-gaming state waiting for the player to execute the game) in which the variable display is not performed, which is executed before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. As a mode of variation display to be displayed on the display unit by the display selection means, a variation display that can be selected when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and can be selected when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Mode is selected. Then, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means at least displays the variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means on the display unit.

As a result, the player can visually recognize the variable display that can be displayed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied by operating the operating means during the non-gaming state. Therefore, since the variable display that can be displayed when the starting condition is satisfied can be displayed during the non-gaming state, the player with respect to the game playability brought about by the variable display displayed when the starting condition is satisfied. Since it is possible to increase the interest of the game machine, the degree of attention to the game machine can be increased.

Here, the variation display selected by the display selection means includes a specific variation display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variation display, and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. If the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means (when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means), the specific variation is selected. When the player operates the operated portion from the neutral position in a predetermined direction during the period in which the operation means in the display can be operated, the display control means prepares a predetermined effect so as to appear in the specific variable display. Is displayed on the display.

When a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state (the player operates the operation means during the non-game state and is specified by the display selection means). (When the variable display of) is selected), after the operated portion is moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation control means during the period in which the operated portion can be operated, the operated portion is moved to the predetermined position. It is moved to the neutral position in the direction opposite to the direction of. Therefore, when a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the subject is subject to operation during the period in which the operated portion can be operated during the specific variable display. The operation unit automatically reciprocates as if it were operated by a player.

As a result, when a specific fluctuation display is displayed by the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, the operated unit is operated during the period during which the operated unit can be operated during the specific fluctuation display. It is possible to simulate a situation in which the player is operated by the player without actually operating the operated portion.

Then, when the operated unit is moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the motion control means, the display control means displays a predetermined effect prepared so as to appear in the specific variable display on the display unit. .. Therefore, when a specific variation display is displayed by operating the operating means while the player is in the non-gaming state, the player is operated during the period during which the operated portion in the specific variation display can be operated. You can experience what kind of effect will appear when you operate the part, without actually operating the operated part.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a specific variation display (variation display including a period during which the player can operate the operating means) can appear as a variation display displayed when the start condition is satisfied, the player is in a non-gaming state. Since it is possible to experience the specific variable display in a simulated manner, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the playability brought about by the specific variable display, which enables a predetermined effect to appear with the participation of the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine.

The non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature J1 may be in the non-gaming state in which the variation display, which is executed before the lottery result is displayed, is not performed, and the player executes the game. It may be in a non-gaming state of waiting, or instead of the description of the non-gaming state, it may be in an operable state in which a predetermined operation can be performed on a predetermined operating means or a predetermined operating unit.

<Feature J2>
The gaming machine according to feature J0 or feature J1.
When the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction during the display of the variation display based on the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, the non-gaming state is terminated. A gaming machine including a non-gaming state ending means (sub-control board 940).

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature J2, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction during the display of the variation display based on the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, The non-gaming state ending means terminates the non-gaming state. Therefore, the player's operation on the operated means (more specifically, the variable display displayed based on the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state) is displayed in the non-gaming state. It can be easily terminated by the operation of the operated portion in a predetermined direction by the player).

<Feature K1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display (stop display) corresponding to the lottery result. A game machine equipped with a display device 479).
A display control means for controlling the display unit to display the predetermined variation display and the result display when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the predetermined display condition (starting prize of a special symbol, A variation display image including at least a part of the variation display displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the pressing operation device is pressed during the non-game state) and the variation. The display image is a game machine image (game machine image 1701) corresponding to the game machine displayed on the display unit, and a player image (player image 1702) corresponding to the player located on the front side of the game machine. The gaming machine is provided with a display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the display of the image on the display unit.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature K1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the case where the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the predetermined variation display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are changed to the predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means by the control of the display control means. The corresponding result display is displayed at least on the displayable display.

In the game machine, when a predetermined display condition is satisfied, a variation display image including at least a part of the variation display displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied by the control of the display control means, and the variation. A game machine image corresponding to the game machine whose display image is displayed on the display unit and a player image corresponding to the player located on the front side of the game machine are displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the player who plays the game with the game machine displays the game machine image displayed on the display unit based on the establishment of the display condition through the movement and state of the player who plays the game with the game machine. It is possible to convey to the player various information such as the player's emotions according to the degree of expectation indicated by the effect displayed in the variable display and the operation method for the game machine with respect to the current variable display.

In the variable display displayed when a predetermined display condition is satisfied in the game machine described in the feature K1, at the end of the variable display, the result display by at least a part of the game machine image or the player image is supported. It may be configured to display the image.

<Feature K2>
Feature The gaming machine described in K1.
When the display control means displays the game machine image and the player image on the display unit, the lottery result of the game machine image or at least one of the player images is determined by the lottery means. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a part thereof is controlled to be displayed differently depending on whether or not it is a result.

In the game machine described in the feature K2, when the game machine image and the player image are displayed on the display unit, at least one of the game machine image or the player image is a lottery means under the control of the display control means. At least a part of the lottery result is displayed as different depending on whether or not the result is a predetermined result. Therefore, the lottery result by the lottery means can be suggested to the player by the difference of at least a part in at least one of the game machine image and the player image.

<Feature K3>
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2.
At the timing of displaying the result display, the display control means changes the player image into an image corresponding to the result display when the predetermined result (big hit winning) is obtained, without displaying the result display. A game machine characterized in that at least control is performed.

In the game machine described in the feature K3, at the timing of displaying the result display, the result display is supported when the player image is a predetermined result without displaying the result display by the control of the display control means. It is changed to the image. Therefore, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result that causes a special gaming state, the result can be suggested to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature L1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display unit is provided with a display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the display of the predetermined variation display and the result display.
The display control means is a first lottery result display control that displays the result display in a predetermined mode (combination of decorative symbols) when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the variable display is displayed on the display unit. When the variable display is displayed on the display unit, the result display by the first lottery result display control is displayed in a mode (deformation, reduction) different from the predetermined mode, or the first result. A second lottery result display control for displaying a predetermined image (alternative display 1625) corresponding to the predetermined result (big hit winning), which is an image having a content different from the result display by the display control, can be executed. A game machine characterized by that.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature L1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying the result display corresponding to the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the case where the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the predetermined variation display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are changed to the predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means by the control of the display control means. The corresponding result display is displayed at least on the displayable display.

In the game machine, the display control means is configured to be able to execute the first lottery result display control and the second lottery result display control. Specifically, according to the first lottery result display control, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the variation display is displayed on the display unit, the result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a predetermined mode. On the other hand, according to the second lottery result display control, when the variable display is displayed on the display unit, the result display by the first lottery result display control is displayed in a mode different from the predetermined mode, or , An image having a content different from the result display by the first lottery result display control and corresponding to a predetermined result is displayed. Therefore, the lottery result displayed by the second lottery result display control may be different from the lottery result displayed by the first lottery result display control, or the content thereof may be different. It is possible to increase the variation for the display of the above, and it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the lottery result by deformation, reduction, etc. or images having different contents. Thereby, when the lottery result is displayed, it is possible to provide the game property of paying close attention to the lottery result.

<Feature M1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided.
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the display control means applies to the operated portion and the operated portion during the operable period. An image (directed image 1712) including a part of the body (left hand 1712B) that is in contact with or close to the body and that performs an operation on the operating means (moving operation on the operated portion) while the part of the body is moving. A gaming machine characterized in that control for displaying on the display unit is performed.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature M1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. Then, in the game machine, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the player can operate the operation means by the control of the display control means. An image including an operated portion of the operating means and a part of the body that is in contact with or is close to the operated portion during a possible period, and the operating means (moving operation with respect to the operated portion) is performed while the part of the body is moving. The image to be operated is displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the content of the displayed image (an image in which a part of the body that is in contact with or close to the operated portion of the operating means performs an operation on the operating means while moving) suggests to the player an operating method for the operating means. Can be done.

<Feature M2>
Feature The gaming machine described in M1.
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the display control means operates while a part of the body moves during the operable period. A gaming machine characterized in that it controls to display an image (character information by a character string such as "continuous hitting!") Showing information related to the operation on the operating means on the display unit together with an image for performing an operation on the means.

In the game machine described in the feature M2, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the player operates the operation means by the control of the display control means. An image showing information (display information 1713) related to the operation of the operating means is displayed together with an image of performing an operation on the operating means while a part of the body touching or approaching the operated portion of the operating means is moving during a possible operable period. Since it is displayed on the display unit, the player can easily suggest the operation method for the operation means by the image showing the information related to the operation for the operation means.

<Feature N1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided.
The display control means is a moving image showing the operation of the operation means during the operable period when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means. Therefore, the position of the operated portion of the operating means has a displacement amount different from the displacement amount controlled by the motion control means, or a reciprocating speed mode different from the reciprocating speed controlled by the motion control means. A gaming machine characterized in that control is performed so that a moving image (effect image 1715) including at least one of the modes is displayed on the display unit.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature N1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. Then, in the game machine, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and a specific variable displacement display is selected by the display selection means, the player can operate the operation means by the control of the display control means. A moving image showing the operation of the operating means in a possible period, in which the position of the operated portion of the operating means is different from the displacement amount controlled by the motion control means, or the motion control means. A moving image including at least one aspect of the reciprocating speed different from the controlled reciprocating speed is displayed on the display unit. Thereby, the operation of the operation means controlled by the operation control means can be suggested to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature N2>
The gaming machine described in feature N1.
The motion control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in a situation where the moving image is displayed on the display unit, the operation means is operated to control the position of the operated portion to be changed.

In the game machine described in the feature N2, in the situation where the moving image is displayed on the display unit, the operating means operates under the control of the motion control means, and the position of the operated portion changes accordingly. During the operation of the operation means in which the position of the operation unit is changed, the player is made to visually recognize the moving image displayed on the moving image displayed on the display unit so that the operation mode of the operating means can be concretely grasped. Can be done.

<Feature P1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided.
The motion control means moves the position of the operated portion from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction during at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the operable period. A gaming machine characterized by controlling displacement.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature P1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. Then, in the game machine, the position of the operated portion is controlled by the operation control means from the neutral position to a predetermined direction or the predetermined direction in at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the operable period. It is configured to displace in the opposite direction. Therefore, the player can be made to grasp the remaining time of the operable period through the position of the operated portion (for example, the height position of the operated portion). For example, even in a situation where a game is played without visually recognizing a display device capable of displaying a variable display, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of the operable period and the length of the remaining time through the position of the operated portion. be able to.

<Feature Q1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The display control means controls to display a predetermined effect when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the control of the motion control means, and controls the motion control means. A gaming machine characterized in that control for displaying the predetermined effect when the position of the operated portion is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position can be at least executed. ..

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature Q1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, the display control means controls to display a predetermined effect when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the control of the motion control means, and controls the motion control means. When the position of the operated portion is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position, the control for displaying a predetermined effect is configured to be at least feasible. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the operated portion of the operating means, recognizes the position of the operated portion (for example, the height position), or puts his / her hand on the operated portion to position the operated portion. Although it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the amount of operation and the trigger of the effect to be executed, the opportunity to execute the same effect is associated with the height positions of multiple types of operation surfaces. It is possible to provide playability.

<Feature R1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The display control means is a control that causes a predetermined first effect to appear when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the control of the motion control means, and the motion control means. It is possible to at least execute the control of displaying a predetermined second effect different from the first effect when the position of the operated portion is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control of. A gaming machine characterized by being composed.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature R1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, the display control means is a control that causes a predetermined first effect to appear when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the control of the motion control means, and the motion control means. It is possible to at least execute a control that causes a predetermined second effect different from the first effect to appear when the position of the operated portion is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control of. .. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the operated portion of the operating means, recognizes the position of the operated portion (for example, the height position), or puts his / her hand on the operated portion to position the operated portion. It is possible to provide a playability that expects the execution of different effects set separately according to the amount of operation while feeling the change of.

<Feature S1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that at least one of the position of the operated portion or the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operated portion can be changed.
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided.
In the operation control means, the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated portion moves in the predetermined direction in the predetermined direction during the operable period. In the case of being operated, the control to set the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the predetermined amount of movement to a predetermined first magnitude and the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the predetermined amount of movement are set. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a control for setting a second size different from the first size can be performed.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature S1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the motion controlling means so that at least one of the position of the operated portion and the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the moving operation of the operated portion can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. Then, in the game machine, in the motion control means, a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated portion moves in a predetermined direction in a predetermined direction during the operable period. When operated, control to set the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the operated portion has moved by a predetermined amount to a predetermined first magnitude, and the reaction force against the operation after the operated portion has moved by a predetermined amount. At least a control to make the size of the second size different from the first size is practicable. For this reason, the player is allowed to experience in advance as a feeling how much force the operated portion of the operating means should be operated to operate the operated portion, and then the operation feeling is different from that feeling. You can make the degree easy to understand. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the difference in the operation feeling when a plurality of types of operation feelings are provided in the operation means, and accurately conveys the information to be conveyed to the player by the difference in the operation feeling such as the change in the degree of expectation. can do.

<Feature S2>
The gaming machine described in feature S1.
The specific variable display is configured so that one of a plurality of types of effects can appear when the operating means is operated during the operable period.
The plurality of types of the display control means are the same when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means and the operation means is operated during the operable period. Of the above-mentioned effects, at least a control for displaying a predetermined first effect and a control for displaying a second effect different from the first effect can be executed.
In the operation control means, the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated portion moves in the predetermined direction in the predetermined direction during the operable period. When operated, when the first effect appears by the display control means, the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the operation after the predetermined amount of movement is controlled to be the first magnitude. When the second effect is produced by the display control means, it is characterized in that the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the operation after the movement by the predetermined amount is controlled to be the second magnitude. A game machine featuring.

In the game machine described in the feature S2, in the specific variable display, one of a plurality of types of effects appears when the operation means is operated during the operable period in which the player can operate the operation means. It is configured to be possible. The display control means is a predetermined first of a plurality of types of effects when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means and the operation means is operated during the operable period. A control for displaying the first effect and a control for displaying a second effect different from the first effect are configured to be at least feasible.

Then, in the game machine, in the motion control means, a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated portion moves in a predetermined direction in a predetermined direction during the operable period. When the operation is performed, when the first effect is displayed by the display control means, the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the operation after the operated portion has moved by a predetermined amount is controlled to be the first magnitude. When the second effect is produced by the display control means, the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the operation after the operated portion has moved by a predetermined amount is controlled to be the second magnitude. Therefore, when the player operates the operating means, it is possible to provide the playability in which the execution of different effects set separately according to the degree of operation feeling for the operating means is expected.

<Feature T1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the predetermined variation display and the result display when the predetermined start condition is satisfied.
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed according to the progress of the variation display is provided.
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the operation control means changes the position of the operated portion by at least a part of the period from the start of the change display by the display control means to the end of the change display. A gaming machine characterized in that it is controlled to gradually displace from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction according to the progress of the variation display during the period.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature T1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the case where the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the predetermined variation display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are changed to the predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means by the control of the display control means. The corresponding result display is displayed at least on the displayable display.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed according to the progress of the variable display.

In the game machine, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the position of the operated portion is changed by the control of the operation control means at least one of the periods from the start of the variation display by the display control means to the end of the variation display. Depending on the progress of the fluctuation display during the fluctuation period of the unit, the displacement is gradually displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. Therefore, a game in which the player can recognize the progress of the variation display by visually recognizing a change in the position of the operated portion (for example, a change in height) in the operating means or by touching the operated portion. Can provide sex.

<Feature T2>
Feature The gaming machine described in T1.
When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the operation control means shifts the position of the operated portion from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or the opposite direction according to the progress of the fluctuation display in the fluctuation period. A gaming machine characterized in that it is controlled to gradually displace to a predetermined end point position at a substantially constant speed.

In the game machine described in the feature T2, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the position of the operated portion is changed by the control of the operation control means during the fluctuation period (from the start of the fluctuation display by the display control means). Depending on the progress of the displacement display (at least a part of the period until the end of the displacement display), at a substantially constant speed from the neutral position to a predetermined end position in a predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. Gradually displace. Therefore, the player can recognize the progress of the variable display by visually recognizing the change in the position of the operated portion (for example, the change in height) in the operating means or by touching the operated portion with his / her hand. Can be provided.

<Feature U1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the predetermined variation display and the result display when the predetermined start condition is satisfied.
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and
When the operating means is operated, a predetermined event (starting based on the satisfaction of the predetermined starting condition) and ending after a predetermined time if the operation is not performed (progress of variable display, during game) It is provided with a state control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the state (progress of a predetermined period measured in time) from the state when the operation is performed to the state according to the operation amount of the operation. A game machine characterized by being.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature U1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the case where the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the predetermined variation display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are changed to the predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means by the control of the display control means. The corresponding result display is displayed at least on the displayable display.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means.

In the game machine, when the operating means is operated, the state of a predetermined event that ends after a predetermined time if the operation is not performed by the control of the state control means is the state when the operation is performed. Therefore, it is configured to proceed according to the amount of operation by the operation. For this reason, when the player wants to advance the progress of the variable display, he / she can easily advance to the section he / she wants to advance, so that the effect that was planned to be visually recognized later can be visually recognized in advance. Can be provided.

<Feature V1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the predetermined variation display and the result display when the predetermined start condition is satisfied.
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed according to the progress of the variation display is provided.
The display control means advances the progress (reproduction position) of the variable display according to the speed and operation amount of the operation from the timing when the operation with respect to the operation means is performed, and performs the operation. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is finished, it controls to return the progress of the variation display to the timing when the operation is performed or the timing when the operation is not performed.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature V1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the case where the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the predetermined variation display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are changed to the predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means by the control of the display control means. The corresponding result display is displayed at least on the displayable display.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed according to the progress of the variable display.

In the game machine, under the control of the display control means, the progress of the variable display proceeds from the timing when the operation for the operation means is performed, according to the speed and the operation amount of the operation by the operation, and the operation. Is configured so that the progress of the variation display returns to the timing when the operation is performed or the timing when the operation is not performed. Therefore, the control of the progress of the variation display on the first control board (first control means) and the control of the progress of the variation display on the second control board (second control means) are performed in synchronization with each other. In the above, it is possible to fast-forward the fluctuation display while synchronizing with the control of the progress of the fluctuation display on each control board, and to add a game property that can recognize an event that occurs later in advance.

<Feature W1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided.
The specific variation display is configured so that a predetermined effect can appear when the operating means is operated during the operable period.
In the display control means, the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated portion is operated by the operation with respect to the operation means during the operable period. When the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the operation in the case of being moved in the direction of, the control to display the predetermined effect and the operation to be operated by the operation. It is configured that at least the control of displaying the predetermined effect when the position of the portion is displaced from the neutral position to the predetermined second position separated from the first position in the predetermined direction can be executed. Characteristic gaming machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature W1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided, and the specific variable display is provided. , A predetermined effect can be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operable period.

Then, in the game machine, in the display control means, a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a specific variable displacement display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated portion is determined by the operation on the operation means during the operable period. Control that causes a predetermined effect to appear when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the operation when moved in a direction, and the position of the operated portion is neutral due to the operation. It is configured so that at least the control of displaying a predetermined effect when the displacement is performed from the position to a predetermined second position separated from the first position in a predetermined direction can be executed. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to understand the correspondence between the operation amount for the operation means and the effect to be executed, and the player is provided with the playability in which the opportunity for the same effect to be executed is associated with a plurality of types of operation amounts. can do.

<Feature X1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided.
The specific variable display is configured so that one of a plurality of types of effects can appear when the operating means is operated during the operable period.
In the display control means, the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated portion is operated by the operation with respect to the operation means during the operable period. Control to bring out a predetermined first effect among the plurality of types of effects when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the operation in the case of being moved in the direction of When the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined second position separated from the first position in the predetermined direction by the operation, the first effect among the plurality of types of effects is used. Is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to at least be executable with a control that causes a different predetermined second effect to appear.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature X1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided, and the specific variable display is provided. When the operating means is operated during the operable period, one of a plurality of types of effects can be displayed.

Then, in the game machine, in the display control means, a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a specific variation display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated portion is determined by the operation on the operation means during the operable period. When the position is moved in a direction and the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the operation, control for displaying a predetermined first effect among a plurality of types of effects, and When the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined second position separated from the first position in a predetermined direction by the operation, a predetermined second effect different from the first effect among a plurality of types of effects is performed. At least the control to be revealed is configured to be feasible. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a playability that is expected to execute different effects set according to the amount of operation.

<Characteristic Z system>
A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

<Feature Za>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The display control means is a control that causes a predetermined effect to appear when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position in the opposite direction by the control of the operation control means. When the position of the operated portion is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control of the operation control means, the control for displaying the predetermined effect. A gaming machine characterized by at least a viable configuration.

If it is the gaming machine described in the feature Za, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, the display control means controls to bring out a predetermined effect when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position in the opposite direction by the control of the operation control means. At least, when the position of the operated portion is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position in the opposite direction by the control of the operation control means, it is possible to execute a control for displaying a predetermined effect. It is composed of.

Therefore, the player visually recognizes the operated portion of the operating means, recognizes the position of the operated portion (for example, the return position in the opposite direction after the operation with respect to the operated portion), or is operated. While putting a hand on the part and feeling the change in the position of the operated part, it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the amount of operation and the trigger of the effect to be executed, so that the same effect is executed. Can provide playability associated with multiple types of return positions on the operating surface.

<Feature ZB>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
The player's body is provided with an operating portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press. An operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operating unit at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the operating unit is not in contact with each other
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation unit can be changed, and the position of the operation unit is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The display control means is a control that causes a predetermined first effect to appear when the position of the motion unit is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position in the opposite direction by the control of the motion control means. When the position of the motion unit is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control of the motion control means, a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is achieved. A game machine characterized in that it is configured so that at least the control that causes the effect to appear can be executed.

In the gaming machine described in the feature ZB, the predetermined direction in which the player can press is the operation of pushing so that the pressure of the portion in contact with the moving portion by a part of the player's body is increased. The direction may be a direction in which the movement can be performed, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be separated from the moving portion.

<Feature Zb>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The display control means causes a predetermined first effect to appear when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position in the opposite direction by the control of the operation control means. When the position of the operated portion is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control and the control of the operation control means, a predetermined effect different from the first effect is achieved. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that at least the control for displaying the second effect can be executed.

With the gaming machine described in the feature ZB or the feature Zb, it is possible to preferably operate the moving portion capable of contacting a part of the player's body or the operated portion that can be operated by the player. A game machine can be provided. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the moving means includes a moving portion that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured so that the operating portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the player's body is not in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operation unit or the operated unit is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, the display control means determines a predetermined first effect when the position of the operation unit or the operated unit is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position in the opposite direction by the control of the operation control means. The first effect is when the position of the moving portion or the operated portion is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control of displaying the above and the control of the motion control means. It is configured to be at least feasible with a control that causes a different predetermined second effect to appear.

Therefore, when the operating portion of the operating means or the operated portion of the operating means is displaced in the opposite direction to the player, the displacement amount (that is, the displacement to the first position or the displacement to the second position) is given to the player. It is possible to provide playability that expects the execution of different effects set according to the above. Further, the operating portion of the operating means or the operated portion of the operating means is visually recognized, and the position of the operating portion or the operated portion (for example, a return position in the opposite direction after being displaced in a predetermined direction) is recognized. Correspondence between the amount of displacement in the opposite direction and the trigger of the effect to be executed while feeling the change in the position of the moving part or the operated part by putting a hand on the moving part or the operated part. The relationship is difficult to understand, and thereby it is possible to provide playability in which different effects set according to the amount of displacement are expected.

<Feature Zc>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operated portion can be controlled at least.
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variation display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variation display according to the mode.
The specific variation display is configured so that when the operating means is operated during the period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.
When a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variation display, the operation control means is pressed by the player to operate the operated portion in a pressing operation direction. The first control, which is movable and the reaction force in the pressing operation direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition, and the second effect, which is different from the first effect as the effect in the specific variation display, have different expectations. When the effect is executed, the conditions for controlling the reaction force of a part of the section with respect to the first control are common, and based on a predetermined second condition including different control sections with respect to the first control. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to at least be able to execute a second control in which a reaction force in the pressing operation direction is controlled.

The gaming machine described in the feature Zc can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the motion controlling means so that the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operated portion can be controlled at least.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. The specific variation display is configured so that when the operating means is operated in the above period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.

Then, in the game machine, when the predetermined first effect is executed as the effect in the specific variation display, the motion control means moves toward the pressing operation direction in the situation where the player is pressing the operated portion. The first control, in which the operated portion can be moved and the reaction force in the pressing operation direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition, and the first effect as an effect in a specific variation display are expected. When different second effects are executed, the conditions for controlling the reaction force of the part of the section with respect to the first control are common, and a predetermined control including a section of control different from the first control is included. The second control in which the reaction force in the pressing operation direction is controlled based on the second condition is configured to be at least feasible.

Therefore, when the first effect or the second effect is executed in a specific variation display, the reaction in the pressing operation direction is performed in at least a part of the sections in each effect (that is, the sections in which the conditions for controlling the reaction force are common). Since the same reaction force can be made to be felt by the player as a force, in the section, the player has a degree of expectation from the first effect whether the effect being executed is the first effect from the feeling of the reaction force. It is difficult to distinguish whether it is a different second production. As a result, it is possible to provide playability in which the expectation of the effect executed in a specific variable display including a plurality of effects having different expectations is expected.

<Feature ZD>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
The player's body is provided with an operating portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press. An operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operating unit at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the operating unit is not in contact with each other
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation unit can be changed, and the position of the operation unit is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
As an embodiment selected by the display selection means, a specific variation display including a period during which the moving unit can operate during the period of the variation display according to the embodiment is included.
The specific variation display is configured so that when the moving unit operates during the period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.
The motion control means faces the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the motion unit when a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variation display. The first control is movable and the reaction force of at least a part of the section in the opposite direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition, and the first control as an effect in the specific variation display. When a second effect having a different degree of expectation from the first effect is executed, the second control is controlled based on a predetermined second condition in which the reaction force of the part of the section is different from that of the first control. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be at least executable.

In the gaming machine described in the feature ZD, the predetermined direction in which the player can press is the operation of pushing so that the pressure of the portion in contact with the moving portion by a part of the player's body is increased. The direction may be a direction in which the movement can be performed, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be separated from the moving portion.

<Feature Zd>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variation display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variation display according to the mode.
The specific variation display is configured so that when the operating means is operated during the period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.
When a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variation display, the motion control means moves in the opposite direction in a situation where the player presses the operated portion in a predetermined direction. As a first control in which the operated portion can be moved toward the object and the reaction force of at least a part of the section in the opposite direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition, and as an effect in the specific variation display. When a second effect having a different degree of expectation from the first effect is executed, the first control is controlled based on a predetermined second condition in which the reaction force of the part of the section is different from the first control. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that at least two controls can be executed.

With the gaming machine described in the feature ZD or the feature Zd, it is possible to preferably operate the moving portion capable of contacting a part of the player's body or the operated portion that can be operated by the player. A game machine can be provided. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the moving means includes a moving portion that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured so that the operating portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the player's body is not in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operating portion or the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operation unit or the operated unit is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. The specific variation display is configured so that when the operating means is operated in the above period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.

Then, in the game machine, when the predetermined first effect is executed as the effect in the specific variation display, the motion control means is in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the motion unit, or In a situation where the player is pressing the operated portion in a predetermined direction, the moving portion or the operated portion can be moved in the opposite direction, and at least a part of the section in the opposite direction. When the first control in which the reaction force is controlled based on the predetermined first condition and the second effect having different expectations from the first effect are executed as the effect in the specific variation display, the first control is performed. Is configured to be at least feasible with a second control controlled based on a predetermined second condition in which the reaction forces of the part of the section are different from each other.

Therefore, in the first and second effects that can be executed in a specific variable display, the reaction forces are different in at least a part of the sections in the opposite directions, so that a part of the player's body becomes a moving part. In a situation where the player is in contact or the player is pressing the operated portion in a predetermined direction, in the part of the section, the player feels the reaction force to perform the effect. It is difficult to determine whether it is the first production or the second production having a different degree of expectation from the first production. As a result, it is possible to provide playability in which the expectation of the effect executed in a specific variable display including a plurality of effects having different expectations is expected.

<Feature Ze>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
When the player moves the operated portion along the predetermined direction, the motion control means generates a reaction force that resists the moving operation and moves the operated portion along the predetermined direction. At least the first control in which the operation means proceeds and the second control in which the operation of the operating means is controlled in the direction in which the operated unit advances in the direction in which the moved operation is performed after the first control can be executed. A game machine characterized by being configured in.

If it is the gaming machine described in the feature Ze, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, when the player moves the operated portion along a predetermined direction, the motion control means generates a reaction force that resists the moving operation and causes the operated portion along the predetermined direction. The first control in which the movement is performed and the second control in which the operation of the operating means is controlled in the direction in which the operated unit advances in the direction in which the moved operation is performed after the first control is performed can be at least executable. Will be done.

Therefore, the player feels a reaction force that resists the movement operation while advancing the operated portion in a predetermined direction by the movement operation, and then the operated portion is moved to the direction side of the movement operation by the control by the second control. It feels that the reaction force has become smaller due to the operation, and in some cases, the moving speed of the operated portion due to the operation is too fast, thereby performing an operation on the operated portion (for example, a player). (Hand) There may be a situation where the user is separated from the operated part. As a result, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the movement operation of the operated portion by the player, and it is possible to provide various playability using the operation means.

<Feature ZF>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
The player's body is provided with an operating portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press. An operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operating unit at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the operating unit is not in contact with each other
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation unit can be changed, and the position of the operation unit is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The motion control means includes a first control that generates a reaction force capable of moving the motion unit in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the motion unit, and a first control thereof. (1) A gaming machine characterized in that, after performing one control, at least a second control for controlling the operation of the operating means in a direction in which the operating unit advances in a predetermined direction side can be executed.

In the gaming machine described in the feature ZF, the predetermined direction in which the player can press is the operation of pushing so that the pressure of the portion in contact with the moving portion by a part of the player's body is increased. The direction may be a direction in which the movement can be performed, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be separated from the moving portion.

<Feature Zf>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The motion control means includes a first control that generates a reaction force capable of moving the operated portion in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the operated portion. After performing the first control, it is characterized in that at least the second control for controlling the operation of the operating means in the direction in which the operated portion advances toward the predetermined direction side can be executed. Game machine.

With the gaming machine described in the feature ZF or the feature Zf, it is possible to suitably operate the moving portion capable of contacting a part of the player's body or the operated portion that can be operated by the player. A game machine can be provided. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the moving means includes a moving portion that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured so that the operating portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the player's body is not in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operating portion or the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operation unit or the operated unit is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, the motion control means is a reaction force capable of moving the motion unit or the operated portion in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the motion unit or the operated portion. At least the first control for generating the above and the second control for controlling the operation of the operating means or the operating means in the direction in which the operating unit or the operated unit advances in a predetermined direction after the first control is executed. It is configured to be possible.

Therefore, after the player feels a reaction force capable of moving the moving portion or the operated portion in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of his / her body is in contact with the moving portion or the operated portion, the player feels the reaction force. When the operating unit or the operated unit operates in a predetermined direction (that is, the opposite direction to the opposite direction) by the control by the second control, it feels that the reaction force is reduced, and in some cases, the operation. The moving speed of the operated part is too fast, which may cause a situation in which the player's part (part of the body) in contact with the moving part or the operated part is separated from the moving part or the operated part. .. As a result, in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact, the feeling received by the player from the moving portion or the operated portion that can move in the opposite direction can be given unexpectedness, and the moving means or the operating means can be given. It is possible to provide a variety of playability using.

<Characteristic Zg>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
When the player moves the operated portion along the predetermined direction, the motion control means generates a reaction force that resists the moving operation and moves the operated portion along the predetermined direction. And the operating means so that the operated portion generates a reaction force held at a fixed position or within a fixed range on the direction side in which the moving operation is performed after the first control is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to at least be able to execute a second control for controlling the operation of the above.

The gaming machine described in the feature Zg can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, when the player moves the operated portion along a predetermined direction, the motion control means generates a reaction force that resists the moving operation and causes the operated portion along the predetermined direction. And the operation of the operating means so as to generate a reaction force held at a fixed position or within a fixed range on the direction side in which the operated portion is moved after the first control is performed. The second control to be controlled is configured to be at least feasible.

Therefore, the player feels a reaction force that resists the movement operation while advancing the operated portion in a predetermined direction by the movement operation, and then the operated portion is caused by the reaction force generated by the control by the second control. By being held in a certain position or within a certain range on the direction side in which the movement operation is performed, the operated portion that has been advanced in the predetermined direction by its own movement operation suddenly stops moving, or the operated portion I feel that my movement has become worse. As a result, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the movement operation of the operated portion by the player, and it is possible to provide various playability using the operation means.

<Feature ZH>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
The player's body is provided with an operating portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press. An operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operating unit at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the operating unit is not in contact with each other
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation unit can be changed, and the position of the operation unit is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The motion control means includes a first control that generates a reaction force capable of moving the motion unit in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the motion unit, and a first control thereof. At least a second control for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the operating unit generates a reaction force held at a predetermined position or within a predetermined range after performing one control is configured to be feasible. A game machine characterized by being.

In the gaming machine described in the feature ZH, the predetermined direction in which the player can press is the operation of pushing so that the pressure of the portion in contact with the moving portion by a part of the player's body is increased. The direction may be a direction in which the movement can be performed, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be separated from the moving portion.

<Feature Zh>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The motion control means includes a first control that generates a reaction force capable of moving the operated portion in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the operated portion. After performing the first control, at least the second control for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to generate a reaction force in which the operated portion is held at a predetermined position or within a predetermined range can be executed. A game machine characterized by being configured.

With the gaming machine described in the feature ZH or the feature Zh, it is possible to preferably operate the moving portion capable of contacting a part of the player's body or the operated portion that can be operated by the player. A game machine can be provided. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the moving means includes a moving portion that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured so that the operating portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the player's body is not in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operating portion or the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operation unit or the operated unit is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, the motion control means is a reaction force capable of moving the motion unit or the operated portion in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the motion unit or the operated portion. And the operation of the operating means or the operating means so as to generate a reaction force in which the operating unit or the operated unit is held within a predetermined position or a predetermined range after the first control is performed. The second control that controls the above is configured to be at least feasible.

Therefore, after the player feels a reaction force capable of moving the moving portion or the operated portion in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of his / her body is in contact with the moving portion or the operated portion, the player feels the reaction force. Due to the reaction force generated by the control by the second control, the operated unit is held in a predetermined position or within a predetermined range on the side in the direction in which the movement operation is performed, so that the operating unit or the operated unit suddenly moves. I feel that it has disappeared, or that the moving part or the operated part has become sluggish. As a result, in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact, the feeling received by the player from the moving portion or the operated portion that can move in the opposite direction can be given unexpectedness, and the moving means or the operating means can be given. It is possible to provide a variety of playability using.

<Feature Zj>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The motion control means performs a predetermined movement operation in which a part of the player's body and the operated portion move in the predetermined direction and then the part of the player's body separates from the operated portion. The operated portion is operated in the first operation control in which the operated portion is operated in the first aspect when it is broken, and in the second aspect different from the first aspect when the predetermined movement operation is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to at least be able to execute a second motion control to be operated.

The gaming machine described in the feature Zj can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, the motion control means is a predetermined movement operation in which a part of the player's body and the operated portion move in a predetermined direction and then the part of the player's body separates from the operated portion. In the first operation control for operating the operated unit in the first aspect when the above is performed, and in the second mode different from the first aspect when the predetermined movement operation is performed, the operated unit is operated. It is configured so that at least the second operation control to be operated can be executed.

Therefore, in the case where the first motion control is performed and the case where the second motion control is performed, after the part of the player's body and the operated portion move in a predetermined direction, the player concerned. It is possible to change the mode of operation of the operated portion when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the body of the body is separated from the operated portion. For example, when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body and the operated portion move in a predetermined direction and then the part of the player's body separates from the operated portion. The operated portion can be moved to a different position (for example, a different position in the height direction), or the moving speed of the operated portion can be changed. As a result, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the movement operation of the operated portion by the player, and it is possible to provide various playability using the operation means.

<Feature ZK>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
The player's body is provided with an operating portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press. An operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operating unit at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the operating unit is not in contact with each other
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation unit can be changed, and the position of the operation unit is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The motion control means is used when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body and the motion unit are displaced in the opposite directions and then the player's body is separated from the motion unit. A first operation control for operating the operation unit in the first aspect, and a second operation control for operating the operation unit in a second aspect different from the first aspect when the predetermined situation occurs. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be at least executable.

In the gaming machine described in the feature ZK, the predetermined direction in which the player can press is the operation of pushing so that the pressure of the portion in contact with the moving portion by a part of the player's body is increased. The direction may be a direction in which the movement can be performed, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be separated from the moving portion.

<Feature Zk>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
In the motion control means, a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body and the operated portion are displaced in the opposite directions and then the part of the player's body is separated from the operated portion. In some cases, the first operation control for operating the operated portion in the first aspect and the second operation in which the operated portion is operated in a second mode different from the first aspect when the predetermined situation occurs. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to at least execute two motion controls.

With the gaming machine described in the feature ZK or the feature Zk, it is possible to suitably operate the moving portion capable of contacting a part of the player's body or the operated portion that can be operated by the player. A game machine can be provided. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the moving means includes a moving portion that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured so that the operating portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the player's body is not in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operating portion or the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operation unit or the operated unit is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, the motion control means causes a predetermined situation in which a part of the player's body is separated from the motion part after the part of the player's body and the motion part are displaced in the opposite directions. Or, when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body and the operated portion are displaced in the opposite directions and then the part of the player's body is separated from the operated portion. , The first operation control for operating the operating unit or the operated unit in the first aspect, and the operating unit or the said in a second aspect different from the first aspect when the predetermined situation occurs. It is configured so that at least the second operation control for operating the operated portion can be executed.

Therefore, after the part of the player's body and the moving portion or the operated portion are displaced in the opposite directions in the case where the first motion control is performed and the case where the second motion control is performed. , The mode of operation of the operated portion when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body is separated from the operating portion or the operated portion can be changed. For example, after a part of the player's body and the moving part or the operated part move in the opposite direction, a predetermined part of the player's body separates from the moving part or the operated part. When a situation occurs, the operated portion can be moved to a different position (for example, a different position in the height direction), or the moving speed of the operated portion can be changed. As a result, in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact, the feeling received by the player from the moving portion or the operated portion that can move in the opposite direction can be given unexpectedness, and the moving means or the operating means can be given. It is possible to provide a variety of playability using.

<Feature Zm>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The motion control means
When the operating force of the player with respect to the operated portion is a predetermined magnitude, the operated portion has a predetermined movement motion pattern (combination of moving speed and moving amount) toward the predetermined direction. Generates a predetermined reaction force that operates
When the operating force of the player with respect to the operated portion is different from the above-mentioned magnitude, the operated portion operates in the pattern of the moving operation, or the operation of the operated portion approaches the pattern of the moving operation. As described above, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to at least execute control for generating a reaction force having a magnitude different from the predetermined reaction force.

The gaming machine described in the feature Zm can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, when the operating force of the player with respect to the operated portion is a predetermined magnitude, the motion control means has a predetermined movement motion pattern (moving speed) of the operated portion toward a predetermined direction. When a predetermined reaction force that operates by the combination of the moving amount and the moving amount is generated and the operating force of the player with respect to the operated portion is different from the above-mentioned magnitude, the operated portion operates in the pattern of the moving operation. At least, control for generating a reaction force having a magnitude different from the predetermined reaction force is configured to be feasible so that the operation of the operated portion approaches the pattern of the movement operation.

Therefore, even if the player operates the operated portion with an operating force of a predetermined size or operates the operated portion with an operating force of a size different from the predetermined size. The operated portion can be operated in a predetermined direction with a predetermined movement operation pattern or a pattern similar to the movement operation pattern. As a result, even if the operating force with respect to the operated portion varies due to individual differences of the players, each player determines the operated portion with the same or similar (substantially the same) pattern as the predetermined movement operation pattern. Since it can be operated in the direction of the above, it is possible to provide any player with the playability of operating the actuated portion in the same or substantially the same pattern.

<Characteristic ZN>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
The player's body is provided with an operating portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press. An operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operating unit at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the operating unit is not in contact with each other
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation unit can be changed, and the position of the operation unit is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The motion control means
When the contact force with which a part of the player's body comes into contact with the moving portion in the predetermined direction is a predetermined magnitude, the moving portion moves in a predetermined direction in the opposite direction. Generates a predetermined reaction force that operates in a pattern (combination of movement speed and movement amount),
The predetermined reaction force is such that when the contact force is different from the magnitude, the moving portion operates in the pattern of the moving movement, or the movement of the moving portion approaches the pattern of the moving movement. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to at least execute control that generates reaction forces of different magnitudes.

In the gaming machine described in the feature ZN, the predetermined direction in which the player can press is the operation of pushing so that the pressure of the portion in contact with the moving portion by a part of the player's body is increased. The direction may be a direction in which the movement can be performed, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be separated from the moving portion.

<Characteristic Zn>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The motion control means
When the operating force with respect to the operated portion in the predetermined direction is a predetermined magnitude, the operated portion moves in a predetermined direction in the opposite direction (moving speed and moving amount). Generates a predetermined reaction force that operates in combination with)
The predetermined reaction force so that the operated portion operates in the pattern of the moving operation when the operating force is different from the magnitude, or the operation of the operated portion approaches the pattern of the moving operation. A game machine characterized in that it is configured to at least execute control that generates a reaction force having a magnitude different from that of the above.

If it is the gaming machine described in the feature ZN or the feature Zn, it is possible to preferably operate the moving portion capable of contacting a part of the player's body or the operated portion that can be operated by the player. A game machine can be provided. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the moving means includes a moving portion that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured so that the operating portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the player's body is not in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operating portion or the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operation unit or the operated unit is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, the motion control means is provided when the contact force with which a part of the player's body comes into contact with the motion unit in a predetermined direction is a predetermined magnitude, or when the contact force is applied to the operated portion in a predetermined direction. When the operating force is a predetermined magnitude, the moving unit or the operated unit moves in a predetermined direction in the opposite direction (combination of moving speed and moving amount). A predetermined reaction force to operate is generated so that the operation unit operates in the pattern of the movement operation when the contact force is different from the magnitude, or the operation of the operation unit approaches the pattern of the movement operation. Or so that the operated portion operates in the pattern of the moving operation when the operating force is different from the magnitude, or the operation of the operated portion approaches the pattern of the moving operation. It is configured to at least be feasible to control to generate a reaction force of a magnitude different from the reaction force of.

Therefore, even if the contact force with respect to the moving portion or the operating force with respect to the operated portion by the player is a predetermined magnitude or a magnitude different from the predetermined magnitude, the operating portion or the operated portion is previously subjected to. The movement operation pattern or a pattern similar to the movement operation pattern can be operated in the opposite direction. As a result, even if the contact force with respect to the moving part and the operating force with respect to the operated part vary depending on the individual difference of the player, each player has the same or similar (substantially the same) pattern of the movement operation as determined in advance. Since the moving portion or the operated portion can be operated in the opposite direction by the pattern, it is possible to provide any player with the playability of operating the moving portion or the operated portion in the same or substantially the same pattern. Can be done.

<Feature Zp>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operated portion can be controlled at least.
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variation display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variation display according to the mode.
The specific variation display is configured so that when the operating means is operated during the period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.
When a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variation display, the operation control means operates the operation means so that the operated portion can operate in the predetermined direction at a predetermined moving speed. When the first control for controlling the above and the second effect having different expectations from the first effect are executed as the effect in the specific variation display, the speed at which the operated portion is different from the predetermined moving speed. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a second control for controlling the operation of the operating means is configured to be operable in the predetermined direction.

If it is the gaming machine described in the feature Zp, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operated portion that can be operated by the player. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the motion controlling means so that the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operated portion can be controlled at least.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. The specific variation display is configured so that when the operating means is operated in the above period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.

Then, in the game machine, when a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in a specific variation display, the operation control means operates so that the operated portion can operate in a predetermined direction at a predetermined moving speed. When the first control for controlling the operation of the means and the second effect having different expectations from the first effect are executed as the effect in the specific variation display, the operated portion is different from the predetermined moving speed. It is configured to at least be executable with a second control that controls the operation of the operating means so that it can operate in a predetermined direction at a speed.

Therefore, the moving speed of the operated portion operating in a predetermined direction can be different between the case where the first effect is executed and the case where the second effect is executed in the specific variation display, so that the specific variation display can be displayed. It is possible to provide a playability that allows the player to estimate the degree of expectation of the effect to be executed in the operation based on the moving speed of the operated portion.

<Feature ZQ>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
The player's body is provided with an operating portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press. An operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operating unit at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the operating unit is not in contact with each other
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation unit can be changed, and the position of the operation unit is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
As an embodiment selected by the display selection means, a specific variation display including a period during which the moving unit can operate during the period of the variation display according to the embodiment is included.
The specific variation display is configured so that when the moving unit operates during the period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.
When a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variation display, the operation control means can operate the operation means so that the operation unit can operate in the opposite direction at a predetermined moving speed. When the first control to be controlled and the second effect having different expectations from the first effect are executed as the effect in the specific variation display, the moving unit moves at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a second control for controlling the operation of the operating means is configured to be operable in the opposite direction.

In the gaming machine described in the feature ZQ, the predetermined direction in which the player can press is the operation of pushing so that the pressure of the portion in contact with the moving portion by a part of the player's body is increased. The direction may be a direction in which the movement can be performed, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be separated from the moving portion.

<Feature Zq>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display (variation display based on a starting prize, a pseudo variation display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. When,
It is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and the operating means operates. An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated portion at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operation portion is not operated
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, and the position of the operated portion is set from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (secondary control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction, and
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display selection means (sub-control board 940).
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. With
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variation display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variation display according to the mode.
The specific variation display is configured so that when the operating means is operated during the period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.
The operation control means operates the operation means so that the operated portion can operate in the opposite direction at a predetermined moving speed when a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variation display. When the first control for controlling the above and the second effect having different expectations from the first effect are executed as the effect in the specific variation display, the speed at which the operated portion is different from the predetermined moving speed. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a second control for controlling the operation of the operating means is configured to be operable in the opposite direction.

With the gaming machine described in the feature ZQ or the feature Zq, it is possible to preferably operate the moving portion capable of contacting a part of the player's body or the operated portion that can be operated by the player. A game machine can be provided. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and by the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means are used. The result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the moving means includes a moving portion that can be touched by a part of the player's body and can be moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured so that the operating portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position in a state where a part of the player's body is not in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured so that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled so that the position of the operating portion or the operated portion can be changed by the motion controlling means. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operation unit or the operated unit is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. The specific variation display is configured so that when the operating means is operated in the above period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.

Then, in the game machine, when a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in a specific variation display, the motion control means causes the motion unit or the operated unit to move in the opposite direction at a predetermined movement speed. When the first control that operably controls the operation of the operating means or the operating means and the second effect having different expectations from the first effect as the effect in the specific variable display are executed, the moving unit or the operated unit Is configured to at least be executable with a second control that controls the operation of the operating means or the operating means so that it can operate in the opposite direction at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed.

Therefore, the moving speed of the moving unit or the operated unit operating in the opposite direction can be made different between the case where the first effect is executed and the case where the second effect is executed in a specific variation display. It is possible to provide a playability that allows a player to estimate the degree of expectation of an effect to be executed in a specific variable display based on the moving speed of the moving unit or the operated unit.

In addition, at least one feature described in feature 10 to feature Zq may be applied in combination with any other feature or a plurality of other features. The following shows the basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied.

Pachinko machine: A launch operation means operated by a player, a game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launch operation means, a passage portion for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a passage portion. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in the gaming area and gives a privilege to the player when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each of the gaming parts.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: The rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as ball gaming machines.

100 ... Game machine, 479 ... Decorative pattern display device, 611 ... Base material, 621 ... Decorative pattern, 622 ... Decorative part, 701 ... Picture, 702 ... Picture, 703 ... Picture, 721A ... Picture, 721B ... Picture, 741A ... Picture , 741B ... picture, 741C ... picture, 905 ... rear setting switch, 907 ... initialization switch, 920 ... main control board, 940 ... sub control board, 782 ... light emitting means 786 ... decorative lens part, 787 ... protruding part, 787A ... End face, 788 ... peripheral side decorative part, 789 ... decorative sheet, 790B ... reflective film part, X1 ... direct light transmitting area, X2 ... reflected light transmitting area, 850 ... button operation part, 851 ... base, 852 ... operated part, 853 ... spring member, 860 ... actuating mechanism, 870 ... operation cover member, 870B ... operation surface, 895 ... hand rest, 222 ... front plate, 1622 ... hold display, 1623 ... suggestion display, 1625 ... alternative display, 1701 ... game Machine image, 1702 ... Player image, 1712 ... Production image, 1712B ... Left hand, 1713 ... Display information, 1715 ... Production image

Claims (2)

A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result, and
A moving unit that is accessible to a part of the player's body and can move in a predetermined direction that the player can press is provided, and the operating unit is designated in a state where the player's body is not in contact. An operating means that can be placed in a neutral position,
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation unit can be changed, and the position of the operation unit is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. Motion control means that controls displacement and
A display selection means for selecting a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied.
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means for controlling the display of the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means on the display unit is provided.
As an embodiment selected by the display selection means, a specific variation display including a period during which the moving unit can operate during the period of the variation display according to the embodiment is included.
The specific variation display is configured so that when the moving unit operates during the period, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects having different expectations can appear.
When a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variation display, the operation control means can operate the operation means so that the operation unit can operate in the opposite direction at a predetermined moving speed. When the first control to be controlled and the second effect having different expectations from the first effect are executed as the effect in the specific variation display, the moving unit moves at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a second control for controlling the operation of the operating means is configured to be operable in the opposite direction. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

Images